Home

Using PC Control Software, GFK-1424B

1. NOO1X HomePos F RapidSpeed SEC Step N003 postn firstPos 0 Follow these guidelines when you embed Structured Text in a Motion Control step e Enclose all embedded Structured Text code within braces as shown in blocks 1 3 and 4 of Step2 in the previous figure e Ona block containing embedded Structured Text the N command is optional e The semicolon which is usually used to terminate Structured Text code lines is also optional e You can use Structured Text as a parameter for all Motion Control commands except for the N and G commands e For example NO16 G4F pause_time is a valid block and pause_time is a Structured Text symbol that contains a duration for the F command e N100 G prep_command is not valid The Structured Text symbol prep_command cannot contain the parameter for the G command e You can use either local or global symbols within the Structured Text expressions They can be simple symbols or elements of arrays You can set GFK 1424B Appendix E Motion Control E 27 E 28 values within the program itself Step1 in the figure or download values using Dynamic Data Exchange DDE e You can use assignment statements in separate blocks Step2 blocks 3 and 4 in the figure e Three Structured Text function blocks are available for issuing motion commands from an SFC Structured Text step AXSJOG MOVEAXS and STOPJOG see page E 30 How the Embedded Structured Te
2. The following figure shows a screen example that uses standard controls and visual elements Box Text Gai Slide Bar Temperature OK Ind Numeric Display GFK 1424B Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 15 Bar The bar control displays a scale and a moving bar The moving bar tracks the current value of the symbol assigned to the bar As the symbol value changes the bar color changes filling in the area of the bar corresponding to values less than the current symbol value Limits can be given so that as the symbol value approaches these limits the bar color changes to a specified color The bar orientation can be configured to be horizontal or vertical Bar Name Bar Units 100 90 80 Tall 60 50 40 30 20 sa 0 The Edit Bar dialog box is shown in the following figure and described in the following table Edit Bar x Bar Symbol Select Font a Symbol Manager Cancel Bar Name Name Text Color ie Help Bar Units Units Surface Color CL Bevel ja C Bottom C Left Min Display Value Limit Display Value Limit2 Display Value LAL m Bar Limits Bar Style Max Raw Value 100 Top Min Raw Value Right Max Display Value 1100 m Bar Colors Normal Color Cl Limit Color L Limit2 Color LI Display Increment 10 Untilled Color I 6 16 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK
3. Rotate Left ROL Returns a value calculated by circularly shifting the bits of the input value a specified number of positions to the left Bit values shifted from the most significant bit MSB position are rotated to the least significant bit LSB position Rotate Right ROR Returns a value calculated by circularly shifting the bits of the input value a specified number of positions to the right Bit values shifted from the least significant bit LSB position are rotated to the most significant bit MSB position Shift Left SHL Returns a value calculated by shifting the bits of the input value a specified number of positions to the left Bit values shifted from the most significant bit position are discarded during the shift and the least significant bit positions are zero filled Shift Right SHR Returns a value calculated by shifting the bits of the input value a specified number of positions to the right Bit values shifted from the least significant bit position are discarded during the shift and most significant bit positions are zero filled G 10 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Character String Statement Description ARRAY_TO_STRING Converts an input array of bytes to ASCII characters and stores them to a string output Concatenate Returns the result of concatenating two strings appending one string to the end of another string De
4. G se the Operator Interface and Program Editor to test the application programs If desired configure Windows NT to automatically start the CIMPLICITY PC Control software and application programs on power up Running PC Control Software a a o a oon a O For a control system that includes Operator Interface software In Program Manager open the PC Control Applications group Double click the Operator Interface icon Or if the Program Editor is running choose Operator Interface from the Program Editor Tools menu Note If the PC Control runtime subsystems are not active you are given the option of starting them 2 4 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Starting the PC Control Runtime Subsystems 1 From Program Manager open the PC Control Applications group 2 Double click the PC Control Runtime icon When the Runtime subsystems are active the Runtime icon appears minimized at the bottom of the screen When the Runtime subsystems are active the Runtime icon appears on the Task Bar or Tray at the bottom of the screen If the Runtime icon appears on the Tray the mouse must be used to shut down the Runtime Subsystems If the Runtime application also appears on the Task Bar it can be shut down using the keyboard To make the Runtime icon appear in the Task Bar access System Options from the Program Editor Tools menu and check the option in the Display Properties tab Shutting Down PC Co
5. Greater Than or Equal GE Returns a Boolean TRUE if the first input is greater than or equal to the second input otherwise returns FALSE Sets the RLL rung output accordingly Greater Than GT Returns a Boolean TRUE if the first input is greater than the second input otherwise returns FALSE Sets the RLL rung output accordingly Less Than or Equal Returns a Boolean TRUE if the first input is less than or equal to LE the second input otherwise returns FALSE Sets the RLL rung output accordingly Less Than LT Returns a Boolean TRUE if the first input is less than the second input otherwise returns FALSE Sets the RLL rung output accordingly Not Equal NE Returns a Boolean TRUE if the inputs are not equal otherwise returns FALSE Sets the RLL rung output accordingly Conversion Byte Array to String Converts an input array of bytes to ASCII characters and stores BATOS them to a string output The terminating byte must contain zero Date to String Converts a DATE to a STRING value A pointer variable is used to DateToString point to the string Integer to String Converts an integer to an ASCII character string representation of ATOA the value of the integer and returns the result Real to String RTOA Converts a real number to an ASCII character string representation of the value of the number and returns the result RGB to DWORD Converts a triplet of red green
6. ICB70MDL640 24VDC In 16pt IC670MDL740 12 24VDC Out 6pt 8 Press the OK button to return to the main network screen 9 To download the generated configuration to the master card select Download from the Online menu The Device Assignment dialog box will appear Select the Board 0 pull down list and choose the CIF30 DPM module To start the download click OK 3 28 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B italiana cana Serer in a N eae Lx coxa AEO ooo oii hE 0 im Conve foxd odome j OOO mewak Oke 0 ford Hodas CoD miadan tkg 0o Hasad Nodemce oo mima nva 0 am Select denser and the seria PO kafaze to be accesible vah Farce Enw COW 1 Nodence bot awadatie o Check COM 4 COM Nodevce not avaiable 6 Check COMT COWS Nodeco 5 mibavatatee a Check COM COMA Nodence mpcowalsbe a Check COM Sten adden Nove Despina Nove 10 After the download has completed you should view the Slave Configuration for each slave module and record the I Addr and Q Addr for each of the I O modules In the screen below these addresses are 2 You will need this information will when building the configuration under PC Control Slave Configuration x General Device Field Control PROFIBUS BIU Station address 2 Ok Description l Cancel IV Activate device in actual configuration F Enable watchdog control GSD fle GEF_0534 GsD ll
7. Save amp Exit Cancel Help Module Configuration for 16 point Output PROFIBUS Module Configuration x Module name Field Control BIU Number 4 Description Slot 2 16 pt Output Next dul Previous 1 0 type Byte Outputs Insert Digital Analog Byte Input Input Input Delete Digital Analog Byte Output Output Output fe Analog pe Sinar 4 Module words f1 Mem byte offset 2 Define Board i Define Potts Cancel Help GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 35 Port Configuration for 16 point Output PROFIBUS Analog Byte Port Configuration xX Analog Byte Outputs Module name Field Control BIU Next Port Module position 4 Word p Previous Port Port name slot2_outpu Save Exit Cancel Help 17 The final step for setting up the configuration is to Save and Activate the configuration If you now enter your program editor you are able to access the ports that you have defined through the symbol manager Symbol Manager RLL2 RLL CONFIG4 CFG Bia ka di T Boardinfo Listtypes ALL SYMBOLS AddLocal al ae lobal c Copy Symb ol Delet te Symbol yb ieee se Apply Help Bint Locals iL Print Globals p Local User Types 2E Jobal User Types Symbol Name 1 0 Mem Space Board Info G Board0_SL_DIAG Input Input CEFFCBIU_ control WORD Output Input Memory Memory Memory Memory Memory Memory Memory Memor
8. Selecting the Startup Screen The startup screen is the screen that appears for the current project s active configuration when the Operator Interface is started To select the startup screen 1 Select Start Screen from the Edit menu The Select New Startup Screen dialog box appears 2 Select a startup screen and click OK The selected screen is the new startup screen Selecting a Screen to Edit Before you can edit a screen you must select it To select an operator screen to edit 1 Click on the Screens menu item A list of all operator screens in the current operator interface file appears in the menu 2 Select the desired screen The screen is displayed for editing 6 8 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Section 3 Working with Controls Adding Controls To add a control 1 Select New Standard Control from the Edit menu A list a standard controls appears 2 Select the control to add The cursor shape changes to reflect the control 3 Position the cursor in the screen and click to add the control Note Most controls can also be selected from the Control Tools tool bar To cancel the operation press Esc For information on adding ActiveX controls refer to Inserting ActiveX Controls Editing Controls To edit a standard control 1 Do one of the following e Double click on the control e Select the desired control and press Enter e Select the desired control and select Edit
9. Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Example Switch Setting If the first GENI daughter board Channel 1 is to be configured to 3E0 hex we suggest setting the EEPROM DIP switch to 3E2 This example shows how to set the EEPROM address to 3E2 123 456 7 8 A Off open Lever switches V On closed cones SSSSS5 ny E E f PCIM Board High Middle Low 1 2 345 6 7 8 Fle e lelos lz Installing the PCIM in the Computer 1 Power OFF the Host computer and unplug from power source 2 Install the PCIM according to the computer manufacturer s instructions for option cards 3 Connect the bus to the PCIM this step can be done after configuring the PCIM if desired 4 DONOT Mount the PCIM where air flow across it is obstructed Mount the PCIM nearer than 1 8 inch 318cm to any other boards or rack components Use adhesives or conformal coatings on any part of the PCIM Configuring the PCIM Before configuring the PCIM make sure you have determine available I O port and shared memory addresses and the IRQ you will be using See the section Computer Resources You Must Reserve above Appendix A The Personal Computer Interface Module for Genius I O A 9 To configure the PCIM 1 Start up PC Control Program Editor 2 From the File menu choose New or Open Config to create a new system configuration or open an existing one The system configuration screen
10. Appendix A The Personal Computer Interface Module PCIM for Genius I O This appendix describes how to install the PCIM in your personal computer and configure the module using the PCIM Configuration Utility in the PC Control software Appendix B The Personal Computer Interface PCIF for Series 90 30 I O This appendix describes how to install the PCIF in your personal computer Appendix C The Personal Computer Interface PCIF2 for Series 90 30 I O This appendix describes how to install the PCIF2 in your personal computer Appendix D Application Example Provides step by step instructions on how to create an application program using the SFC and Relay Ladder program editors An Operator Interface screen is also constructed to monitor and control program operation Appendix E Motion Control Describes how to use the RS 274D compliant language set of text based instructions for motion control operation Appendix F Pointers For advanced users Describes how to use pointers for indirect addressing operations in Structured Text Appendix G Instruction Set Reference Appendix H Glossary of Terms Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Related Publications GFK 1424B GEK 90486 1 GFK 0898 GFK 0826 GFK 0356 GFK 1180 Preface Genius I O System User s Manual Series 90 30 Programmable Controller I O Module Specifications Field Control Distributed I O and Control System User s Manual Series 90
11. Field Description Fonts Sets the fonts in the program editors Colors Sets various editor colors Reset to Default Colors Restores all colors to their defaults GFK 1424B Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 27 2 28 Symbol Enumeration Tab Enumerations refer to the elements of a complex symbol That is a symbol that has elements that can be individually accessed structures function blocks etc The following check boxes work with the Show Symbol Enumerations command on the editor View menu If the associated check box is set and Show Symbol Enumerations is enabled then the respective enumerations are visible in symbol lists If the check box is reset or Show Symbol Enumeration is disabled the enumerations are not visible in symbol lists Showing symbol enumerations depending on the number of symbols can affect performance as you are using the editors since more symbols will need to be loaded into the symbol lists Note Even with enumerations off if you drag a symbol from the Symbol Manager and drop it a list box appears with that symbol s enumerations from which you can select the enumeration you want to use Field Description Show Function Block Shows the function block instance inputs and outputs Enumerations Show User Type Shows elements within an instance of a user type Enumerations Show Axis Enumerations Shows axis element symbols Show Axis Group Shows axis group element symbols Enumerations Show System Object S
12. PC Control is now running in Demo mode To run PC Control in Authorized mode You can run only purchased software in authorized mode Demo CDs will not be authorized 1 Locate the Control Program Editor icon from Programs as shown ff CIMPLICITY ARSIRICAeee eM Latest README Control H Operator Interface Hmi gt Operator Interface Help amp Program Editor Program Editor Help fi Runtime Engine E To Report Problems Fi UPS Monitor The Key Validation dialog box appears 2 Click the Authorize button The License Information dialog box will appear GFK 1424B Chapter 1 Introduction 1 5 3 Read the agreement and click the I Agree button to accept and continue The Authorization dialog box appears containing a Site Code 4 To authorize your software follow the instructions on the screen Type in the Site Code and click OK The Enter Password dialog box appears 5 Enter the default password 4 5 6 7 and click the Enter button PC Control is now running in Authorized mode Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Section 2 Using Online Documentation When using PC Control your primary source of information will be the Online Help The Online Help includes a demo to help you get started with the product and specific help topics describing the product s features and how to use them Online Help Online Help is designed to give you quick easy to access information about PC C
13. e Function Call Calls a function for execution e IF Specifies that one or more statements be executed conditionally e INCLUDE Executes a set of statements contained within an external file e REPEAT Indicates that a statement sequence be executed repeatedly until a Boolean expression evaluates to TRUE e SCAN Stops Structured Text execution to be suspended while an I O scan is done e WHILE Indicates that a statement sequence be executed repeatedly until a Boolean expression evaluates to FALSE Using PIDs in an Application Program About Using PIDs A PID is an instruction providing automatic close loop operation of continuous process control loops For each loop the instruction performs proportional control and optionally integral control derivative control or both e Proportional control causes an output signal to change as a direct ratio of the error signal variation e Integral control causes an output signal to change as a function of the integral of error signal over the time duration e Derivative control causes an output signal to change as a function of the rate of change of the error signal 4 98 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B PID Example 7 PID_Loop sfc Running MyPID local symbol of type PID MyPID MAH FALSE Auto mode MyPID OHL 100 Output limit 0 100 MyPID OLL 0 MyPID IHL 25 Integral limit 0 25 MyPID ILL 0
14. Addressing In direct addressing a data value is given a symbolic name and that symbolic name is used to directly access the data value In the following example X is assigned the value of the Y data value X i Y In indirect addressing a symbolic name commonly called a pointer symbol refers to the location where the data value is stored To get the actual data value using indirect addressing the pointer symbol is used to obtain the location of the data value then the location is used to get the actual data value In the following examples pVar1 is a pointer symbol pVar1 amp X pVar1 is assigned the location of the X data value Y pVar1 Y is assigned the value contained in X since pVar1 contains the location of X pVar1 Y X is assigned the value contained in Y Pointer Operators Assume VarlInt1 and Varlnt2 are integer symbols and plnt is defined as a pointer to integer To assign a location to a pointer symbol pint amp Varlnt1 plint is assigned the location of VarlInt1 amp means get the location of To get the data value referenced by a pointer symbol VarInt2 pInt VarInt2 is assigned the value of VarInt1 means get the value located at F 2 Using PC Control August 1998 GFK 1424B Pointer Symbol Definition As with other symbols pointer symbols are defined in the Symbol Manager The following figure shows the definition of several pointer types Symbo
15. Appears W Click the number of the access level you want to change and click OK 4 Click the new four digit number The message Enter new password again 5 Click the new four digit password again and click OK If you verify the new password correctly the password will be changed Note Click CANCEL on the keypad to set the access level to zero When attaching Control Functions to operator controls in the operator interface edit mode an access level can be specified to control the use of the each operator control GFK 1424B Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 3 s Activation and Edit Modes The Operator Interface software includes an activation and edit mode In the the edit mode you can edit create copy rename or delete screens place controls on those screens and wire controls to programs and symbols You need an access level The Operator Interface starts up in Activation Mode Switching Operator Interface Modes To switch to Edit Mode from Activate Mode You must have a level 3 or 4 access to create and edit operator interface screens From the Tools menu choose Operator Interface Screen Edit Enter the password for the level 3 or 4 access To switch to Activate Mode from Edit Mode Click Execute and select Activate Screens functions You cannot edit controls when the screens are activated 4 GFK 1424B a Controlling RLL Programs from an Operator Interface The Continuous
16. Motion Control Block Examples E 6 Block Format Define M Flag Symbols Do Not Process M Codes Feature E 10 Embedding Structured Text G56 Macro Calls Guidelines for motion in structured text E 27 Index 6 Using PC Control Software August 1998 How the Embedded Structured Text Code is Evaluated IF GOTO Command E 21 IF GOTO Command Example Monitoring E 24 Monitoring Axis Plot E 25 Monitoring Multi Axis Motion Status Multi axis status panel E 33 Multi Axis Status Panel Predefined Symbols Program Flow Control RS274 block display E 34 Running E 24 ia rc Motion Status E 25 Single Axis Panel E 25 Suspend on Spindle Commands Feature Suspend on Tool Changes Feature E 19 Wait on All M Codes Feature WHILE Command E 19 WHILE Command Example Motion Control Language E 1 Motion Control to an SFC Motion functions st G 16 Motion Functions Structured Text Motion programming Motion Qualifiers MOVEAXS E 29 G 16 Moving branch 4 38 contact points of a branch program elements Multi axis status panel Multi Axis Status Panel Multistate button 6 20 GFK 1424B Naming a bit ina symbol 4 16 Navigating in the Configuration Utility 3 5 New configuration 3 4 New a Interface file New program creating 2 22 New projects creating 2 20 Normal operation NULL pointer Numeric display 6 29 0 Onli
17. MyPID SPR 4 Setpoint ramping disabled MyPID EH TRUE PID enabled Notes on Using PIDs 1 A symbol of type PID should only be defined as a local variable A global PID symbol will be solved once per I O scan per running program This effect will cause instability and unpredictable results in PID outputs 2 If SPR lt 0 then no setpoint ramping will occur and the PID loop will use the raw SP value 3 When MAN FALSE AUTO mode the OVR is set equal to OUT each time the PID is evaluated 4 IHL ILL and IHLD will affect the bumpless transfer result 5 FF can be used as either static bias or as a dynamic FeedForward term or both Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 99 6 To use PID in Structured Text A create a local variable of type PID B set initial values of KP KI KD OHL OLL IHL ILL IHLD SPR MAN FF C create program to constantly update SP PVF and FF optional and store OUT D set EN to start the PID updating Controlling the Flow of RLL and Structured Text Application Programs The Program Control Block PRGCB allows an SFC application program to compile and control the execution of other SFC and RLL application programs To use the PRGCB 1 Create an SFC program and define a local variable e g prgcb of type PRGCB 2 Store aSTRING containing the path and filename of the program to control in prgcb NAME 3 Use the PRGCB Boolean inputs to control the program 4
18. Negate Complement Multiply Add Subtract Comparison Equality Inequality Boolean Bitwise AND Boolean Bitwise Exclusive OR Boolean Bitwise OR Co 12 Lowest Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B These symbols have the following functions e assigns an expression to a symbol e required to designate the end of a statement e used for array indexing where the array index is an integer For example this sets the i element of an array to the value j 10 intarray i j 10 e used to designate a label For example this specifies a label spray_on Labels must be followed by a statement on the same line e designates a comment For example This is a comment Pointer Operators Pointers should be used by experts only Misuse can result in unpredictable operation and great difficulty in debugging Structured Text has two pointer operators the pointer reference amp operator and the pointer dereference operator These operators are used in indirect addressing operations Information for advanced users on the use of pointers is provided in Appendix E Structured Text Syntax If you use the built in editor tools ST accessory bar and insert menus to insert Structured Text statements and functions the correct syntax is automatically entered for you Keywords appear in all upper case user replaceable expressions and parameters appear in mixed case and options appear in brackets
19. On a different diverge The entire loop and all of its contents Below the loop transition to which this loop arrow is both are moved to the target position tied Or outside of a nested loop Inside of an embedded loop The drag fails Dragging the bottom of the loop 1 Move the cursor over the loop transition Press and hold the left mouse button Drag the loop transition to the desired location the cursor will change to a loop transition cursor 2 Release the left mouse button to drop the loop transition at the desired location To cancel the drag operation press the lt ESCAPE gt key If the target location for the loop Then ransition is on the same diverge branch and is not The dragged loop transition is located at the above any of the loop arrows tied to the drop position and the loop transition remains iti in its current position Inot inside of any embedded loops not outside of any nested loops on a different diverge The entire loop and all of its contents is above any of the loop arrows tied to the moved to the target position inside of an embedded loop The drag fails and the loop returns to its previous position GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 75 Adding a Select Divergence l A Select Divergence allows the SFC program execution to follow one of two or more control paths 1 Click Edit on the menu bar and select Boolean Transition for the type of transitions to use with
20. TEEI ee Pantet M 2 Set the board attributes as appropriate and click OK Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Section 2 Configuring GENIUS I O The PC Interface Module PCIM GFK 1424B A PCIM PC Interface Module Board is used to establish a connection between a PC and a Genius I O System There are two types of PCIM Boards Single and Dual Port Each port on a PCIM Board is used to communicate on a given Genius I O bus Each Genius I O bus can support up to 30 I O Blocks The PCIM Board Definition Dialog is used to define the configuration of the PCIM Board s hardware and the I O Blocks on the connected Genius I O bus es Configuring the PCIM 1 If you have not configured the PCIM using the PCIM Configuration Utility PCU click the Run PCIM Configuration Utility button This starts up a separate utility allowing you to enter a number of configuration parameters for the PCIM The Online Help in this utility provides instructions on how to install and configure the PCIM 2 Once you have configured the PCIM and exited the PCU click the Read PCIM Params From Registry button This opens a window containing a list of configured PCIM boards 3 Select the appropriate PCIM from the Model No list 4 To test the PCIM configuration click the Test PCIM Configuration button Both lights on the PCIM should turn ON PCIM Board Definition Dialog Box Name The Name field is used to specify the name of t
21. The IEC 1131 3 specification allows overflow of the most significant unit in a duration If you prefer to use the dialog box enter the time into each field as appropriate Note If you specify a duration for an Action and choose an Action qualifier that is not time dependent the duration is ignored For an Action that has both a program Label and a duration specified duration does not begin timing down until after the Step code encounters the program Label Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Action Name The action name is used to identify the name of the action Use this name if you refer to the Action from another Action such as resetting an Action that was stored in another Action An Action can have the same name as an RLL Transition However the RLL logic for Actions and for RLL Transitions is scoped differently Therefore using the same name for an Action does not mean that the same RLL logic is executed for the RLL Transition and vice versa The Action name appears within the Action as shown in the following figure step Label_A P PaintColorAction Trans1to2 In Transito2 In15 AHD HOT In12 GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 49 Action Manager Use the Action Manager select Action Manager from the Tools menu to manage the actions that are attached to SFC steps The Action Manager displays a list of all actions that in the active SFC file and lets you r
22. 30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual CIMPLICITY HMI for Window NT and Windows 95 Base System User s Manual At GE Fanuc Automation we strive to produce quality technical documentation After you have used this manual please take a few moments to complete and return the Reader s Comment Card located on the next page Preface Libby Allen Senior Technical Writer Chapter 1 Chapter 2 GFK 1424B Contents Introd CtioM css osseo seese eose r eeens o aa aal Section 1 Setting Up PC Control seessooescoccsoecsscessocesocesoossssessse 1 2 Before Y ou A CON oes oe aye coe a tetas a a T 1 2 Upgrading PC Control erstens inertia i e Eei oats 1 4 Installing PC Control Software x54 2145 co ntandecivncaeameiataaneeae 1 4 Running and Authorizing PC Control Software eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeess 1 5 Section 2 Using Online Documentation sssccsssscssssscsssseees L 7 rine Helpis cni an E A NR 1 7 Getting Started aises s seneso ssa rossner assesses an Section 1 Overview of the Software cccccccscssssssssssssssssees 2 2 SoftWare SUBSYSTEMS onsena ia Ea ER A EE a 2 2 TEES OVS tye Jayosree naen a e a Na 2 3 TEC 1131 3 Programming Languages eseeseeesesesesreeresrerresrrrrsresreeresrerrsserrreresseeees 2 3 Q ek S Art e a E A eas Mea A A an 2 4 PC Control Runtime Subsystems 20 0 0 eee eeceeeecsseeeceseceseceeecseeeseseeeeeeeneeneeens 2 6 PLOSTAM Edito ca sees isch e aa E cave na
23. FOR counter 1 TO 100 DO number number counter IF number gt 500 THEN EXIT END_FOR GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 89 IF Statement The IF construct offers conditional execution of a statement list The condition is determined by result of a Boolean expression The IF construct has two optional parts One option provides conditional execution of an alternate statement list as determined by a second Boolean expression Another option provides unconditional execution of a third statement list if neither condition is satisfied If neither Boolean expression is TRUE and you have included an ELSE statement the statements following the ELSE are executed If an ELSE statement is not present no statements are executed Format IF BooleanExpressionl THEN StatementListl ELSEIF BooleanExpression2 THEN Optional part StatementList2 ELSE Optional part StatementList3 ND_IF Where m BooleanExpression Any expression that resolves to a Boolean value StatementList Any set of Structured Text statements Operation The following sequence of evaluation occurs if both optional parts are present e If BooleanExpression1 is TRUE StatementList1 is executed Program execution continues with the statement following the END_IF keyword e If BooleanExpression1 is FALSE and BooleanExpression2 is TRUE StatmentList2 is executed Program execution continues with
24. MIN the output The function can have up to 16 inputs Appendix G Instruction Set Reference G 15 G 16 System Objects Statement PID Loop Control PID Description PID is an instruction providing automatic close loop operation of continuous process control loops For each loop the instruction performs proportional control and optionally integral control derivative control or both Program control block PRGCB Allows an SFC application program to compile and control the execution of other SFC and RLL application programs Timer TMR Implements a timer in the Structured Text language Trigonometric and Logarithmic Statement Arc Cosine ACOS Description Calculates the arc cosine of the input The result is in radians Arc Sine ASIN Calculates the arc sine of the input The result is in radians ARC Tangent ATAN Calculates the arc tangent of the input The result is in radians Cosine COS Calculates the cosine of the input which must be in radians Exponential EXP EXPT Calculates the natural log exponentiation of the input value raises e to the power of the input Raises a value to the power specified by a second value Natural Log LN Calculates the natural logarithm of a value Logarithm LOG Calculates the base 10 logarithm of a value Sine SIN Calculates the sine of the input which must be in radians Tangent TA
25. Observe the following guidelines when you create a Simultaneous Divergence e Do not reference the same variable in different paths of a Simultaneous Divergence e Do not call the same child SFC from Macro Steps in different paths of a Simultaneous Divergence e To ensure that proper convergence do not use Labels in the following ways To jump outside a Simultaneous Divergence To jump into a Simultaneous Divergence To jump to another path within a Simultaneous Divergence Adding Steps Select the step tool from the SFC Tool Bar Move the cursor over the left control path of the simultaneous diverge Press the left mouse button to drop a step element into the SFC program Move the cursor over the next two control paths and drop a step element into each of them Move the cursor over the control path below the bottom of the diverge and above the loop tool Add three consecutive step elements at this point in the SFC program GFK 1424B Appendix D Application Examples D 7 Adding Transitions Select the transition tool from the SFC Tool Bar e Move the cursor below each of the control paths in simultaneous diverge and click the left mouse button to drop a transition element into the SFC program Repeat the same action after each of the three steps outside the simultaneous diverge D 8 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B 2 Saving an Application Program Before you begin adding the detail to y
26. Takes the input ASCII string and stores the characters of the string in a byte array String to Byte Array Converts each character in the input string to its decimal value and STOBA stores the result in a byte array A zero is placed in the last byte of the array String to Date Converts a STRING to a DATE and returns the result StringToDate String to Integer Converts an ASCII numeric string to its integer equivalent ATOI String to Real ATOR Converts an ASCII numeric string including decimal point to its real equivalent String to TOD Converts a STRING to a TOD and returns the result StringToTOD Time of Day to String Converts a TOD to a STRING value and places the result in the TODToString symbol pointed to by pString G 12 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Counters and Timers Statement Count Down CTD Description Counts from a preset value down to zero The output Q goes TRUE when the count equals zero It can be used for example to count recurring events Count Up CTU Counts from zero up to a preset value The output Q goes TRUE when the count equals the preset count It can be used for example to count recurring events Count Up Down Counts up or down setting an up count output when the current CTUD count is greater than or equal to the preset count or a down count output when the current count is le
27. The axis_group is the name of the axis group to which the M code is associated Define axis group names in the project configuration file Using the Do Not Process M Codes Feature The control system software supports the special M code functionality as described in the RS 274D specification Clicking this check causes the application program to ignore the following M codes e M3 spindle positive e M4 spindle negative e M5 spindle stop Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Using Predefined Motion Control Symbols The control system software provides predefined symbols that you can use to monitor and control some of your motion control operations You link the symbols to the appropriate functions when you configure the I O The predefined symbols are grouped as follows Axis Output Symbols Axis Group Output Symbols on page E 12 Spindle Output Symbols on page E 13 Axis Input Symbols on page E 13 Axis Group Input Symbols on page E 16 Note Not all predefined axis symbols are supported by all motion drivers Check the motion driver help to find supported axis symbols Axis Output Symbols Symbol Data Type Function axis STATUS real Indicates axis status bit definitions depend on driver Refer to the driver help axis CMDSPD Contains commanded speed of axis GFK 1424B Appendix E Motion Control E 11 E 12 Axis Group Output Symbols Symbol AxisGroup ESTPO AxisGroup TOO
28. There should be no jumpers on any of these pins GFK 1424B Appendix C Personal Computer Interface PCIF2 for Series 90 30 I O C 5 DIP Switch C 6 S1 I O Port Address Selection Switch This eight position DIP switch selects the base address in the PC s I O address space at which the PIF400 responds The PIF400 uses two adjacent I O ports starting on any two byte boundary from 200 hex to 3FE hex The factory default setting is 200 hex Settings for all possible addresses are listed in the data sheet provided with the interface card Note S1 might have different styles different markings or both Base your switch settings on the physical switch position as shown below not on any engraved numbering Top of card y Significant Bit Ee el el a ae 1 2 Least Significant Bit f Location of S1 DIP Switches HUUU ULL NNIT Port 200H Set Port 202H Set Port 3FEH Set Examples for Setting S1 Switches Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Quick Start Guide 1 Check System Resources The PIF400 card requires two adjacent I O ports in your computer s I O port space These are reserved by setting the board address using the 1 DIP switch Before installing the PIF400 card in your PC you should determine what ports you can use that will not conflict with I
29. To create a Step you must configure properties about the step in the Edit Step dialog box This table summarizes the items that may be configured IMotion Process Commands Contains the program code for the Step Structured Text Selects the Structured Text programming language IRS 274D Selects the RS 274D programming language For more information see appendix E Link File Links the Step to a file containing the program code displays it in an editor Piphy Clicks OSS Motion Process Commands Displays the code Structured Text or Motion Control within the Step Step Description Displays the Step description within the Step Icon Displays an icon within the Step Width fess the width in pixels for the Step description Tcon Accesses the Icon palette Remove Deletes an icon from the Step if one is assigned Using the Step System Symbols Each SFC Step has two system symbols X and T You can use these system symbols in any expression contact or coil instead of a symbol of the same type Reference the system symbols by typing the Step name followed by a period and the symbol suffix syma poaa O O e D gt f and FALSE when the Step is inactive Step time symbol T contains the current elapsed time refers to the Step time of the Step in milliseconds When a Step is inactive T symbol for Step STEP1 ontains the total elapsed time of the Step T is set to zero when the Step becomes active GFK 1
30. To cut a control e Select the control then choose Cut from the Edit or context menu or use the keyboard Ctrl X keys To paste clipboard contents 1 Display the screen into which the control is to be pasted if not the current screen 2 Choose Paste from the Edit or context menu or use the keyboard Ctrl V keys The controls are placed onto the operator screen from the clipboard They are placed in the same position they occupied when they were cut or copied Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 11 s Deleting Controls To delete controls from the operator screen 1 Select the controls 2 Press the Del key or select Delete from the Edit or context menu Aligning Controls You can align controls left right top or bottom Left The selected controls are aligned so that their left side is even with the furthermost left control Right The selected controls are aligned so that their right side is even with the furthermost right control Top The selected controls are aligned so that their tops are even with the topmost control Bottom The selected controls are aligned so that their bottoms are even with the bottommost control To align controls 1 Select the controls to be aligned at least two controls must be selected 2 Select Align Control from the Layout menu then choose the desired alignment Left Right Top or Bottom Moving Controls Front Back You can move a control to the front or
31. Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D GFK 1424B Contents Inserting ActiveX ControlSet isere esiri E see er Eea Er TE ES 6 36 Editing ActiveX Controls i sena a a E A ES 6 37 The Personal Computer Interface Module for Genius I O A 1 Descriptio onenian a e E A een A ete scans Rae TEE E ETE kes A 1 Installation and Configuration ceeecessceceseeeeseeceseeeesceceseeeeneeceeeeesneeceeeseneecenees A 3 Connecting the PCIM to the Bus ee eecesecsecseeceeecseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeenseenseeeseenaees A 12 Removing the PCIM from the Bus esccescceescecesrceeneeceseeeeneeceeeeeeneeceeeeeeneeeees A 13 Specifica ons 3 os see liad sie ventas E Mame ee Giese ase E A 14 PCIM Electrical Characteristics ccccscccccssseceessececeeneececsseeecesseeecseaeeessseeeeneaee A 15 Troubleshootin timene leet A EE E A N meade A 16 Personal Computer Interface PCIF for Series 90 30 I O B 1 Installing thesPCIE 30 cit 35 sssissescocsex A E a REE Aa TEE E aii B 1 Configuring the POIF 30 C rd iseset eseop epei B 4 Personal Computer Interface PCIF2 for Series 90 30 I O C 1 OVENI EW a ne e a was ya saeco ode eve ae ee EE C 1 Compatibles a a C 2 Hardware Overview scishe case ou Gcua sects R E eee Ri C 2 JUM PETS 536s aE E E E E ETATE RE eden shen ded teabe sounes A o Ea C 3 COmNeCtOLS E ese cee eee nolo eure d Meine Heeger tits C 4 DIPS Witch sc s 28 Senta dee nee Ae
32. context menu Make sure that the Step Properties is set to Structured Text Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Entering Statements Manual Entry Statements can be entered by typing in the statement or function call and associated parameters Be sure to review the syntax of statements in Language Overview and refer to the function call syntax in Language Reference Accessory Bar The accessory bar shows commands in graphic form It is an alternative method of entering statements The accessory bar appears only when enabled by toggling Accessory Bar on the View menu The following figure shows the accessory bar functions The floating accessory bar can be undocked and positioned at the user s convenience Insert ST Statements Menu When the Structured Text editor is active the Program Editor Edit menu has an Insert ST Statements item that lists Structured Text statements Select the statement you need and it will automatically be entered at the cursor position in the proper syntax Replace the any parameters and expressions as needed Optional parts of the statement should be removed if they will not be used Insert ST Functions Menu When the Structured Text editor is active the Program Editor Comment Assignment Label Break Exit Include Scan if Case For Loop Repeat Loop While Loop Edit menu has an Insert ST Function Calls item that lists standard functions that can be used w
33. where you want to place the new Action and click The new Action appears in the program at the location you specified stent PY NULL ActionLogic 3 You can add more than one Action to a Step or Macro Step by placing the cursor on top of an existing Action step2 labelA PaintColorAction Ms PW Configuring an Action Use the Edit Action Association dialog box to configure an Action Edit Action Association x Program label Motion qualifier None Action qualifier Non Stored N 7 Time duration S Specify Duration Action name j m Cancel Symbol Manager Help GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 69 Program Label Optional Action does not execute until Label in the Step code is encountered The Action and the program Label must be in the same SFC No cross referencing between programs is allowed The Labels in a Macro Step SFC cannot be referenced from the parent SFC and the Labels in the parent SFC cannot be referenced by the macro SFC If no Label is in the Step with which the Action is associated then the Program Label parameter is ignored Action Qualifier Specifies an Action qualifier Time Duration Action qualifier only Specifies the time duration for Limited and Delay qualifiers If the Action qualifier does not actually use the time duration any value entered for this parameter is ignored Specify Accesses the Define Time Duration dialog box Du
34. 1424B a Field Description Bar Symbol Specifies the symbol whose value is tracked by the moving bar If necessary a new symbol can be defined by opening the Symbol Manager with the Symbol Manager button Bar Name Specifies a name for the control For screen documentation only Bar Units Specifies units for the control For screen documentation only Text Color Specifies a color for the control name units and scale numbering Surface Color Specifies a background color for the control Bevel Bevel affects the border of the control Bevel values are from 0 to 6 A bevel of 0 makes the control appear flat Increasing the bevel gives the control a 3 D appearance Bar Limits Max Raw Value Specifies the maximum and minimum values to which the Min Raw Value moving bar responds They limit the value of the symbol tracked by the bar Any symbol value above the maximum raw value fills the moving bar to its upper limit and any symbol value below the minimum raw value clears the moving bar By reversing the values of the Max Raw Value and Min Raw Value fields the inverted value of the bar symbol can be tracked The maximum and minimum logic is reversed Max Display Value Specifies the maximum and minimum numbering of the scale Min Display Value Limit1 Display Value Limit2 Display Value Specifies limits at which the moving bar changes color with respect to display values For example to show alarm
35. 32 bits in length and has a range of 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Integer The integer data type or INT is composed of 32 bits signed and can represent the values 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 648 Label Graphical programming element in an SFC or RLL program that identifies where program flow is to resume from its corresponding jump Ladder Diagram Ladder diagram is graphical programming language defined by IEC 1131 using relay ladder logic concepts Loop Graphical programming element in an SFC diagram that either directs all program execution to continue in the downward direction or to loop back to some position in the control path above The Loop Element contains two transition conditions one directs program flow to continue in the downward direction and the other directs program flow to loop back Multiple Loop Elements can be nested within each other but they can not cross each other and can not enter Select Diverges or Parallel Diverges Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B The Loop Tool is a button on the SFC Edit Toolbar that inserts a control element into an SFC diagram Loop Tool Macro Step Named graphical element in an SFC that represents the inclusion of another entire SFC as a single Step The included SFC begins execution at its Start Step when the Macro Step that calls it becomes active Execution in the Macro Step is completed when the included SFC reaches its End Step Macro Steps ca
36. 4 12 GFK 1424B Index Index defining deleting editing 4 global naming a bit 4 16 g 4 116 online editing overview predefined Reserved system symbols is system status system for SFC steps 4 43 Syntax Instruction ete Structured Text 4 85 System Configuration dialog System Objects ST G 16 System options 2 26 Display properties 2 27 Font and color options Memory size options 2 26 Temporary authorization 2 14 Testing application programs 4 102 symbols Text 6 32 Textual Languages Instruction List Structured Text 2 3 Theory of operation TIME 4 9 4 10 Time duration Timers Tool Menu Toolbars Instruction List 4 106 RLL Toolbar SFC 2 eon Standard Trace 2 11 Transferring data 3 38 Index 11 Index Transition Manager RLL Transition parameters 4 51 Transitions about 4 50 adding a Boolean Transition adding an RLL Transition editing 4 66 how ae tad printing 2 23 Trigonometric and Logarithmic functions IL G 20 RLL ST G 16 Tutorial cookie D 1 U UINT 4 10 Uninterruptible power supply UPS configuring shutting down 2 30 Use fal documentation 1 7 User defined data type 4 11 User defined data types creating 4 17 V View Menu 2 12 Viewing a comment SFC Viewing programs Index 12 Using PC Control Software August
37. 5 Amps Bus Loads Drive Capability All input lines to the PCIM present no more than one standard LSTTL load to the host interface connector All output lines from the PCIM are capable of driving 10 standard LSTTL loads These lines with the exception of the INT and PCIM OK lines are tri state outputs The INT line is an open collector output that can be wired ORed to a single interrupt input The PCIM OK and COMM OK lines are low true open collector type outputs with built in current limiting to 10 ma suitable for driving LEDs directly All input signals to the PCIM from the Host system look like one LSTTL load to the host system These signals are TTL compatible and switch at TTL levels Control output signals to the host are open collector LSTTL drivers with 10K resistive pull ups capable of sinking 4 mA while maintaining an output voltage of 0 4V or lower The data transceiver is a tri state LSTTL device capable of sourcing or sinking 12 mA with VOL 0 4V and VOH 2 0V The PCIM is fully compatible with ISA backplanes Signal Conditioning The PCIM has two connectors that you can access when the PCIM is installed in a PC type rack Both connectors are for the standard twisted pair connection to a serial bus The Hand held Monitor can be connected through an interface cable to the separate Genius connectors Appendix A The Personal Computer Interface Module for Genius I O A 15 All of the lines in from both connec
38. A A ee S C 6 Quick Start Guden cas hinds sel a a aie ene teat a C 7 A pplication Examples sesssooesssosecesosecesssooesssoocessosecsssscossssoosessooe D 1 Exercise 1 Create a New Project ci scccisscccesssassiccteusseca en thcedatacastactonvies D 1 Exercise 2 Create a New System Configuration ceeeeeeeeeeees D 2 Exercise 3 Creaune an SEC aces li e e uedghas e a tss D 5 Exercise 4 Creating Symbols s 4 31 lt csceasd soseasanssteasstssdacesaetanedacpeosons D 9 Exercise 5 Adding Transition Logic sssssssesssesseseseeessseessressresse D 11 Exercise 6 Entering Structured Text Commands eee D 13 Exercise 7 Adding and Editing Action Blocks e cc eeeeeeeeeeees D 14 Exercise 8 Executing the Sample Program cesceeeseeeesteeees D 19 Exercise 9 Creating an Operator Interface Screen eee D 20 Contents xv Contents Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Appendix H Motion COntrol cia vcccdicsesecsicctsccGescc ecsccncscsceaccsoccecnccscosacccacdcavcssccescseces lua Configuring Motion Control 5 023 sdessssecsesedisnngosagegessaesoesacsmveetonss E 2 Motion Control ProgramMing eeeeeeeececesececeeececseeeeesneeeeneeeeaees E 3 Adding Motion Control to an SFC eeceecceescessecssecsecsaecaecseeceeeseseasenseensees E 3 PC CONTROL Software Enhancements to RS 274D eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees E 3 Using Motion Control Statement 0 0 eee eceeceseecsseesecenecseceee
39. A blank operator screen is created with the screen name in the title bar Deleting a Screen The operator interface file must include at least one screen If you try to delete the last screen of the operator interface an error message appears To delete an operator interface screen 1 Select Delete Screen from the Edit menu The Select Screen to Delete dialog box appears 2 Type in the name of the screen you want to delete or select the screen name from the from the drop down list box and click OK If the screen you deleted was the startup screen the Select New Startup Screen dialog box is displayed Type in the name of the new startup screen or select the screen name from the drop down list box Copying a Screen To copy an operator interface screen 1 Select Copy Screen from the Edit menu The Select Screen to Copy dialog box appears 2 Select the screen from the dialog box and click OK The Enter New Screen Name dialog box appears 3 Type a name to give to the new screen and click OK The new screen is created with the same contents as the original screen GFK 1424B Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 7 s Renaming a Screen To rename an operator interface screen 1 Select Rename Screen from the Edit menu The Select Screen to Rename dialog box appears 2 Select a screen to rename and click OK The Enter New Screen Name dialog box appears 3 Type a name to give the new screen and click OK
40. App Icon Edits predefined Steps in the Application Icon library Delete App Icon Deletes predefined Steps in the Application library Tools Menu Operator Interface he Starts the integrated Operator Interface J Symbol Manager Accesses the Symbol Manager allowing you to create and edit variables Action Manager Accesses the Action Manager allowing you to rename and delete SFC actions RLL Transition Accesses the Transition Manager allowing you to rename and delete SFC RLL transitions Manager Export Symbols Exports all Global Symbols to a SNF file Available only with the CIMPLICITY HMI interface System Options Opens a dialog box that allows you the change the Heap Size and the memory variable Data Table size display and symbol enumeration preferences License Menu Authorize This option is used to create a software License for the PC CONTROL Software Call or Fax your Site Code in to GE Fanuc Automation to receive a Site Key to authorize your software This option is only activated when the software has been started in demo mode Upgrade Authorization When you are ready to increase the functionality of PC CONTROL the Upgrade Authorization option can be used to generate a new Site Code This option is only enabled after the software has been authorized Register Transfer Use this option to begin the process of transferring a software license from one computer to another Place a blank floppy disk in a unauthori
41. Eesometes Data Max length of in output data 260 Byte Length of in output data 8 Byte Mak length of input data 130 Byte Length of input data 4 Byte Max length of output data 130 Byte Length of output data 4 Byte Max number of modules 17 Number of modules 3 Assigned master Mode fps Outputs In Out identifier Ja Station address 1 IC670PB1001 Profibus BIU Slot0 1Word 0x70 A IC670MDL643 5 12VDC In 16pt 1 Word 0x50 1 7 CIF30 DPM CIF104 D1 7 IC670MDL640 24VDC In 16pt 1 Word 0x50 ICB7OMDL644 24VDC_Fast In 16pt 1 Word 0x50 hata dave ICB7OMDLB41 48VDCIn 16pt 1 Word 0x50 Station addiess 2 IC67F0MDL240 115VAC In 16pt 1 Word 0x50 IC67OMDL642 125VDCJn 16pt 1 Word 0x50 ICB7OMDL241 240VACIn16pt 1 Word 0x50 2 Field Control PROFIBUS x IC670PB1001 Profibus BIU Slot0 Iw IC67OMDL640 24VDC In 1 6pt Iw Append Module ICB7OMDL740 12 24VDC Out 1 pt Remove Module Insert Module Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 29 11 Start the PC Control application Program Editor 12 Generate a new configuration Select New Config from the File pull down menu 13 In the first empty slot configure a Profibus DP Hilscher CIF30 DPM module 14 To configure the I O for the network that is connected to this card click the Define Board button The following dialog box will appear PROFIBUS Synergetic Hilscher Yersion 1 11 Ea Board name Board0 Description Memory address No DRIVER INSTALLED M Simulate bo
42. If the Step becomes inactive the RLL continues to run until the duration times out A Reset qualifier is not required but one can be used to stop the RLL execution The RLL that was started by the Stored qualifier is terminated by the Reset qualifier R You can use the Reset qualifier in another Action that is associated with the same Step or in an Action associated with another Step The RLL continues to run between Steps If the Action is associated with another Step the Action must have the same name as the Action that is to be reset For details see Time Duration in Chapter 4 Using PC Control Software August 1998 Use this qualifier Non Stored N Stored S Pulsed P Time Delayed D Time Limited L Delayed and Stored DS Stored and Time Delayed SD Stored and Time Limited SL Pulse Width PW Reset R GFK 1424B Motion Qualifiers Note Not all motion qualifiers are supported by all motion cards Refer to the motion card documentation for supported motion qualifiers Motion Qualifiers specify motion constraints that must be satisfied before the RLL begins running If you use a program Label the motion constraint applies to the motion block following the program Label Qualifiers appear within the Action as shown below Ey mL Lal PaintColorAction Kaia Qualifier Choose from the following qualifiers Leave a blank for no qualifier If you do not want the
43. J Pointer E p s bit Source Comment Initial value i Description Temporary Variable fe Cancel Help Description Symbol Name Any valid identifier can be used for the symbol name Type The elementary or user defined structure data type or function block type of the symbol Refer to Data Types for more information Edit User Type If the symbol is defined as a user type this button is enabled and the user Array Pointer Indexed Bit Initial Value Comment Description type can be edited Refer to Editing User Defined Data Types for more information If checked defines the symbol as an array Provide upper and lower bounds for the array Refer to Arrays for more information If checked defines the symbol as a pointer Refer to Pointer Symbols for more information The indexed bit feature lets you reference a specific bit within a byte word or double word symbol Refer to Naming a Bit in a Symbol Used to provide an initial value for the symbol A local symbol is reset to its initial value each time the program is run A global symbol is assigned its initial value when the configuration is activated A short description that appears within the Symbol Manager The description does not appear in the Symbol Manager only in the Symbol Details dialog box Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 15 Copying a Symbol You can quickly create a new symbol with the same properties as an
44. Latch Coil The coil sets the point that it represents to TRUE when the coil has power flow It can be set to FALSE only by a reset coil Reset Unlatch Coil The coil sets the point that it represents to FALSE when the coil has power flow The point remains FALSE the object is reset or unlatched even when the coil no longer has power flow and can be set to FALSE only by a reset coil GFK 1424B G 1 G 2 Toolbar Description Button Positive Transition When power flow to the coil transitions from FALSE Sensing Coil to TRUE the coil sets the point that it represents to TRUE The point remains TRUE unless it is set to FALSE elsewhere for the duration of one scan cycle Negative Transition When power flow to the coil transitions from TRUE to Sensing Coil FALSE the coil sets the point that it represents to TRUE The object remains TRUE unless it is set to FALSE else where for the duration of one scan cycle Jump Coil Label Use the jump and label elements to disable sections of program code temporarily You must use the jump coil and label together A label without a jump coil causes a runtime error SFC Transition Coil mr ans The SFC transition coil is an RLL program element that you can use only under specific conditions within an SFC Action in an SFC program Bit String Rotate Left OL Rotates the input left by the number of bits specified by the shift number SHR A Ni R Rotates the input right by the n
45. NULL as the new block type Define Ports Button The Define Block Button causes the Dialog Box associated with the currently selected I O Block to be displayed This Dialog Box will let you edit the I O Points for the specified I O Block Double clicking on a block has the same effect as selecting the block and pressing this button Back to Board Button The Back to Board returns you to the PCIM Board Definition Dialog 3 12 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B OK Button Saves your changes and terminates the entire edit session for the configuration You will be returned to the main menu of the configuration utility Cancel Button Displays the Confirm Abort dialog box If you answer yes the edit session will be ended and your configuration changes will not be saved Discrete Point Information The Discrete Point Information Dialog is used to define the I O Points associated with the Genius I O Block Status Bit Name If a name is entered in this field a BOOL by this name will be created If the block is healthy this BOOL will be TRUE If the block is faulted the BOOL will be FALSE Whole Block Input Whole Block Output One or both of these fields may appear If a name is entered in this field a variable of the appropriate size and type to cover the entire block will be created For example if the block is a 16 bit Discrete input an input WORD will be created In the case of modules with configurable point d
46. Normally Closed etc and then click on OK The new contact appears on the rung at the location you specified ae a Coil 4 ol Click on the Coil Tool on the RLL toolbar The cursor changes into the coil cursor 2 Move the cursor to the location on the rung where you want to place the new coil Contact R S 3 Click the left mouse button The Edit Coil dialog box appears 4 30 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B mixer _on BOOL m xer2_onBOOL pumpl_onBOOL pume2_onBOOL S C Set Latch Col pume3_onBOOL pumes_onBOOL RP F Beset Urieich Cot P C Positive TranstionSensing Cot N Negative Transion Sensing Coil 4 Ifyou have already defined the symbol names for your system click on the symbol to represent the coil 5 Ifyou have not defined the symbol names or if you want to define a new symbol you need to access the Symbol Manager and fill in the symbol data for the coil 6 Select the coil type Output Negated Output etc and then click on OK The new coil appears on the rung at the location you specified You can place an Output Coil anywhere on a rung including to the left of an input or within an OR branch An Output coil stores the logical result of the logic evaluated up to its location on the rung Inserting a New Rung 1 Click the Rung Tool A rung symbol attaches to the mouse pointer 2 Move the cursor to the location on the left power rail where y
47. Note 1 Ni Ni Ni Pf Addition o Subtraction o Multiplication o P Division S Greater Than comparison gt ES O CO A CE lee x z cic es P Evaluate detered operation Note 1 Performed only if the current result value is Boolean 1 Table Source IEC 1131 3 Part 3 of IEC Standard 1131 for programmable controllers International Electrotechnical Commission m D ic lil 4 108 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Modifiers Operators can take the following modifiers N Boolean negation of the operand For example ORN Bool1 is equivalent to result result OR NOT Bool1 Cc The instruction is performed only if the current_result value is Boolean 1 Or Boolean 0 if the N modifier is also used For example LD Value JMPC_ Sort is equivalent to IF Value is TRUE jump to Sort else continue with execution Defers evaluation of the operator until encountering a right parenthesis operator For example MUL Num1 ADD Num2 is equivalent to result result Num1 Num2 GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 109 Functions and Function Blocks Function Calls Function calls can be done using the following forms CALC calls a function if the current result accumulator value is TRUE 1 CAL always call the function CALCN only call the function if the current result accumulator value is FALSE 0 Function call syntax usi
48. OK Button will save any changes and terminate the entire edit session for the configuration You will be returned to the main menu of the configuration utility Cancel Button The Cancel Button will abort any changes and terminate the ENTIRE edit session for the configuration You will be returned to the main menu of the configuration utility Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Global Data Setup Dialog Box On the Genius Bus each device can send up to 128 bytes of data each scan and can receive 128 bytes of data from each other device on the bus In this dialog box check the Enable Global Data box next to each device you wish to receive global data from If the PCIM will be sending global data to other devices check Enable Global Data for the device matching the PCIM s bus address Setup Global Data Press this button to set up I O tags to be associated with the global data for this bus address The Global Data Device dialog box for the selected device will appear Global Data Device This dialog box allows tag names to be assigned to the global data that can be sent and received through the PCIM Each word within the 128 byte global data area can be assigned its own tag and each bit within each word can be assigned a tag The current tag names for the first 16 words are displayed on the screen To edit the names for the rest of the words use the Next 16 Words and Previous 16 Words buttons Beside each tag name is a
49. Refer to the Language Reference for more information on using the Structured Text language functions and function blocks Notes e Structured Text statements must end in a semi colon e Structured Text symbols must be declared in the Symbol Manager GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 85 Assignment Statement 4 86 The assignment statement replaces the value of a variable with the result of evaluating an expression of the same data type Format Variable Expression Where Variable is a symbol array array element etc Expression is a single value expression or complex expression Examples Boolean assignment statements VarBool1 TRUE VarBool2 val lt 75 Array element assignment Array_1 13 RealA RealB PI String assignment String literals must be enclosed in single quotation marks String_Val This is a string constant Function value assignment Result SQRT 2 Function block value assignment If the counter function block instance CTU1 is located in an RLL diagram the following assignment in the Structured Text program gets the current value of the counter CurrentValue CTU1 CV Pointers e If pVar1 is a pointer symbol pVar1 is assigned the location of the X data value pVar1 amp X e If pVar1 is a pointer symbol Y is assigned the value contained in Var since pVar1 contains the location of Var1 Y pVar1 e If pVar
50. Reference G 13 File Functions APPENDFILE Writes data to the end of a file specified by the file control block BREAK Causes the program to stop running if you have enabled debugging ie ee a ie specified by he Fe cono ok NEWFIE Wesana e OO WRITEFILE Writes data to a file Shift Rotate Functions ROL Rotates the individual bits of a value a specified number of positions to the left Rotates the individual bits of a value a specified number of positions to the right SHL Shifts the individual bits of a value a specified number of positions to the left SHR Shifts the individual bits of a value a specified number of positions to the right IF Used for the execution of a set of statements only when a Boolean variable is TRUE INCLUDE Calls an external file and executes a set of statements contained within the file REPEAT Used for the repeated execution of a set of statements until a Boolean condition becomes TRUE SCAN Suspends the execution of Structured Text statements while an T O scan takes place WHILE Used for the repeated execution of a set of statements until a Boolean condition becomes FALSE G 14 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Math Statement e Description Modulus MOD Addition ADD Returns the result of summing the inputs Division DIV Returns the result of dividing the first input value by the second input value Exponent EXPT Returns the
51. Status o Opens the Program Status window T O Faults Show Parse Errors Displays the parser error window Displays or hides any program comments that you enter into the program Available only when a program is open for edit Scale to Fit Window 2 Resizes the program so that it fits into the currently displayed window Available only when a program is open for edit RLL Warnings Turns notification of RLL warnings on or off Warnings occur during a program parse Disp Symbol Displays the rack slot point information for I O symbols Location Toggle FB Details Turns On Off the display of symbol names and real time data in RLL function blocks Available only when an RLL program is open for edit All Steps When editing an SFC program this option lets you specify that steps be displayed showing their names descriptions associated icons or their program code Available only when an SFC program is open for edit Show Symbol m Turns on the symbol enumerations that have been selected in the Enumerations System Options dialog box 2 12 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Program Comments Project Menu Description Creates a new project for storing related application programs and configurations Opens an existing project Copy Copies an existing project including all application programs and configuration files to a new name Rename Renames an existing project Has no effect on the application progra
52. To Byte Array STOBA Takes the input string and stores the characters of the string in a byte array Comparison String Greater Than or GE Tests if first input is greater than or equal second Equal input Greater Than Tests if first input is greater than second input Less Than or Equal Tests if first input is less than or equal second input Less Than Tests if first input is less than second input Not Equal Tests two inputs for inequality GFK 1424B Appendix G Instruction Set Reference G 3 Conversion Byte Array to String BATOS Converts a byte array to a STRING value Date to String DateToString Converts a DATE to a STRING value Integer to String ITOA Converts an INT to a STRING value Real to String RTOA Converts a REAL to a STRING value RGB to DWORD RGB_TO_D Converts a triplet of red green and blue values to a WORD DWORD String to Byte Array STOBA Converts a STRING to a byte array String to Date StringToDate Converts a STRING to DATE String to Integer ATOI Converts an ASCII numeric STRING to an integer value String to Real ATOR Converts an ASCII numeric STRING to a real value String to Time of Day StringToTOD Converts a STRING to a TOD Time of Day to String TODToString Converts a TOD to a STRING value Counters and Timers Count Down CTD Count Up CTU Count Bown coumu TP Activated by a pulse provides off delay timing of events Tim
53. Use the PRGCB outputs to obtain information about the program Using the PRGCB Status Code PRGCB STATUS allows you to monitor the various states of control program execution This unique variable returns an integer value that can be used both from within the control program itself and displayed as an indicator on the Operator Interface screen PRGCB STATUS indicates the following Value Definition Value Definition 0 Initialized 8 Program Complete 1 File not found 9 Program Aborting 2 File Opened 10 Program Aborted 3 File Parsing 11 Program Faulted 4 Parse Error Occurred 12 Program At Breakpoint 5 Parse Complete 13 Program Suspended 6 Program Running 14 Program Rewound REWIND functionality 7 Program Stopped 15 Program Not Rewound REWIND functionality 4 100 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Using the PRGCB Rewind Function After a control program has run through to completion it will not run again until you have set the local program control variable prgcb REWIND thus effectively rewinding the program A program s rewind status can be monitored via the prgcb STATUS variable PRGCB Example The following piece of SFC code starts the Cookie demo and restarts it every time it finishes This example uses the NAME REWIND and RUN inputs and the INCYCLE output For other Boolean inputs and outputs refer to the online help for PRG
54. a series of single letter commands which are followed by numerical parameters to these commands The commands are organized into individual lines of text which are called blocks The blocks form execution units that are executed sequentially Program execution pauses on each block until all the functions in the block are completed then program flow continues with the next block You can add motion control to an SFC and Embed Structured text into motion control code For more information see Using Motion Control Statements on page E 4 Configuring Motion Control PC Control can be used with the following interface boards which support Motion Control Delta Tau PMAC PC Delta Tau PMAC Direct Delta Tau PMAC2 Motion Engineering PCDSP Motion Options Compumotor Note Only one Motion card is allowed in a system configuration A From the PC Control Program Editor File menu click Open Config or New Config The following configuration window will appear Program Editar SAMPLES New cig aS Erot 3011 eH Enoty Sot P EnntySict4 BS Empty Sot4 zi Sweapli 0 milizaconde ped Enpty 5015 ain i ay Bevoreirs Caseeseve Cercar Aeivmecontgs Hap cisaranfaun JOONAOIGG lAopandl NUMI B Inthe tree display on the left side of the window select the slot that you want to configure C Inthe Board Type field select the Motion card that you have installed The configuration dialog box will appear
55. and click on OK The Save As dialog box appears Save As 21x Filename EEN Save as type RLL Files rll 7 Cancel 4 Choose the default or a new name for the program and click Save The default extension rll is appended when the file is saved in your project The RLL editor displays a new RLL file with the two power rails and one rung Adding Program Elements Adding a Contact it 1 Click on the Contact Tool on the RLL toolbar The cursor changes into the contact cursor 2 Move the cursor to the location on the rung where you want to place the new contact 3 __ Gt 3 Click the left mouse button The Edit Contact dialog box appears GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 29 Edit Contact Contact symbol heaters_blda_2 eee eso cice L Normally Open Contact heaters bldg 2 maeri on ABE J E C Normally Closed Contact pump1_on BOOL pump2_on BOOL C oo PORE F pump3_on BOOL Pt Positive Transition S ensing Contact pump4_on BOOL N C Negative Transition Sensing Contact Cancel Symbol Manager Help 4 If you have already defined the symbol names for your system click on the symbol to represent the contact heaters_bldg_2 in the figure 5 If you have not defined the symbol names or if you want to define a new symbol you need to access the Symbol Manager and fill in the symbol data for the contact 6 Select the contact type Normally Open
56. apesin 3 11 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Chapter 4 GFK 1424B Contents Genius Bus Address Definitions 0 0 0 0 ee eesceeeeeneeeeseceeeneeeeeneees 3 11 Using the Genius Bus Address Definitions Dialog Box eee eee eee eeeeereeees 3 12 Discrete Point Information srian a a a e 3 13 Sending Datagrams with the PCIM Drivet ssesseseeeseresseesereseresrseresressressresseseeee 3 15 Section 3 Configuring Series 90 30 T O sessscsssesssecssocesoossssee 3 16 The PC Interface PCIF aiaa ET O R RE A O an 3 16 Using the PCIF Board Dialog s nesessesessseesseessessseresseeesseessersseessee 3 16 The Rack Definition Ital og vcs isch deytemeas tees deeds gasieeaiass 3 18 The Module Dialog siie cvacsaeeatasacavbuasseveNagactascgntend quad stan 3 18 Defining Digital Port Connections 000 0 eee cee eeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeenseceaecaecsaeeneeens 3 19 Defining Analog Port Connections esscceseceesseceeeeeceseceeeeecaeceeneecaeceeneeesaeeeees 3 19 Section 4 Configuring Other Field Busses sscssssscsseeee 3 20 Configuring DeviceNet W O 20 22 04 c eecse eee Gia ode hi dee ees 3 20 Capabilities i hce hank onset AG oa eee aes Sea Aube eserves Gees 3 20 Installing and Configuring Devices on the DeviceNet Network eeeeeeseeeeees 3 20 Configuring Profibus W O citis sssccassaccevascecsieateasaaessetceeenssaceatasensaceeaee 3 22 Section 5 Dynamic Data Exchange ccsccs
57. appears in the program at the location you specified 3 Configure the step Configuring a Step To configure a step you must e Specify the programming language you want to use for the Step e Select what information you want to display in the Step i e Step Name Step Description Process Commands or Icon e Enter program code for the Step or link a file containing the program code to the Step 1 Click on the Select Tool R and then double click on the Step The Edit Step dialog box appears 2 Enter the appropriate information for configuring and programming the Step using the information in the table below Then click on OK to save your changes and close the dialog box GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 63 4 64 Tos otis Select the RS 274D programming anguage Select the Structured Text programming anguage Add program code for the Step Link the Step to a file containing the program code Click RS 274D Click Structured Text 1 Click on Process Commands 2 Enter the program code or link a file Click Link File Open the linked file containing program Click Edit Linked File ode for the Step and display it in an editor Access the Symbol Manager Display the Step name within the Step Display the code motion control or Structured Text within the Step Display the Step description within the Set the width in pixels for the Step description Display a
58. application This chapter provides the following information How to start up the Run time system How to run an application program How to configure programs to execute automatically How to monitor power flow How to view the status of an application program 5 1 Runtime Subsystems The runtime subsystems consist of the Program Manager Program Execution I O Scanner and the Event Log subsystems The Program Manager Program Execution and I O Scanner subsystems are visually represented by the PC Control Run Time icon The Event Log has its own icon The Program Execution and I O Scanner subsystems are given Real time process priority which means they are given CPU time before all normal applications as well as mouse update and disk access To Start the Runtime Subsystem Start the Program Editor and then do one of the following e Select Startup Runtime Subsystems from the Program Editor or Operator Interface Editor Execute menu e Select Runtime Engine from the PC Control Applications menu on the Windows Start menu Running an Individual Program In order to run a program you must be running under the Windows NT operating system and have the execution software installed If the Runtime Subsystems are not active a startup prompt for the runtime subsystems appears Running the Active Program To run the active program 1 Click Execute 2 Select Run After the program begins running the program display will high
59. be set to TRUE if the configuration does not match the actual hardware Status Bit Name If a name is entered in this field a BOOL will be created This BOOL will be TRUE if all of the modules attached to this board appear to be healthy and will become FALSE if any module is faulted Description optional This space is provided for an optional description of the I O card Racks These buttons open up dialogs for configuring I O modules on each rack PCIF1 supports four racks PCIF2 supports seven racks The buttons are grayed until each rack is defined Define 90 30 Racks This button opens a dialog box for defining the I O racks attached to the PCIF card GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 17 Auto Configure This button activates the Auto Configuration feature If the I O racks and modules are in place and powered up and if the Runtime subsystem is not active you can use this feature When you click the Auto Configure button the software activates the PCIF card and reads in information about attached racks and modules Set and Test Board This button communicates with the PCIF card to verify the installation is correct The Runtime subsystem must not be active A Board Test dialog box containing the message PCIF2 Board found shared RAM access successfully found should appear If this message does not appear you should try configuring a different block of shared RAM The Rack Definition Dialog The Rack Def
60. can write to the input memory map and read from the output memory map to simulate I O in the environment From within the Operator Interface you can activate the Program Editor by pushing the appropriate button or selecting the specific menu item from the Tools menu Event Log The Event Log stores time stamped system events messages and errors The Event Log is started and stopped automatically by the run time subsystems The Event Log must be running for messages to the Output Window to function Note To configure a system that is runtime only copy an entire project folder from a development system make sure both have the same path to the program and project files to the runtime The other way is to temporarily give the system a developer license make the desired project active and then go back to a runtime license The runtime only system cannot change projects 2 6 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Program Editor The Program Editor lets you organize your work on a project by project basis You can create and manage any number of projects from within the Program Editor At any one time only one project can be open This is called the active project Each project has an active configuration associated with that project When a project is opened the active configuration for that project is activated When a new project is opened all programs are cancelled Access Levels Access levels and access codes pa
61. check box To assign tag names to individual bits within the words check the Name Bits box by the word whose bits must be named and then press the Edit Bit Names button The Global Data Device Word dialog box will appear Global Data Device Word This dialog box allows you to assign tag names to individual bits within the selected word Genius Bus Address Definitions The Genius Bus Address Definition dialog box is used to enter and edit the I O Blocks defined on a Genius I O bus Each I O Block is defined in a address location on the Genius I O bus The legal addresses range from 0 to 31 The defined blocks are listed in the view scroll region GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 11 Using the Genius Bus Address Definitions Dialog Box Enable Device Configuration Table for this port Enables the device configuration table Enable Datagrams for this port Enables datagrams for this port For more information refer to Sending Datagrams with the PCIM Driver Bus Displays the bus ID Block Type This field displays the defined I O Block type The default Block type for Bus ID 31 is PCIM and cannot be changed Block Name This field displays the name for the given I O Block Select I O Device This button opens the Block Information dialog box which allows you to change the type of I O Block at the address currently selected To remove an I O Block from the bus select the block press this button and select
62. click OK GFK 1424B Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 21 Working With Application Programs Program management lets you create and save Relay Ladder Logic RLL Sequential Function Chart SFC Structured Text ST and Instruction List IL programs You can open many programs at the same time Use the Window menu to switch between open programs or use the mouse to click on a partially visible program and bring that program s window to the top The active programs are displayed on the Program Editor title bar Creating a New Program To create a new program in a new window 1 Click File and select New or click the new program button on the editor tool bar A dialog box is displayed that allows you to specify a new Relay Ladder Logic RLL program Sequential Function Chart SFC Structured Text Document or Instruction List Document 2 Select the type of program you want to create and click OK A new editor window of the appropriate type opens The program is given a default name RLL1 for example Opening a Program To open an existing program in a new window Click File and select Open or the open program button on the editor tool bar Da You can open many programs at the same time Use the Window menu to switch between open programs or use the mouse to click on a partially visible program and bring that program s window to the top If no project is active when a file open command is executed the new project or the open proj
63. consist of a T or t followed by a sequence of one or more numbers and time unit specifiers Examples T 1D2h 1 day and 2 hours t 26H 26 hours t 5m45s 5 minutes and 45 seconds t 26S200MS 26 seconds and 200 milliseconds T 900ms 900 milliseconds Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B The Time of Day data type or TOD is used to represent a specific time of day IEC 1131 3 uses the format TOD HH MM SS ms to designate that the following characters will be a time of day Ex TOD 23 59 59 999 Time of Day TMR The Timer data type or TMR is used to implement a timer using structured text TOD Member of the ANY_DATE group of data types TOD Time of Day data types are valid in any instruction or function block that accepts an ANY ANY_DATE or TOD data type Transition Graphical element in an SFC that evaluates to a Boolean result This Boolean result determines when program flow is passed from Step s preceding the transition to Step s following the transition Transition Condition A transition condition is a logical expression associated with an SFC transition element resulting in a single Boolean result The Boolean result is used to determine when activation is passed from the active step to the step following the transition Transition Logic Transition logic can be represented by a single Boolean expression or single rely ladder logic rung Transition Mode The Transition Mode Button on the
64. describing the systems hardware configuration This file also contains symbolic identifiers that are used in the application program to refer to the physical hardware devices or I O signals Connector Group of I O ports usually routed to one physical connector on a board Contact tool A button on the RLL tool bar that is used to insert an input contact into an RLL program Contact RLL graphical programming element that represents a Boolean input symbol Control Loop Element See Loop Control Path Control path is a line between steps in an SFC that shows the path of the program control flow Appendix H Glossary of Terms H 3 H 4 Cursor The cursor is the object that follows the motion of the pointing device keyboard mouse trackball or touch screen and is used to select operator interface elements on the screen DATE Member of the ANY_DATE group of data types DATE data types are valid in any instruction or function block that accepts an ANY ANY_DATE or DATE data type DINT Member of the ANY_NUM group of data types DINT data types are valid in any instruction or function block that accepts an ANY ANY_NUM ANY_INT or DINT data type The DINT is a signed integer data type that is composed of one or more of the digits 0 9 and cannot contain a decimal point An DINT is 32 bits in length and has a range of 2147483648 to 2147483647 DWORD Member of the ANY_BIT group of data types DWORD data types are
65. displays icons that can be assigned to the button Select Font Clicking this button displays a Font dialog box to specify the font style size and color for the control text Button Functions The following table lists the control functions that can be assigned to button controls The function is executed when the button is clicked with the screen active Button Function Description SELECT PROGRAM When the screen is active displays a list of Sequential Function Select Program Chart programs in the project from which the operator selects the desired program The Run Program Stop Program and Abort Program functions can be set up to act on the operator selected program SELECTED PROGRAM RUN Runs a specified program or the program selected by the Run Program operator using the Select Program function SELECTED PROGRAM STOP Stops a specified SFC program or an SFC program selected by Stop Program the operator using the Select Program function SELECTED PROGRAM The program can be resumed from where it was stopped using the Run Program function Only SFC programs can be stopped ABORT Aborts the specified program or the program selected by the Abort Program operator using the Select Program function SELECTED PROGRAM SCREEN Activates a specified operator screen Activate Operator Screen SET Sets a specified symbol or sets system ESTOP Set Symbol CLEA
66. en r E E E N a Gases a hates 4 8 REAL E E E ona oa E Dae Gant 4 9 STRING iiss p53 oh eae dei BAA A ks eis nt Sadi ni Binet So oh 4 9 TEEME esse stictinsietie cou tscltvascesaesets tthe E 4 9 LOD CFIMEZOBS DAY Si pesen i p a ioe 4 10 UINT Unsigned Integer neopinnot E ereer neni a EEEE r Enei 4 10 WORD EEE EEEE EE EEE Rs 4 10 Generic Data Type See niiina oi ei a aa a E S 4 11 User Defined Data Type pci stiwcssccntiusssvesunastaguadsatisntsaucopsedsbavnevasers 4 1 PTT AY Svea an ciizu vn EE AE EE AE E EE EE 4 12 Pointer SY MBO Si cs50e ects casevedigsivaacasdeeragbaal a a a 4 12 Symbol Manager necmi tinis i a i a 4 12 Opening the Symbol Manager eeesseesseeeesseeseeesrsrresrsrerrssrsrreesresresrerrssesreeresreer 4 12 Creating a Symbol ossea nieres ereer r EE EEEE r E E E is 4 14 Editinga Symbols snn n E E E ese A E A 4 14 Copying Symbolene enee noe eero one ep Ee Coa SE EEKE KEERT EN iSo tenes 4 16 Deleting a Symbol sneinen p ere pe A s Eear EE E R 4 16 Naming a Bitina Symbol ees sssr isinir cctstesoustssesssedine des oychsobedseesceesssesssevianstesssebseys 4 16 Editing User Defined Data Types s esesesessesssrerssrsrrsrrserrrsresrrereses 4 17 Using Symbols 3iicissasicicicsedcasssosiaaivaehcdetasa eadeveeed ca aN 4 19 Drast and Dropsscsseseoes8 ee eee AR ABS SIRI S SE 4 19 EDUMETAULONS 5 e552 soesis sees cece sk seks sn soes Sashes eds ua coed savess jodacessghsstess qodseascessspusveobacesegesseusec s 4 19 SARRA aaloe O
67. ero Ee EK eE DEES PEKA EEn Ero E esai 4 51 About Program Flow Control Features seeseeseseeeseeeessersreesrsresesrerrsseerresesreetse 4 53 How SECs are SOLVE e perraro T arees sineera ereer op EE OE E ESE EES Eps ob PEC SEEE E Eas 4 56 How Transitions are Evaluated 20 0 0 eee csecseeeseeeseeeeceeeeeseeeseeesecsaecssesaesaeeens 4 57 Using Simultaneous Divergence ccceceessceeeseseeesssecsesecesesessesssssessueseeneeate 4 58 Using Macro Steps cout nace E taesl iti ek ie nena teeta 4 58 Extensions to TEC 113 1 3 nensis irii aE a ha EEs 4 59 Creating Sequential Function Charts 000 0 eee eeeeesseesseceseeeeeeeenees 4 60 Creating an SFC Programm 55 cscs tscvescstssassssdsvesssssacesscesseesscesseastenaceestgosasesagesseesseys 4 60 Using the SFC Tool and Menu Bath eee cee cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecesecesecsseeseesaeeens 4 62 Working with Steps s scsicccciceicadvecesscoaseace Ere EEEE EE EEEE REEE E EEE E SS 4 63 Working with Transitions eeseessssessseeessseeesssesrrsresteerrsrerrssesressesrentesrertssenresrerreetee 4 66 Working with Macro Steps s sscccecseasseiessiseepcsvasisevistenes iesire E riis 4 67 Working with ACHOS ean a a E E N E S 4 68 Adding SFC Program Flow Controls ssseeeseeessseeessseseesstrreresreersseerrsseerreresrreresre 4 71 Integrating Structured Text into an SFC s sssssssssssssesseesssssssesesrenessnseseserrenenessenesee 4 80 Documenting an SFC Program eeceeceecesecesecesecssecseecseecaeesaese
68. existing symbol by using the copy command 1 Select the symbol you want to copy 2 Click the Copy Symbol button or use the context menu The Symbol Details dialog box opens with all the parameters filled in exactly as in the selected symbol 3 Anew symbol name must be entered Type a new symbol name make any other needed changes and click OK Note When done editing symbols be sure to click Apply to make the changes visible outside the Symbol Manager Deleting a Symbol Select the symbol you want to delete and click the Delete Symbol button or use the context menu Naming a Bit in a Symbol The indexed bit feature lets you reference a specific bit within a byte word or double word symbol You can index a global symbol only with a global bit and a local symbol with a local bit 1 Open the Symbol Manager and click the Add Global or Add Local button The Symbol Details dialog box appears 2 Enter the name of the bit in the Symbol Name field 3 Select the BOOL data type in the Type field 4 The Indexed Bit check box is only enabled if you have at least one symbol of type BYTE WORD or DWORD already defined Select the Indexed Bit check box The Source and Bit fields become active 5 The Source list shows all defined symbols of BYTE WORD and DWORD data types for either Global or Local symbols Select the symbol that you want to index in the Source field 6 Enter the bit number in the Bit field Valid valu
69. faults which are generated by the Genius I O Blocks will cause the I O Scanner to ESTOP the active programs if the I O is not simulated Network Number You must select an arbitrary network number between 1 and 9 The network number is used to link the desired physical I O bus to the logical port defined through this Dialog Caution The PCIM I O driver cannot support more than 9 I O buses Each network number in a configuration MUST be unique Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Interrupt Number The PCIM I O Driver uses the interrupt specified in this field to handle fault reporting and configuration change notification for the I O scanner The value specified here must match the value specified for the board Shared RAM Address The shared RAM Address field specifies the location of the 16K buffer used to communicate with the specified port on the PCIM Board Only legal values are presented for selection Each location must be unique in a configuration two ports cannot share the same RAM buffer The entire Shared RAM Address Space must not be used by any other device on the PC Conflicts can occur which prevent the PCIM Board from working correctly The value specified here must match the value specified by the DIP switch settings on the Single Port Board or in the Configuration Program for the Dual Port Board Note The shared RAM address is set in the PCIM Configuration utility PCU and is displayed here An
70. for a button the button changes to State 1 when the state symbol is low and to State 2 when the state symbol is high Type or select a state symbol for the button from the list If necessary a new symbol can be defined by opening the Symbol Manager with the Symbol Manager button If Automatic State Change is disabled and no state symbol is defined for the button the button is a single state button and remains in State 1 Override Symbol Defines the Boolean override symbol for the button If an override symbol is defined for a button the button changes to the override state when the override symbol is high Type or select an override symbol for the button from the list If necessary a new symbol can be defined by opening the Symbol Manager with the Symbol Manager button Key Specifies a keyboard key which can be pressed to click the button Function keys can be selected from a list or a single key in the range A Z or 1 9 can be typed The Alt Shift and Ctrl keys can also be used in combination with another key Access Level Specifies an access level for the button If an access level is specified the access level of the operator interface must be set to the specified access level or higher in order to click the button Button Functions Displays the list of control functions for each button state The control functions for the current button state are executed when the click button is pressed and released Add
71. for the daughter board This byte is not used by the PCIM and using it will minimize the chance of address conflicts See the illustration below Example If you choose 3E0 as the I O Base address for the first GENI daughter board Channel 1 of the PCIM then use 3E2 for the EEPROM Controller Port address I O Port Space On Computer I O Base Address 1 PCIM Channel 1 Daughter board 1 Not used 3E2 EEPROM Controller Port Address q O Base Address 2 IC660ELB922 only PCIM Channel 2 Daughter board 2 GFK 1424B Appendix A The Personal Computer Interface Module for Genius I O A 5 A 6 1 0 Base Address Starting address of the 4 byte I O port space you need to reserve in your computer for each GENI daughter board channel in the PCIM This address must be on a 4 byte boundary These addresses are normally OK for you to use 3E0 348 2E0 228 3E4 34C 2E4 22C 340 220 344 224 Check your computer s system configuration to verify that there is no conflict Memory Base Address Starting address of a 16 kilobyte block of memory you need to reserve in your computer for each GENI daughter board channel in the PCIM This address must be on a 16 kilobyte boundary These addresses are normally OK if your computer is not using the indicated hardware or software B0000 Used for monochrome video memory B4000 Used for monochrome video memory C8000 Usually OK CC000 Used for the GE Fanuc Parallel WSI card D0000 Used f
72. in your system you must simulate the board by clicking the Simulate Board check box Industrial Computer Source PCDIO Card Version 3 01 0012 x Rack l se pa SSS Board Name Peo i t lt S COC S Model No fpcoioasP tt t iti CY Base Address 300 tactory default J Simulate Board Description optional OK Cancel Help e To assign symbol names to the I O points on this board click the Def Connectors button Define Connectors e When the Define Connector button is clicked a Port Definition dialog box will appear e Select Input for the first port and then enter symbol names for the first six points switch1 through switch6 These symbols will correspond to the six switches on the I O simulator e Select Output for the second port and then enter symbol names for the first seven points light1 through light6 and buzzer in the seventh point These symbols correspond to the six lights and the buzzer on the I O simulator For Port B Name type lights D 4 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Note PC Control symbol names are case sensitive For this example symbol names are all lower case Saving and Activating the New Configuration Click the OK button on the Port Definition dialog and then click Yes when prompted Do you wish to activate this configuration Click Yes when prompted if you want to save before activating The Save As dialog box will op
73. is executed the Structured Text code that you incorporate within each step is processed as the step becomes active Process incomming Character IF COM2_INPUT_BUFF 1 11 THEN 1Selection 1Selection 1 ELSEIF COM2_INPUT_BUFF 1 10 THEN 1Selection 1Selection 1 END_IF IF 1Selection gt 3 THEN 1Selection 0 ELSEIF 1Selection lt 0 THEN 1Selection 2 END_IF Select a new string to display CASE 1Selection OF r 0 OutputString Dave 1 OutputString Tim 27 OutputString Steve END_CASE As you design the program you need to keep these points in mind The body of the Structured Text program code itself consists of expressions statements and functions Valid Structured Text operators and data types are described under the Structured Text Expressions section Make any Symbol declarations that you need in the program from the Symbol Manager You can initialize symbols through one or more actions which you can associate with the step Be sure to avoid using any of the PC Control keywords 4 80 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Documenting an SFC Program GFK 1424B Adding Program Comments al A program comment can consist of any meaningful description that you want to display adjacent to a program element You can choose whether the system displays the comments or hides them 1 Click on the Comment Tool on the SFC menu bar The cursor change
74. make a change to the program if the change can be seamlessly online edited the editor goes into seamless online edit mode The online edit control appears with four buttons active Restart Program Restarts the program and resets the I O It aborts the current program and runs the new program shutting down I O in the process Activate Changes Seamlessly replaces the old version of the program with the new version I O Parse Changes Cancel Changes GFK 1424B scanning continues seamlessly It parses the changes first if needed The program is only parsed if the SFC or RLL file date is later than the program which has been parsed The file is automatically saved if it has been changed During Activate Changes the online edit box is displayed with all buttons disabled while the changes are being parsed If the Activate Change is successful the online edit box is removed If parsing the changes is not successful the parse error message is displayed and the online edit buttons are enabled again Parses the new program changes without running them If the Parse Changes is successful the online edit box buttons are re enabled If a parse error occurs the parse error message is displayed and the online edit box buttons are re enabled During Parse Changes the online edit box is displayed with all buttons disabled while the changes are being parsed Converts the source back to the running program and resumes highlighting the ac
75. motion control card Motion Control programming and operator interface controls Appendix E Support for Indirect addressing Pointers appendix F Change MMI function Miscellaneous Functions in Appendix G Additional timer types Extended Timers in Appendix G New instructions for conversions and extended timers Appendix G Support of user defined C function blocks refer to application note APP981R1 provided on the PC Control CD for details on using the CFB Editor iii Preface Content of This Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Provides the requirements and procedures for installing PC Control on your computer and tells how to use online documentation Chapter 2 Getting Started Provides an overview of PC Control operation and the main tasks you need to perform to create a control application Describes how to create a new project to hold all of the associated files Chapter 3 Configuring I O Describes how to configure GENIUS I O and Series 90 30 I O within PC Control software Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs Describes how to create Sequential Function Chart Relay Ladder Logic Structured Text and Instruction List programs Chapter 5 Running Application Programs Describes how to start the run time systems and run an application program Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications Describes how to create an operator interface screen using the integrated PC Control GUI editor
76. motion control program when a jog command is issued to the axis referenced by the axis JP and axis JM symbols To send an axis home 1 Set JTYPE 0 2 Set JSPD homespeed 9 Activate either JP or JM 4 Wait until HOME TRUE for more than 1 second 5 Reset JP or JM GFK 1424B Appendix E Motion Control E 15 E 16 Axis Group Input Symbols Boolean Activates emergency stop ESTOP The axis ESTP axis input symbol is a Boolean that causes all defined axes to stop motion Note that this includes all axes in all groups regardless of which axis is referenced by the symbol AxisGroup TOOLRAD x Value used for tool radius compensation G41 and G42 x 0 31 For more information see Using the TOOLRAD Axis Group Input Symbols on page E 16 real Value used for tool length compensation G43 and G44 x 0 31 For more information see Using the TOOLLEN Axis Group Input Symbols on page E 17 Boolean Resets ESTOP until bit is reset NOTE this input should only be pulsed on if left on the system will not respond to other inputs AxisGroup OPSTP Activates optional stop M01 AxisGroup TSTRUN Activates test run mode Using the TOOLRAD Axis Group Input Symbols The preparatory commands G 41 and G 42 apply cutter or radius compensation to the tool path Both commands require the D command be used in the same block The D command specifies which axisGroup TOOLRAD element to select The axisGroup TO
77. on that topic Context Sensitive Help F1 Using context sensitive help you can quickly access specific information about the active window or dialog box by pressing the F1 button 1 8 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Chapter 2 GFK 1424B Getting Started To get started using PC Control software open the Program Editor utility The Program Editor utility allows you to create a new project to hold the application program and configuration files create application programs and access the I O Configuration utility This chapter provides the following information Overview of the software subsystems comprising PC Control software Overview of IEC 1131 How to change access level passwords How to create and manage projects from Program Editor How to create and manage application programs Overview of program operation 2 1 Section l Overview of the Software The PC Control software consists of the following subsystems I O Scanner Execution User Interface Subsystems Logic Execution Subsystems Software Subsystems Configuration Utility The Configuration Utility allows you to define the I O structure and assign tag names to I O points and I O ports Operator Interface PC Control GUD The Operator Interface utility allows you to customize and operate the operator interface environment The operator interface is a series of screens messages or windows that are presented to the operator
78. previously open in the project are opened again and the configuration file that was last active in that project is activated 2 20 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Copying a Project Start Program Editor 2 Click Project on the menu bar and select Copy The Copy Project From dialog box appears 3 Click the project you want to copy and click OK The Copy Project To dialog box appears 4 Type the name of the copy and click OK When a project is copied all of the program operator interface and configuration files in that project are copied into the new project and the new project becomes the active project Program files which were previously open in the source project are copied to the new project and opened The configuration file which was active in the source project is copied to the new project and activated Renaming a Project Start Program Editor 2 Click Project on the menu bar and select Rename The Rename Project From dialog box appears 3 Click the project you want to rename and click OK The Rename Project To dialog box appears 4 Type the new name of the project and click OK After a project is renamed it becomes the active project Activating a Configuration 1 Select Activate from the Project menu The Select Global Configuration File dialog box appears It displays a list of configuration files defined for the current project 2 Select the configuration you want to activate and
79. program RLL diagrams use output coils to represent Boolean output variables If the logic to the left of an output coil is energized set true the Boolean symbol represented by the output coil receives a Boolean 1 high otherwise it receives a Boolean 0 low Variations of the coil element exist including inverting and pulsed single scan outputs Some output coils are latching and only set or reset the output variable to true or false if the logic to the left is true RLL logic elements that reside on the same horizontal rung are assumed to be logically ANDed together Function blocks are provided to facilitate complex operations that use more than one Boolean symbol PaintLow How RLL Application Programs are Solved This topic explains how RLL programs using simple relays and function block are solved How Simple Relay Logic is Solved After the system writes to the physical outputs it reads physical inputs and then solves the RLL logic Power flow and solving of the program logic is always from top to bottom and from left to right In the following example power flow begins at the left power rail If contact vlv1 is on power flow continues to contact pmp1 The three contacts vlv1 pmp1 and agit are in a series and represent the logical ANDing of the three contacts Contact bt1 is in parallel with contacts vlv1 and pmp1 representing the logical OR of bt with vlv1 and pmp1 If contact BT1 is on power GFK 1424B Chap
80. repaint itself e Events these functions are called when a Windows event such as a mouse click or a key press occurs within the control The container is notified when these events occur Properties methods and events are configured within the Operator Interface Screen Editor after the control is added to a screen ActiveX Limitations GFK 1424B The following is a list of limitations when using ActiveX controls in the Operator Interface 1 No support for compound controls controls within other controls 2 No type coercion from DWORD to INT for example 3 No support for controls that do not have their own property pages 4 No support for changing fonts at runtime The Operator Interface does not support a font type 5 No support for method event parameters of type VT_VARIANT 6 No support for complex data types structures for method event parameters Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 33 s ActiveX and Standard Controls Standard controls provided with the product provide basic functionality for a programmable control system operator interface These controls also have an internal knowledge of the programmable control system This knowledge allows them to hide many complex details from the end user To extend the functionality or to accommodate special requirements the operator interface serves as a container for ActiveX controls Any available ActiveX control can be dropped into an o
81. see UPS Configuration on page 2 30 GFK 1424B Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 19 Section 2 Working with Projects and Applications Managing Projects Project management allows organization of work into logical divisions called projects Each project contains a group of program configuration and operator interface files that are used for a common purpose The Program Editor is used to edit RLL SFC Structured Text and Instruction List application control programs All project management functions are performed from the Program Editor The following notes pertain to projects e The Program Editor can have only one project open at a time e The project name should identify the common purpose of the files e The active project is displayed on the Program Editor window title bar Creating a New Project Start Program Editor 2 Click Project on the menu bar and select New The New Project dialog box appears 3 Type the name of the new project and click OK Note If there was an active project open it is closed and the new project becomes the active project Opening a Project Start Program Editor 2 Click Project on the menu bar and select Open The Open Project dialog box appears 3 Click the project you want to open and click OK When a project is opened it becomes the active project The previously active project is closed along with any open program files When a project is opened all program files that were
82. the EEPROM I O address on the DIP switches GFK 1424B Appendix A The Personal Computer Interface Module for Genius I O A 3 A 4 Install the PCIM in the computer Configure the PCIM using the PCIM Configuration Utility PCU Connect the PCIM to the serial bus Hardware Required The hardware requirements for installing and operating the PCIM is the same as for running PC Control software Suitable Computers The PCIM has been tested successfully in many types of IBM PC compatible computers It is fully compatible with the ISA backplane and provides host system address decoding over the full PC AT memory maps However it has not been possible to test the PCIM with all computers that may be available Therefore proper operation of the PCIM in every type of host computer cannot be assured Computer Resources You Must Reserve To install and configure the PCIM you must reserve specific computer system resources I O ports memory and IRQ This is done using DIP switches EEPROM address and the PCIM Configuration Utility Before beginning the actual installation and configuration it is a good idea to determine what addresses you can use that will not conflict with devices already installed in your computer You should record this information for reference when you configure the PCIM The resources you must reserve for the PCIM are One I O Port for the EEPROM address set using the DIP switches same value as the Controller Port a
83. the convergence must wait until all the paths have been executed and all the paths have e been executed e arrived at the point of simultaneous convergence The simultaneous diverge is represented as single control path entering at the top and a double horizontal line with two or more control paths exiting from below Simultaneous convergence is represented as two or more control paths at the top a double horizontal line and a single control path exiting at the bottom Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B To help ensure proper convergence do not use Labels to jump e outside a simultaneous divergence e into a simultaneous divergence e to another path within a Simultaneous Divergence About Program Flow Control Features GFK 1424B You can use Control Loops and Jump and Label constructs to control flow within an SFC diagram Control Loops In an SFC program flow usually proceeds from top to bottom Control loops let you go back to a previous location to repeat a Series of steps A control loop consists of two transitions one to continue in the downward direction and one on a directed link that loops back in the upward direction An arrow at the top of the control loop indicates the point at which power flow re enters the control path Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 53 4 54 In the figure below program flow continues to the End when Condition_A is TRUE When Condition_B is TRUE and Condition_A
84. the indicator for light1 and click the left mouse button to drop a text box e Double click on the new text box to open the Edit Text dialog box e Jn the Text edit box enter Light1 e Click the OK button to close the dialog box and accept the changes e Create five more text boxes to label the indicators for lights 2 through 6 Edit Text Ea Text JLightt Background Color L Select Font Help ome D 22 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B 2 Click Button To control the done buzzer in your cookie making machine you need to add a click button e Select the Click Button tool from the Operator interface tool bar The cursor will change to the Button cursor Move the cursor over a desired spot on the Operator Interface screen and click the left mouse button to drop a button control e Double click on the new button to open the Edit Button Control dialog box e Inthe State Symbol edit box enter the symbol buzzer e In the State 1 Definition portion of the dialog box click the Add Function button e From the drop down list box that appears select the Set function e In the next drop down list box that appears select the symbol buzzer e In the State 2 Definition portion of the dialog box click the Add Function button e From the drop down list box that appears select the Clear function e In the next drop down list box that appears select the symbol buzzer GFK 1424B Appendix D Appl
85. to edit and a dialog box similar to the following should appear The data in your dialog box should match the GSD file for the slave you selected 3 26 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Slave Configuration 1 Word 1 CIFSO DPM CIF104 DI ICBC 40 n 1 Word IC670MDLE44 24VDC Fast In 16pt 1 Word 1 Word IC670MDL642 125VDC In 16pt 1 Word ICS70MDL241 240VAC In 16pt__1 Word z 2 Field Control PROFIBUS In this example the slave device is a modular Field Control BIU and the individual I O modules need to be added to set the amount of I O data that will be exchanged with the Master In the case of Field Control you must select the Profibus BIU SlotO configuration first Then select the individual I O modules in slot order Note For intelligent modules you will see two entries for each module If you are using the auto configuration feature of Field Control you will need to select the Status Control configuration before selecting the I O portion of the configuration GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 27 You should now see a dialog box similar to the following Slave Configuration 1C670MDL240 T1SVAC In 16pt IC670MDL642 125VDC In 16pt a E 1 CIF30 DPM CIF104 D1 7 j IC670MD L330 12 1 20VAC Dut E IC670MDL742 5 1 2 24VDC Out 11 2 Field Control PROFIBUS ICB70PBI001 Profibus BIU Slot0
86. to execute execute Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B The software lets you execute multiple programs of multiple types For example you can run two RLL program at the same time as three SFC programs You can coordinate program execution through global symbols which are recognized by all program types How Transitions are Evaluated GFK 1424B All Structured Text or RS 274D logic within a Step must be completed before the system evaluates a Transition This is a further extension to the IEC 1131 3 specification which only requires all preceding Steps to be active before a Transition can be evaluated Transitions can follow transitions without steps in between Once a transition condition is satisfied the transition is disabled and next SFC element step or transition is activated At runtime a dummy step is inserted per the IEC standard between two consecutive transitions The dummy step performs no logic however it takes two I O scans for the dummy step to activate and deactivate just like a normal step Evaluation of a transition occurs as follows For this transition The transition becomes true when IRLL transition Power flow on the rung reaches the output coil and turn the coil on Boolean transitions he Boolean expression resolves to true Transitions must be evaluated as true before program flow can continue to the next step rue At the next I O scan the RLL associated with the ac
87. two daughter board s IC660ELB92 1 922 Each PCIM daughter board provides a low cost tap on a Genius I O bus allowing a host system to control remote I O utilizing the extensive diagnostics high reliability and noise immunity of the Genius I O System Each daughter board is independently configurable using the configuration software supplied with the PCIM Board edge connectors are used to connect the PCIM to the Genius bus If the PCIM has two daughter boards they can be connected to the same bus or to independent busses A 1 A 2 Daughter Board A PCIM daughterboard is a general purpose I O Controller for the Genius I O System It provides a convenient method to control devices on the Genius serial bus The PCIM daughterboard performs the housekeeping tasks of initialization and fault management for up to 30 bus devices keeps up to date images of the I O controlled by each device whether the device is a Genius I O Block or other bus device and can communicate with other Controllers on the Genius bus by passing background messages not associated with I O commands or Global Data The interface to this RAM is optimized for the IBM personal computer bus Mother Board The PCIM mother board provides a convenient way to interface an Open Architecture daughter board like the PCIM daughter board to an IBM compatible Host system All the signals necessary to communicate to a daughter board are buffered through the mother board to t
88. 1 is a pointer symbol Var1 is assigned the value contained in Y pVar1 Y Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B BREAK Statement The BREAK statement stops program execution if debugging is enabled the program was started with the Run with Debug command Format BREAK Example If debugging is enabled program execution stops at the BREAK statement The statements in StatementList2 and succeeding program statements can be executed by single stepping through the program StatementList1l BREAK StatementList2 CASE Statement The CASE construct offers multiple choice conditional execution of statement lists It conditionally executes one of multiple statement lists in which the condition is determined by the value of an integer variable Format CASE IntExpression OF Ints Singular StatementList Int Int Int Enumerated StatementList Tht Tat Range StatementList ELSE Optional StatementList ND_CASE ti Where IntExpression A variable or expression having a data type of ANY_INT Int An integer Zero or more of each of the singular enumerated or range forms can be used StatementList Zero or more Structured Text statements GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 87 Operation The Int values are compared to IntExpression The StatementList following the first Int value that matches IntExpression is ex
89. 13 EXIT 4 89 Exporting configuration CSV file symbols for CIMPLICITY HMI snf 4 25 Exporting configuration ermal ail information types Index 4 Using PC Control Software August 1998 Expressions Structured Text 4 84 Extended Timers RLL Extensions IEC 1131 aea RLL 4 59 SFC 4 59 F Field Control BIU sample configuration 3 33 File functions File Menu2 10 File names 2 34 First a Fit the window Font and color options L 27 FOR 4 91 Frequently asked questions 218 Function Block Diagram 2 3 Function Blocks Palette 2 12 Function call 4 93 G G Codes E 6 G56 Macro Calls with Motion G65 Macro Calls Designing the MacroE 22 Execution E 23 Gauge 6 25 Genius bus address definitions 3 11 Global Data A 18 Global Data Setup dialog 3 11 Graphical Languages Function Block Dia gram 2 3 Ladder Diagram 2 3 Sequential Function Chart 2 3 GFK 1424B Hardware conflicts 3 2 Hardware requirements for the PC l T O Base Address A 6 T O configuration overview B2 T O points configuratien desoripi onat TO scan rate TVO Scanner zar Icon Menu Identifiers IEC 1131 3 extensions 4 59 een IEC style locations 2 29 1F 200 IF GOTO Command IF GOTO Command Example Importing configuration 41 information types Importing configuration CSV file 3 43 INCLUDE Indicator 6 2
90. 13 Pmacdemo ste ES Compmts2 ste i8 Span ste z Cyde sic 3 test ste E este 3 ieee ste E nemation ste 5 Wather sic 2 Click on the program to open You may need to select the SFC program type in the Files of Type field first The SFC program that you selected appears a Washer sfc StartCycle OR IStartCycle OR AutoCycle 3 Begin editing the program elements GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 61 Using the SFC Tool and Menu Bar The SFC toolbar contains all the tools that you need to create an SFC program Aenne EEEE E a el Insert Jump Adds a Jump to the program Eoo Insert Loop Adds a Loop to the program Insert Select Adds a selected Divergence to the program Diverge Insert Simultaneou_ Adds a Simultaneous Divergence to the program s Diverge Insert New App Adds a predefined program Step from the library Icon to the program Allows you to add comments to the program 4 62 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Working with Steps A Step represents a condition in which the behavior of the system follows a set of rules defined by the Actions and functions associated with the Step After adding a step to a program you must configure it Adding a Step By 1 Click on the Step Tool on the SFC toolbar The cursor changes into the Step cursor 2 Move the cursor to the location in the program where you want to place the new Step and click The new Step
91. 1998 W Wait on All M Codes Feature Watching and forcing symbols Watch window WHILE 4 95 WHILE Command E 19 WHILE Command Example WORD GFK 1424B
92. 1998 GFK 1424B Box A box is a visual element that can be used to group controls give a border to text or bitmap emphasize parts of a screen or to otherwise make a screen visually interesting A box has a border and optional fill color A box will never obscure the appearance of any control or text The Edit Box dialog box is shown in the following figure and described in the following table Edit Box Style Ea m Border Width 11 Color EE Interior Transparent V Color i B Cancel Field Description Border This defines the appearance of the border Type in a numeric border width and select a border color from the color list box Interior If transparent is checked the box has a transparent interior and the fill color is disabled Otherwise a fill color can be assigned to the box GFK 1424B Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 19 s Click Button 6 20 A click or multistate button executes a function when it is clicked Functions include setting or clearing a Boolean symbol displaying a screen selecting running stopping or aborting a program getting operator input and running an executable file The button can be configured for single state operation or two state with override state operation Functions can be programmed for each state and when the button is clicked it executes the functions depending on its current state It can be con
93. 4 17 4 18 3 Do any of the following e To create a new type click Add Type The Edit User Type dialog box appears e To edit a user type select the type name and click Edit Type The Edit User Type dialog box appears e To delete a user type select the type name and click Delete Type Edit User Type x Type Name MyType Ordered member list Myint INT MySting STRING Add Member Delete Member Edit Member Move Up Move Down i Cancel Hep Field Description Type Name Displays the user type If adding a user type enter the type name Ordered member list Displays a list of the type members Add Member Adds a new member Displays an Edit Type Member dialog box in which to assign a name and data type to the member Delete Member Deletes the selected member Edit Member Edits the selected member Displays an Edit Type Member dialog box in which to assign a name and data type to the member Move Up Moves the selected member up or down in the ordered list Move Down Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Using Symbols You can manually enter symbol names where needed by typing the symbol name However they can be more easily added using symbol list boxes that appear for example in the RLL editor or dragging them from the Symbol Manager into Structured Text or Instruction List documents Drag and Drop Drag and drop features of the Symbol Manager allow you to do the fo
94. 424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 43 About Actions 4 44 Actions contain relay ladder logic Actions are graphically represented as a rectangular box containing the Action s name This box is connected to the step with a horizontal line You can associate more than one action to a step Actions associated with a step are invoked when the step becomes active You can specify when an action is executed relative to when the step becomes active by using an action qualifier e The Action qualifier determines when the RLL runs relative to the activation of the step which can be either Structured Text or Motion Control language You can use an action qualifier with or without a motion qualifier For a list of Action qualifiers see page 4 46 e Motion qualifier determines when the RLL runs relative to the execution of the Motion Control code within the step For a list of Motion qualifiers see page 4 46 Using a program label can also affect when an action is executed The action does not run until the label in the step code is encountered The action qualifier is shown as a box containing an abbreviation attached to the right side of the action Action Function In the example below the Action called PaintColorAction consists of several rungs of RLL that are executed when Step2 becomes active In this particular example the RLL execution does not begin until code execution in the Step encounters the Label called label_
95. 6 arguments An error message appears if the event has greater than 16 arguments For each argument that a value is needed assign a symbol from its Symbol Assignment list If necessary click Symbol Manager to create new symbols Symbol Manager Displays the Symbol Manager Dialog Help Displays help for the Method Setup dialog box Control Help Displays help for the ActiveX control provided by the control implementer Method Help Displays help for the ActiveX control s methods provided by the control implementer GFK 1424B Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 43 Appendix A Description GFK 1424B The Personal Computer Interface Module for Genius I O This appendix provides a description of the GE Fanuc Genius I O Personal Computer Interface Module PCIM It also includes procedures for installing and configuring the PCIM The single slot PC Interface Module PCIM is an entry point into the Genius I O System for the IBM PC The PCIM is an AT style board designed to be integrated into a user developed microprocessor system It is fully compatible with all Genius protocols mechanical electrical levels and communications timing Bus Connector 7 for Daughter Board 1 Daughter Board 1 Daughter Board 2 Dip Switches IC660ELB922 only Bus Connector for Daughter Board 2 PCIM The PCIM is available with either one or
96. 6 6 Opening an Operator Interface File ccc ceeecseescsseescesecesesecseesseseessssseseseneegs 6 6 Saving an Operator Interface File 0 0 eee eceecceescesecesecesecesecsaecseecseeeseeeaseneeeeens 6 6 Screen Operan Sisi goede ovlieh nau ttn ee ees Se 6 7 Creating a New Operator Interface Screen cece cee eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenseenseenaes 6 7 Deleting a Screen sicetse csi he Mee A elas tek in ed ee ede eee 6 7 Copying a Screens ae eer aerar EE aee Sad sons shee EE EEEE E 6 7 Re naminsa S reennnaren ase n E A E E E eee Seats 6 8 Contents xiii Contents Selecting the Startup Screen c s s cesssescescscecssscssesoshepensssnssvesostessesvescscnssseegeeas cose 6 8 Selecting a Sereen to Editos reei ea e I a SETE 6 8 Section 3 Working with Controls eseseoesooecsooessocesscessocesocesoosee 6 9 Adding Controls resena a E N 6 9 Editing ControlSi sensro ae ienie Eia AEE iiA 6 9 SelecinaiControls iTe E EEE E E EAE ERER 6 10 Moving Controls rasieren a meecatacnaen aes 6 10 Sizing CONTO e a eto a E A a E E N a 6 11 Copying Cutting and Pasting y ics ccccssccsecsacessaceeceecctesnacessuacsdenaasest 6 11 De levine Controls iarna coins a a E E 6 12 Alining Controlsisns essien aaasta 6 12 Moving Controls Front Back cesscccesececeeececesseceeseeeeeseeeeneeeees 6 12 Section 4 Symbol Operations sccsssscsssssscssssccsssscsssssesseses O 13 Editing Symbols 43 ssscactisiedsaesiapeaassciscceta sdeeastacdedancpasca
97. 7 Indirect addressin g F 2 Infinite loop 4 94 4 96 Inserting ActiveX controls Installation Instruction List examples 4 112 language overview 4 107 opening a document 4 105 overview 4 105 syntax Instruction set summa Instruction List G 17 RLL LD G 1 GFK 1424B Index Index SFC G 7 Structured Text G 10 INT 4 8 Integrating Structured Text into an SFC 4 80 Interrupts IRQJA 7 J Jog panel E 31 Jog Panel Jump and label construct 4 54 Jump and label parameters K Keyboard shortcuts Operator Interface 2 9 L LABEL 4 93 Labels adding to SFC License transferring 2 14 upgrading Literals M M Codes See ee od ES Wait and Continue E 9 Macro Steps 4 58 adding configuring Managing Projects 2 20 Math functions RLL ST G 15 Index 5 Index Mathematical functions iL c 19 Memory address 3 3 Memory Base Address A 6 Memory size options 2 26 Memory uage ea Menus View Menu 2 12 Methods ActiveX controls Minimum PC hardware requirements Miscellaneous functions Monitoring Application programs 4 102 power flow 5 5 symbols Monitoring an axis Monitoring Axis Plot E 25 Monitoring motion applications Monitoring Multi Axis Motion Status Motherboard Motion Commands E 4 Motion control Jog panel E 31 Single axis panel E 32
98. AE E E E E 4 20 Predefined System Symbols eee ceeccesecesecesecesecesecesecseecseesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseens 4 20 R n Hime Symbols ose seeded Seve veas eave Silas ahs sep soee ds ustoescmee rs Sadan cayrensens R E 4 21 KEY WOtdS ies sh a a cere s cy eueade E E E E tens a a 4 22 Exporting Symbols for CIMPLICITY HMI eee ceecsecseecreeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 25 Section 2 RLL Programming ccscccssscssssscsssssccsssscesssscsseees F220 Overview of Relay Ladder Logic Diagrams 0 eee eee eee 4 26 How RLL Application Programs are Solved eeeeeeeseeeeeteeeees 4 27 How Simple Relay Logic is Solved eee cee eseeneeeeceeeeeeeeeseensecesecaessaesaeeens 4 27 How RLL Logic is Solved When Function Blocks Are Used eee eee eeeeee 4 28 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Contents Creating a Relay Ladder Logic Program e eee eeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 28 Section 3 SFC Programming sccscsscsscsssssssssssssesssssessees 441 Overview of Sequential Function Charts cee eeeeesseceseeeeeeeeeeees 4 4 About STOPS veces esses sen ee oaae i a Ear E pevees ioe taal SERER 4 41 Using the Step System Symbols sesseseeeseseseseesssresrssesressertreresrentssrerrssesrreresrenresre 4 43 About ACHONS k E a E r a ES G EES SR EEE 4 44 Action Manager soiien area reer OE EREE SEET EEE ESPES 4 50 About ransivons chad n A isin N nti 4 50 About Diversences sesen ss iea neues suns ko
99. ATE DATE_AND_TIME DELETE DELETEFILE DINT DIV DO DS DSPMSG DT DWORD ELSE ELSEIF EN END END_ACTION END_CASE END_CONFIGURATION END_FOR END_FOR_NOWAIT END_FUNCTION END_FUNCTION_BLOCK END_IF ENDIF END_IL END_RS274 ENO END_PROGRAM END_REPEAT END_RESOURCE END_STEP END_STRUCT END_TRANSITION END_TYPE END_VAR END_WHILE END_WHILE_NOWAIT Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Keyword Listing EQ ESTOP ET EXIT EXP EXPT F FALSE FB F_EDGE FILE FIND F_EDGE FNAME FOR FROM F_TRIG FTYPE FUNCTION FUNCTION_BLOCK G GE GLOBAL GOTO GT H I IF IN INI IN2 INCLUDE INIT INITIAL_STEP INSERT INT INTERVAL INT_TO_BCD INT_TO_REAL INT_TO_STRING IP J JMP JMPC JMPCN JOGCONT JOGDIR JOGDIST JOGHOME JOGINCR JOGMINUS JOGPLUS JOGSPD JOGTYPE K L LD LDN LDT LE LEFT LEN LIMIT LINT LL LN LOG LREAL LT LWORD M MACROSTEP MAX MC MID MIN MOD MOVE MOVEAXS MS MSGWND MUL MULP MUX N NAME NE NEWFILE NIL NOT NOW NT NULL OF ON OPENFILE OR OR_BITS ORN ORT ORTN OUT P PID POSTN POW PRGCB PRIORITY PROGRAM PT PV PW Q QU QD Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 23 4 24 Keyword Listing R R1 READFILE READ_ONLY READ_WRITE REAL REAL_TO_STRING R_EDGE REPEAT REPLACE RESET_ESTOP RESOU
100. Apply the new global memory variables seamlessly become active in the runtime engine Any deletion or modification of global memory variables or modification or addition of global user structures will require the configuration to be re activated aborting all programs and shutting down the I O When you attempt to delete or modify a global memory variable or make changes to the global user structures a notification appears that this edit will force all programs to be aborted e Global and local symbols can be added e Deleting or modifying symbols forces the program to restart e Modifying local user structures forces the program to restart e Modification to the I O drivers will require the configuration to be re activated Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B RLL Programs e When editing RLL programs any change can be made The full program is re parsed and the program is seamlessly swapped Symbols maintain their current value I O scanning continues seamlessly Note Positive and negative transition sensing contacts are prohibited from causing a transition the first time the element is evaluated For online edit this means that after the online edit the first scan will never sense the transition since for the edited program this is its initial scan The place where this can cause an apparent problem is when the element is low and during the scan of the online edit the element goes high This transition would no
101. CB cookie NAME c cimplicity pccontrol cookie cookie sfc cookie REWIND TRUE cookie RUN TRUE WHILE TRUE DO When the cookie program stops restart it IF NOT cookie INCYCLE THEN cookie REWIND TRUE cookie RUN TRUE END_IF SCAN buzzer FALSE switchl TRUE END_WHILE GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 101 Monitoring and Testing Application Programs and Symbols Parsing a Program In order to parse a program you must be running under the Windows NT operating system and have the PC Control execution software installed To parse the active file Click Execute and select Parse If any parse errors are encountered a message is displayed and the error is highlighted Once the program parsing is complete the active file window title is updated with the parsing status Watching and Forcing Symbols The Watch window shown in the following figures displays local and global symbols and their status at runtime To display or hide the Watch window Click View and select Watch Force Variables or click the Watch window icon _CACIMPLICITY PCCONTROLADELE VALLE rll Watch emo mii Imoye To select variables for display in the Watch window click the Add button The Select Watch Variables dialog box will appear 4 102 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Select Watch Yariables new2contact BOOL newcontact BOOL PCIM_Network1_Dev0_BroadcastCtrlDataLen BYT
102. Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 13 s Section 5 Creating Operator Interface Applications Standard Controls Introduction The following lists and briefly describes standard controls and visual elements that can be used in an operator interface screen Control Description Bar The bar control displays a scale and a moving bar The moving bar tracks the current value of the symbol assigned to the bar The bar orientation can be configured to be horizontal or vertical Bitmap A bitmap is a visual element that can be used to describe the control application screen or add visual interest to a screen Box A box is a visual element that can be used to group controls give a border to text or bitmap emphasize parts of a screen or to otherwise make a screen visually interesting Click multi state Button A click or multi state button executes a function when it is clicked Functions include setting or clearing a Boolean symbol displaying a screen selecting running stopping or aborting a program getting operator input and running an executable file The button can be configured for single state operation or two state with override state operation Functions can be programmed for each state and the button executes functions depending on its current state It can be configured for automatic state change or state change based on a Boolean symbol Continuous Button A continuou
103. Code on page E 27 e You can use step actions to synchronize I O operations with Motion Control execution You can also use motion qualifiers to synchronize action logic with motion e The control system software provides motion symbols that are mapped to the T O For example axis CMDPOS is a real number symbol that contains the current commanded position of an axis e M flags are associated with the Motion Control M codes and are set on or off depending on the M code being used This lets you monitor the M flags from Appendix E Motion Control E 3 other programs and allow other actions to begin after an M code is encountered during program execution e You can improve your control over program flow by using WHILE and IF GOTO commands with the Motion Control commands e You can call a macro subroutine for execution by using a preparatory command G65 Using Motion Control Statements E 4 Using Motion Control Commands The control system software converts RS 274D commands into the appropriate commands specifically generated for the servo motion card that you have selected Motion commands must be structured in a specific format See Motion Control Block Format on page E 5 The motion commands are Command soo Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Motion Control Block Format The format for a Motion Control block single line of code is described below N If you use a sequence nu
104. Delay qualifiers If the Action qualifier does not actually use he time duration any value entered for this parameter is ignored amp Specify Duration Accesses the Define Time Duration dialog box Action Name Specifies the name of the Action Program Label If you specify the optional program Label the RLL code in the action does not begin running until the code in the Step encounters the Label The Action and the program Label must be in the same SFC No cross reference between programs is allowed If no Label is in the Step with which the Action is associated then the Program Label parameter is ignored The Labels in a Macro Step SFC cannot be referenced from the parent SFC and the Labels in the parent SFC cannot be referenced by the macro SFC For a Step with Structured Text the Label consists of a Label name followed by two colons e g LabelA For a step with Motion Control code the label is an N followed by a block number e g N45 If you enter a Label it appears within the Action as shown below AOE PaintColorAction GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 45 Motion Qualifiers Note Not all motion qualifiers are supported by all motion cards Refer to the motion card documentation for supported motion qualifiers Motion Qualifiers specify motion constraints that must be satisfied before the RLL begins running If you use a program Label the motion constraint applies to the motion block fo
105. E PCIM_Network1_Dev0_Cfg BYTE PCIM_Network1_Dev0_DirectedCtlDataLen BYTE PCIM_Network1_Dev0_Model BYTE PCIM_Network1_Dev0_OutputsDisabled BOOL PCIM_Network1_Dev0_PresentBOOL PCIM_Network1_Dev1_BroadcastCtiDataLen BYTE PCIM_Network1_Dev1_Cfg BYTE PCIM_Network1_Dev1_DirectedCtiDataLen BYTE PCIM_Network1_Dev1l_Model BYTE PCIM_Network1_Dev1_OutputsDisabled BOOL PCIM_Network1_Dev1_PresentBOOL PCIM_Network1_Dev10_BroadcastCtrDataLen BYTE PCIM_Networkl_Dev10_Cfg BYTE al Select the variables you want to monitor and click OK The selected variables will be displayed in the Watch window RUN with Debug The RUN with Debug program option allows you to execute a program contiguously until a BREAK statement is encountered When the BREAK statement is encountered the program is Stopped From that point you can single step or Abort the program GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 103 Single Stepping a Program The Single Step Program option allows you to execute a program one complete scan at a time The program that you are testing must be Stopped before you can step it The mode of any other programs in the project does not matter To Step a Program 1 Select the program in the Program Editor If the program is Running on the menu bar click Execute and select Stop 2 Open a Watch window for the program and add any symbols that you need to monitor as the program runs This is optional 3 On the menu bar click Execut
106. F 30 you will assign a value for the board address using the dip switches You must choose a value for this address that does not conflict with those used by other devices installed in your computer These are the resources used by the devices in your computer Windows NT 4 0 Resources Log in under an account with system administrator privileges 1 Press the Start button 2 From the Start menu choose Programs Administrative Tools Windows NT Diagnostics 3 Click the Resources tab then review the I O Port dialog box for unused addresses 4 Find a block of 8 unused unlisted I O port addresses for the PCIF 30 The first port in the block is the board address Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Setting the DIP Switches and Watchdog J umper on the PCIF 30 The board address set using the dip switches is used to reserve the I O ports necessary for the PCIF 30 to operate Switch positions are numbered 1 through 6 Use switch 6 to set the high hex digit switches 5 4 3 and 2 to set the middle hex digit and switch 1 to set the low hex digit Watchdog E Enable Jumper om eW o Ox Dip Switches i PCIF 30 B Closed On F Open Off Low Middle High 6 B B yo ham BE BE ail mlolo l wal 3rlol s Ni o lala m
107. FANUC GE Fanuc Automation Programmable Control Products Using PC Control Software GFK 1424B August 1998 Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages currents temperatures or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment a Warning notice is used Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment This document is based on information available at the time of its publication While efforts have been made to be accurate the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation operation or maintenance Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty expressed implied or statutory with respect to and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy completeness sufficiency or usefulness of the information contained herein No warranties of
108. Function Pastes the contents of the clipboard Deletes the selected object Selects all text in an ST or IL document Opens the dialog box for the selected program element Insert an SFC or RLL element at the selected point in the program Inserts a function block element at the selected point in the program Available only when an RLL program is open for edit Inserts a new SFC element Edits an SFC step Inserts a Structured Text statement Inserts a Structured Text function or function block Inserts an Instruction List statement Inserts an Instruction List function or function block Calls Find Finds the specified text Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the specified text os Finds the previous occurrence of the specified text Append Mode Replaces the specified text with new text Jumps to the specified rung number Available only when an RLL program is open for edit Searches for the next occurrence of a output coil with the same symbol name as a selected contact Available only when an RLL program is open for edit Inserts new elements before the selected point Appends new elements after the selected point Boolean Transitions When editing an SFC sets the default transition for all open SFC programs to the Boolean type instead of the RLL type Does not change existing Transitions Available only when an SFC program is open for edit When editing an SFC lets you add password p
109. Function Adds a control function to the Button Functions list Refer to the Button Functions table for a list and description of functions that can be assigned to a button control If the function added is a RUN STOP or ABORT function and a program name is given an Edit Program button appears below the function list If the Edit Program button is pressed the Program Editor is activated and the specified file is opened If the file does not exist a new file is opened Delete Function Deletes the highlighted control function from the Button Functions list Edit Function Edits parameters of the highlighted control function in the Button Functions list GFK 1424B Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 21 6 22 Field Description Move Up Moves the highlighted control function up one position in the Button Functions list Move Down Moves the highlighted Control Function down one position in the Button Functions list Define Button Face Opens the Define Button Face dialog box Line 1 Title Line 2 Title The button can be given two lines of text to describe its function Bevel Bevel affects the border of the control Bevel values are from 0 to 6 A bevel of 0 makes the control appear flat Increasing the bevel gives the control a 3 D appearance Surface Color Specifies a background color for the control Select Icon Remove Icon Clicking Select Icon
110. L diagrams are designed to resemble the electrical diagram for an equivalent electrical relay logic circuit The RLL diagram contains two vertical power rails The left power rail is assumed to be an electrical current source and is energized whenever the RLL program is running The power rail on the right is assumed to be an electrical current sink The two power rails are connected by horizontal lines called rungs like the rungs of a ladder on which the logical instructions are placed TERT PE The basic RLL program instructions contact and coils represent actual hardware components limit switches solenoid coils lights etc and single bit internal memory locations RLL diagrams use input contacts to represent Boolean input symbols variables These contacts act as e normally open active high which means that current passes to or energizes the RLL element to its right when the symbol associated with it is high 1 or on e normally closed active low relay contacts which means that current passes to or energizes the RLL element to its right when the symbol associated with it is low 0 or off 4 26 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B These inputs usually have the name of the Boolean symbol they represent located above the graphical element They are variations of the input contact including transition sensing contacts that pass current to the next element for only one scan of the RLL
111. L i AxisGroup INTPL AxisGroup CIR Boolean AxisGroup PTP Boolean AxisGroup LIN Boolean AxisGroup CIRCW Boolean AxisGroup CIRCCW Boolean AxisGroup PLANE Using PC Control Software August 1998 zts SESER ve fos S Seje 5 me gz Indicates if emergency stop ESTOP is activated Contains active tool offset Contains active interpolation mode for group O point to point 1 linear 2 circular clockwise 3 circular counter clockwise Indicates if circular interpolation is activated clockwise or counter clockwise Indicates if point to point interpolation is activated Indicates if linear interpolation is activated activated interpolation is activated Indicates waiting for M code processing Contains value of the M code Active plane for circular interpolation 0 FIXOFF 0 G54 1 FIXOFF 1 G55 2 FIXOFF 2 G56 3 FIXOFF 3 G57 4 FIXOFF 40 G58 5 FIXOFF 5 G59 Active cutting mode 0 Cutting mode G64 1 Exact stop mode G61 Indicates if English inches units are activated Active feedrate mode 0 Feedrate programming IPM DPM G94 1 Inverse time programming G93 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Spindle Output Symbols S WAIT Indicates that program is suspended for a spindle change S CONT Indicates that program has resumed after a spindle change S DIR Boolean Indicates programmed spindle direction 0 positive clockwise M3 1 negative counter clockwise M4
112. Logic Manager is an executable program which can be used to control RLL programs in a project To access the Continuous Logic Manager from an operator interface screen add a button and add the EXECUTE function to it Select the Continuous Logic Manager as the executable file to run Refer to Buttons for more information At runtime the Continuous Logic Manager displays a list of RLL programs in the active project which are running and a list of RLL programs in the active project which are not running RLL programs which are running are displayed in the Running RLL Programs list RLL programs which are not running are displayed in the Project RLL Programs list To run an RLL program 1 Select the program from the Project RLL Programs list 2 Click Run The selected program is removed from the Project RLL Programs list and inserted into the Running RLL Programs list To run an RLL program with restart 1 Select the program from the Project RLL Programs list box 2 Press Run with Restart button The selected program is removed from the Project RLL Programs list and inserted into the Running RLL Programs list A program running with restart will automatically start running when the Runtime subsystem software starts up To abort an RLL program 1 Select the program from the Running RLL Program list 2 Press Abort The selected program is removed from the Running RLL Programs box and inserted into the Project RLL Programs list To e
113. ME or DT 4 6 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Data Types Data types must be assigned to symbols variables and constants Characteristics of the elementary data types are given in the following paragraphs Generic data types are described in Generic Data Types User defined data types are described in User Defined Data Type In the following descriptions e Generic type gives the generic types for which this data type can be substituted e Size is the amount of memory that one instance of the data type occupies for example the single bit Boolean type is really stored as a byte e Range is the range of values an instance of this type can take on e Default is the default initial value given to an instance of this type if an initial value is not otherwise specified BOOL Boolean A BOOL can have one of two states 0 or 1 corresponding to FALSE or TRUE Generic type ANY ANY_BIT Size 1 bit Range 0 FALSE 1 TRUE Default value 0 BYTE A BYTE is a bit string of length 8 Generic type ANY ANY_BIT Size 1 byte Range Not applicable Format MSB LSB 7 0 PATE ST Default value 00000000 GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 7 This data type is used to represent a date only in the format Y YY Y MM DD If you create an expression of DATE data types all values must be of the same type and the result m
114. Member of the ANY_NUM group of data types REAL data types are valid in any instruction or function block that accepts an ANY ANY_NUM ANY_REAL or REAL data type A REAL number data type is composed of one or more of the digits 0 9 is signed and contains a decimal point The range for REAL numbers is 3 402823 E38 to 1 401298 E 45 negative and 1 401298E 45 to 3 402823 E38 positive Relay Ladder Logic RLL is the graphical programming language used for describing application program logic based on an electrical relay contact and coil analogy RLL RLL stands for Relay Ladder Logic A graphical programming language using electrical relay contact and coil analogy RLL Transition Transition in an SFC that is programmed using Relay Ladder Logic The RLL transition consists of a single RLL rung with an output coil that has the same name as the RLL transition When this output coil has power flow the SFC transition condition is satisfied Rung RLL graphical programming element that represents an RLL function Runtime Engine Module responsible for scheduling and executing the program logic associated with the project s source code e g SFC RLL etc This module also performs as a server to DDE clients Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B SFC graphical programming element that splits a single control path into two or more paths The control path selected for execution is determined by the transition co
115. N Calculates the tangent of the input which must be in radians Motion Functions AXSJOG Starts a jog command on a specified axis MOVEAXS Starts a move command on a specified axis STOPJOG Stops a jog command on a specified axis Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Instruction List Instruction Set Summary GFK 1424B Bit String AND Returns the Boolean or bitwise logical AND of the input values NOT Returns the Boolean or bitwise inversion of the input value Exclusive OR XOR Returns the Boolean or bitwise logical Exclusive OR of the input values Rotate Left ROL Returns a value calculated by circularly shifting the bits of the input value a specified number of positions to the left Bit values shifted from the most significant bit MSB position are rotated to the least significant bit LSB position Rotate Right ROR Returns a value calculated by circularly shifting the bits of the input value a specified number of positions to the right Bit values shifted from the least significant bit LSB position are rotated to the most significant bit MSB position Shift Left SHL Returns a value calculated by shifting the bits of the input value a specified number of positions to the left Bit values shifted from the most significant bit position are discarded during the shift and the least significant bit positions are zero filled Shift Righ
116. O ports designated for devices already installed in your PC The PIF400 card requires 32Kbytes 7FFFH of shared RAM The starting address for this memory is configured by PC Control default is D0000 You will need to verify that this memory is not being used by another device To find out what resources are being used follow the instructions below A Log in under an account with system administrator privileges B From the Windows NT Start menu choose Programs Administrative Tools Windows NT diagnostics C Select the Resources tab Click the I O button and review the I O Port dialog box for unused addresses D Find a block of two unused unlisted I O port addresses for the PIF400 Switch S1 should be set to the first port in the block The factory default setting for S1 is 200 hex if ports 200 202 are being used you will need to change the setting of S1 See step 2 Set DIP Switch E To verify memory availability click the Memory tab Find an available block of 32Kbytes and make a note of it for use in the software configuration of the PIF400 card If the default setting DO000 D7FFF is being used you will need to configure a different block of memory in PC Control 2 Set DIP Switch Note You do not need to change the settings of DIP switch S1 unless it conflicts with other interface cards installed in the computer The factory default setting is 200 hex If you need to change the DIP switch settings s
117. OL light BOOL light3 BOOL light4 BOOL light5 BOOL light6 BOOL lights BYTE ShiftBOOL List types aLL SYMBOLS x Cancel _ Hep e From the Symbol List box double click on the Hopper symbol to copy it to the Transition Logic edit box Next click the gt button and then type 3000 Press the OK button to close the edit transition logic dialog box and accept the changes v u p e Repeat these steps for the next two paths in the simultaneous diverge Enter 2500 and 2000 respectively as the test condition for these transitions e Double click on the transition directly below the first step after the divergence For this transition logic you will use one of the step variables created automatically be PC CONTROL In the Transition Logic edit box type the name of the step directly above and add a T to the end in this example Step6 T Next click the gt button and then type T 10s this is the IEC 1131 syntax for ten seconds So this transition will be true when Step6 has been active for 10 or more seconds e Repeat these steps for the transition below Step7 Use T 15s to make the transition true after 15 seconds GFK 1424B Appendix D Application Examples D 11 2 e Next edit the transition below Step8 Click the NOT button first and then double click the buzzer symbol from the Symbol List box Click OK to accept these edits Finally lets edit the two transition condition on the Loop Tool e Doub
118. OLRAD axis group input symbols contain the actual compensation values used by the D commands The relationship between the D commands and the symbols containing their respective compensation values is shown in the following example Preparatory commands are G codes For more information see Using G Codes on page E 6 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Relationship of D Commands and Symbols DO ___exisGroup TOOLRADIOT _ axisGroup TOOLRAD 29 axisGroup TOOLRAD 30 D 31 axisGroup TOOLRAD 31 Assign compensation values to the array elements in a Structured Text Step that precedes the Motion Control Step containing the G and D commands Code G40 cancels compensation Using the TOOLLEN Axis Group Input Symbols The preparatory commands G 43H and G 44H apply tool length compensation to the tool path H specifies the which axisGroup TOOLLEN element to select The axisGroup TOOLLEN axis group input symbols contain the actual compensation values used by H The relationship between H and the symbols containing their respective compensation values is shown in the following example Preparatory commands are G codes For more information see Using G Codes on page E 6 ee E 4 E ieee al axisGroup TOOLLEN 29 axisGroup TOOLLEN 30 axisGroup TOOLLEN 31 Assign compensation values to the array elements in a Structured Text Step that precedes the Motion Control Step containing the G comm
119. ONTROLPROJECTON El cl E File name Config01 csv Files of type csv Files cs x Cancel GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 41 3 42 3 Select or type a file name for the export and click Open to continue The Export Config to CSV dialog box appears Export Config to CS 4 Select export options as needed and click OK to proceed The configuration is saved to the designated file Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B To importa CSV file to a configuration 1 Select Import CSV to Config from the File menu You are prompted to close the currently open configuration 2 A file selection dialog box appears CS File to Import from a conoc A ex EE Config01 csv Crion esvFiesro A e 3 Select or type the file name of the configuration file to be imported and click Open to continue The Import CSV to Config dialog box appears Import CS to Config x d eea ee 4 Select import options as needed You can choose to import either global symbols and or driver information use the global symbols or driver information from the active configuration or start the configuration without global symbols or driver information 5 Click OK to proceed The configuration data is imported and becomes the active configuration GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 43 Chapter 4 GFK 1424B Creating Application Programs The Program Editor is used to deve
120. OR statement You can use an expression for the control variable but the value must be 0 or greater By default each iteration of the FOR statement increments the value of the control variable by 1 An optional BY portion of the construct can be used to specify an increment or decrement of the control variable by specifying a non zero positive or negative integer or an expression that evaluates to a positive or negative integer The FOR statement checks the control variable before each iteration and the statements within the FOR END_FOR construct are only executed if the current value of the control variable has not exceeded the specified final value GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 9 4 92 The END_FOR keyword causes the system to do an I O scan at the end of each iteration of the FOR loop Alternatively you can use the END_ FOR_NOWAIT keyword to loop without an I O scan Format FOR Int_Variable Expression TO Expression BY Expression DO Statement list END_FOR Where Int_Variable An integer variable Expression A single value expression or complex expression of the same data type as Int_Variable Statement list Any list of Structured Text statements Examples e The following code fragment initializes an array of 100 elements by putting a value of 10 in all array elements Since this operation is not dependent on I O the END_FOR_NOWAIT keyword is used FOR index 1 TO 100 Array01 inde
121. P TO CORRESPONDING FUNCTION LOAD THE MULTIPLIER THIS EVALUATES TO Farenheit STORE THE RESULT IN Celsius OPERATION COMPLETE GOTO END OF FILE LOAD OPERAND THIS EVALUATES TO Celsius 1 8 32 STORE THE RESULT IN Fahrenheit CONVERSION COMPLETED LOAD TRUE INTO THE REGISTER THIS EVALUATES TO TRUE AND NOT FALSE STORE IN Enable 4 113 Call to Function Block Example 4 114 LD Enable ST tonl1 IN ST tonl1 EN LD t 30s ST ton1 PT CAL tonl LD tonl1 Q ST Enable_Out LOAD Enable INTO THE REGISTER STORE REGISTER VALUE IN tonl IN_ STORE REGISTER VALUE IN tonl EN LOAD t 30s INTO THE REGISTER STORE REGISTER VALUE IN tonl PT CALL tonl IT WILL RUN FOR 30s LOAD OUTPUT BOOLEAN INTO THE REGISTER STORE THE REGISTER VALUE IN Enable Out Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Section 6 Online Editing Online Editing Operation Online editing refers to making editing changes to a running program There are two online editing modes seamless and non seamless The online editing mode entered depends on the type of editing changes made as discussed in Rules Seamless online editing allows editing changes to be made to a program and have those changes seamlessly reflected in the running program that is without disturbing run time operation Assume a program is running and you
122. Printing a PLO STAN ek docs Gay eu Peeves a ae are Eee SEEE r TEn 2 23 Printing Program Cross References 0 00 0 ceseesecseeseeeeeeeeeseceseeeseensecnsecsaecaeeaeeens 2 24 VI Contents Chapter 3 viii Managing Application Programs eesceseceesseceeeeeeeseceeeeecaeceeceeceaeceeeeecenaeenees 2 24 Closing Application Programs 00 0 0 c cee cescesecsecseeeneseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaecsaecsaecsaesseeens 2 24 Viewing PLO STATIS 32 bsecces esd sesceedi o e a EE EEEE EE EEE EEEE EE EEE seen dense sbevvennene 2 25 Sizing a Program to Fit the WindoW esseseeseseseeeseseeesreerssesrenesreeresrerrsserrreresrent 2 25 Turning Comments On and Off eserci a T ae 2 25 Setting System Opto Ssnan aie ea Ea ie 2 26 TEC Style Locations oeinssecre a in ae eiii 2 29 UPS C nfis rati onien a E ee T EA 2 30 Section 3 Program Operation OvervieW ssesssesssecssooesooesssee 2 32 Activate Configuration ssssesseessessseressseessressetsseeeseeesseessresseessee 2 32 First Scan with Active Configuration sessesesesssesssseeesseessersseessee 2 32 Power down Seguente sirin E A a antes RSS 2 32 Normal Operation sssresejer etes aroo aaee nE S E ES S 2 33 FileName S er e r a A Peers tretert er Sereesery 2 34 Configuring IO ssriscsiressrsiessssssessssrsssesisiodssissvosossosissesasorissesssessas t Oo Section 1 Overview sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssossssssssssssssssssssssssssssss GUD Help With Hardware Conflicts 0 c
123. Program Editor File menu and choose Instruction List Document from the New dialog box that appears Entering Instructions GFK 1424B Manual Entry Instructions can be entered by typing in the operator or function call and associated operands or parameters Be sure to review the syntax operators and operator modifiers in Language Overview and refer to the function call syntax in the Language Reference Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 105 Accessory Bar The accessory bar shows commands in graphic form It is an alternative method of entering IL statements The accessory bar appears only when enabled by toggling Accessory Bar on the View menu The following figure shows the accessory bar functions The floating accessory bar can be undocked and positioned at the user s convenience w Comment gt Label Insert IL Statements Menu When the Instruction List editor is active the Program Editor Edit menu has an Insert IL Statements item that lists Instruction List statements operators Select the statement you need and it will automatically be entered at the cursor position Insert IL Functions Menu When the Instruction List editor is active the Program Editor Edit menu has an Insert IL Functions item that lists standard functions that can be used with in the Instruction List language Select the function you need and it will automatically be entered at the cursor position with the correct syntax Replace any param
124. R Clears a specified symbol or resets system ESTOP Clear Symbol Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B g Button Function Description OP INPUT At design time prompts for a symbol and prompt message At Operator Input run time displays an operator entry box with the specified operator prompt The value entered by the operator is stored in the specified symbol EXECUTE Run the specified exe file Running one of the product utilities Run Executable File requires the appropriate authorized access level The product utilities include the Continuous Logic Manager and the Program Editor Note A path can be provided If the path contains spaces the entire string must be enclosed in double quotes for example C my program folder program1 exe Continuous Button A continuous button executes a function when it is clicked Functions include setting or clearing a Boolean symbol displaying a screen selecting running stopping or Continuous aborting a program getting operator input and running an executable file Functions can be programmed to execute when the button is pressed and when the button is released An access level and a keyboard key or combination can be assigned to the button Button The Edit Continuous Button Control dialog box is shown in the following figure and described in the following table Edit Continuous Button Control x T Ctl joz Symbol Ma
125. RCE RET RETC RETCN RETAIN RETURN REWINDFILE RIGHT ROL ROR RS RTC R_TRIG RUNG S1 SCAN SD SEL SEMA SET_LOADSIZE SHL SHR SIN SINT SL SR SQRT ST STT STN STTN STEP STOPJOG STRING STRING_TO_ARRAY STRUCT SUB T TAN TASK THEN TIME TIME_OF_DAY TMR TO TOD TODAY TOF TON TP TRANS TRANSITION TRUE TRUNC TYPE UDINT UL ULINT UNTIL USINT VAR VAR_ACCESS VAR_EXTERNAL VAR_GLOBAL VAR_INPUT VAR_IN_OUT VAR_OUTPUT VEL WHILE WRITEFILE WITH WORD XOR XOR_BITS XORN XTON XTOF XTP LZLLZZ Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Exporting Symbols for CIMPLICITY HMI Symbols can be exported in Shared Name File snf format which is a GE Fanuc PLC specific form of CSV To export the symbol file go to the Tools menu in the Program Editor and choose Export Symbols for CIMPLICITY HMI The Export Configuration File dialog box will appear f Export Configuration File P aa pe Use the Browse buttons to select the configuration file cfg that you want to export from and the path for the snf file that you want to export to For details on the snf file format refer to the CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 Base System User s Manual GFK 1180 GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 25 Section 2 RLL Programming Overview of Relay Ladder Logic Diagrams Relay Ladder Logic RLL diagrams are commonly used on programmable controllers to construct continuous logic programs RL
126. RLL to begin Use this qualifier running until the moonsans Moron serea 8 acceleration profile is complete Acceleration Complete AC otion reaches the target speed At Speed AS Imotion begins the deceleration profile Deceleration Started DS morion istinite Motion Complete MC motion is finished and all axes associated with the In Position IP Imotion are within the In Position tolerance of the programmed endpoint ove command is finished End of Block EB GFK 1424B Appendix G Instruction Set Reference G 9 Structured Text Instruction Set Summary Statements Assignment Replaces the value of an object with the result of evaluating an expression Case Executes a set of statements based on the value of a variable Comment Used to incorporate useful annotations into your program code Exit Terminates an iterative process such as a FOR or WHILE statement For Function Call Bit String Used to execute a series of statements repeatedly with the number Executes one of the predefined algorithms that allow you to do math logic functions bit shift operations and so forth of repetitions based on the value of a control variable Description Statement Statement AND Returns the Boolean or bitwise logical AND of the input values NOT Returns the Boolean or bitwise inversion of the input value Exclusive OR XOR Returns the Boolean or bitwise logical Exclusive OR of the input values
127. S CMDSPD real Contains programmed spindle speed Set by last S command The group status for Motion Control commands is written to the group that contains the specified axis If no axis is specified the axis group status is written to axisGroup 1 which is the default axis group Axis Input Symbols axis JP Boolean Causes jog in plus direction See Using the JM and JP Axis Input Symbols on page E 15 axis JM Boolean Causes jog in minus direction See Using the JM and JP Axis Input Symbols on page E 15 Causes axis motion to stop until bit is reset axis JSPD Sets jog speed for axis axis JINCR Sets jog increment for axis axis JTYPE Sets jog type for axis 0 home 1 cont 2 incr axis SOVR Sets speed override for axis 100 0 100 axis TOOLOFF x An array of tool offsets for axis x 0 9 See Using the TOOLOFF Axis Input Symbols on page E 14 Not for MEI axis FIXOFF x An array of fixture offsets for axis x 0 5 See also Using the FIXOFF Axis Input Symbols on page E 14 Not for MEI axis RAPID G00 speed Appendix E Motion Control E 13 E 14 Using the FIXOFF Axis Input Symbols The preparatory commands G 55 to G 59 select fixture offsets G 54 cancels fixture offsets The axis FIXOFF axis input symbols contain the offset values used by these commands The relationship between the commands and the symbols containing their respective offsets is shown in the following exam
128. SFC Step2 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Structured Text Motion Functions These Structured Text Motion Functions are available AXSJOG MOVEAXS and STOPJOG AXS 0G The AXSJOG function starts a jog command on a specified axis Format AXSJOG lt axis gt JOGDIR lt direction gt JOGTYPE lt type gt JOGSPD lt speed gt JOGDIST lt distance gt Where lt axis gt is the axis name X Y Z etc lt direction gt is the jog direction JOGPLUS or JOGMINUS lt type gt is the type of jog JOGCONT for a continuous job JOGINCR for an incremental position jog or JOGHOME for a home position lt speed gt and lt distance gt are real numbers symbols or expressions that resolve to real number data types and specify the jog speed and distance Example AXSJOG X JOGDIR JOGMINUS JOGTYPE JOGCONT JOGSPD 10 0 MOVEAXS The MOVEAXS function starts a move command on a specified axis Format AXSJOG lt axis gt POSTIN lt position gt VEL lt velocity gt ACCEL lt acceleration gt Where lt axis gt is the axis name X Y Z etc lt position gt lt velocity gt and lt acceleration gt are real numbers symbols or expressions that resolve to real number data types and specify the move position velocity and acceleration Example MOVEAXS X POSTN positionA VEL velocityA ACCEL 10 0 GFK 1424B Appendi
129. SFC toolbar determines what type of transition is inserted when using the Transition Insertion Tool If the Transition Mode button is not depressed an RLL transition is inserted If the Transition Mode button is depressed a Boolean transition is inserted GFK 1424B Appendix H Glossary of Terms H 11 UINT Member of the ANY_INT group of data types UINT data types are valid in any instruction or function block that accepts an ANY ANY_INT or UINT data type A UINT is an unsigned integer data type that is composed of one or more of the digits 0 9 and cannot contain a decimal point A UINT is 16 bits in length and has a range of 0 to 65535 WORD Member of the ANY_BIT group of data types WORD data types are valid in any instruction or function block that accepts an ANY ANY_BIT or WORD data type A WORD is an unsigned integer data type that is composed of one or more of the digits 0 9 and cannot contain a decimal point A WORD is 16 bits in length and has a range of 0 to 65535 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B A Aborting RLL program 6 5 running SFC program 5 3 Access levels changing 2 8 6 3 descriptions Access Levels Action manager Activating configurations 2 32 3 4 6 13 Activation and Edit Modes 6 4 ActiveX controls 6 33 Editing 6 37 Editing events editing methods Editing properties 6 37 Inserting introduction limitations notes registeri
130. Standard Control from the Edit or context menu 2 An appropriate edit dialog box for the control appears For information on standard controls refer to Standard Controls Note For information on editing ActiveX controls refer to Editing ActiveX Controls in the ActiveX Controls section GFK 1424B Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 9 s Selecting Controls To select a single control e Position the mouse cursor over the control and click The control is highlighted To select multiple controls using a selection box A rectangular rubber band will be drawn to surround the controls to be selected 1 Position the selection arrow at one corner of the rectangle Click and drag to the opposite corner 2 Release the mouse button All controls entirely within the rectangular area are selected To select multiple controls using the keyboard and mouse e Hold the Ctrl or Shift key as you select individual controls To deselect a control from a selected group of controls e Hold the Ctrl or Shift key as you move the mouse cursor over the control and click Moving Controls To move controls using the mouse 1 Select the controls 2 Move the cursor over one of the selected controls Click and drag the selected control to the desired location A black border shows the new bounding area of the control group 3 Place the controls at the new location by releasing the mouse button To cancel the ope
131. TO 5 Start the PCIM Configuration Utility by clicking the Run PCIM Configuration Utility button In the PCU you will configure a number of fields Refer to the list of available addresses and IRQ you prepared Online Help is available to assist you through the configuration 6 Once you have configured the PCIM and exited the PCU click the Read PCIM Params From Registry button A window will appear containing a list of configured PCIMs 7 Choose the appropriate PCIM and click OK This causes the port parameters in Genius I O Driver dialog box to be updated with the configured values for the interrupt number IRQ the shared RAM address Memory Base address the VO port address I O Base address and the PCIM bus address Serial Bus address 8 Finally click the Test Port Configuration button The Board OK and Communications OK lights should then turn ON See the section Troubleshooting if you have any problems GFK 1424B Appendix A The Personal Computer Interface Module for Genius I O A I Connecting the PCIM to the Bus A 12 Devices can be placed in any physical sequence on the bus Each connector on the PCIM has four terminals for the bus cable Serial 1 Serial 2 Shield In and Shield Out Note that the sequence of these terminals on a PCIM connector is not the same as on other bus devices for example I O blocks Shield Out Shield In Serial 2 Seri
132. Tools Program Group The Resources tab will display most of the hardware resources that are in use on your system Be aware that some devices that are in use may not report this usage to the NT diagnostics and devices that are not currently in use will not be reported but WILL still cause conflicts The NT diagnostics are just a good place to start Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B For more information on avoiding conflicts refer to T O System Board Cat No Appendix Genius PCIM IC660ELB921 one port Appendix A IC660ELB922 two ports Series 90 30 PCIF1 1C693PIF301 Appendix B Series 90 30 PCIF2 1C693PIF400 Appendix C Data I O Port The data I O port is often used by the device driver to communicate with the card Some port addresses are standard across most PCs The following list identifies common port uses COMI 3F8 3FF COM2 2F8 2FF COM3 3E8 3EF COM4 2E8 2EF LPT1 378 37A Floppy 3F0 3F7 Video 3B0 3BB and 3C0 3DF Memory Address The memory address is used to set up a shared memory area for the interface card Normally memory from C8000 DFFFF will be available This area memory is normally used by special function cards such as an interface card For example if the card uses 4000 hex bytes of shared memory and starts at D0000 it will use D0000 D3 FFF Interrupt IRQ GFK 1424B The interrupt is used to communicate with the card Valid interrupt values a
133. Watchdog timers and the Safe State I O features available on some I O systems to detect loss of PC Control controller activity and to place the Outputs into a predetermined safe condition For more information contact GE Fanuc Automation 2 18 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B What Happens on Power Loss The PC and the I O system will go to the power loss state When power is reapplied the I O system will assume the state that it normally assumes or has been configured to assume when power and control is lost When nonvolatile or battery backed memory is available in the system a PC CONTROL application can restart the I O and application programs from the point of interruption Can PC Control Software be Automatically Started Windows NT can be configured to start the PC Control software and the application program automatically upon boot up For more information on this topic refer to Configuring Programs to Execute Automatically in Chapter 5 Can PC Control Software Work with an Uninterruptible Power Supply Windows NT can be configured to work with an Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS that can supply power to the system when the AC line is lost Windows NT is notified with an interrupt when the AC line is lost and can be made to take appropriate actions in response PC CONTROL can also use power failure and low battery signals received from the UPS to perform user programmed actions For more information
134. a The P code is the Action qualifier and means that the RLL is executed one time i e it is pulsed label_a Ai PaintColorAction You can associate zero or more Actions with a Step and you can associate one Action with more than one Step by referencing the Action s name The SFC transition coil used in an Action associated with a Step or a Macro Step provides the following program flow controls e Associated with a Step When the SFC transition coil receives power flow the Structured Text within the Step is canceled and program execution jumps to the SFC label specified in the SFC transition coil e Associated with a Macro Step When the SFC transition coil receives power flow the child SFC called by the macro step is canceled and program execution Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B in the parent SFC the SFC with the macro step jumps to the SFC label specified in the SFC transition coil Action Parameters To create an Action you must configure Action parameters in the Edit Action dialog box This table summarizes the parameters Program Label Optional The RLL code does not begin running until the code in the Step encounters the Label Action Qualifier Specifies an Action qualifier IMotion Qualifier Specifies a motion qualifier Select None for no qualifier For Imore information see Motion Qualifier ime Duration Action qualifier only Specifies the time duration for Limited land
135. abel controls groups of Text controls document screen functions or otherwise provide descriptions of the screen operation or functionality The Edit Text dialog box is shown in the following figure and described in the following table Edit Text x Text Text Background Color L Select Font Help mea Field Description Text Type the text string to be displayed in the Text box Background Color Defines the background color of the text element Select Font Defines the text color font and font size for the text string Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B ActiveX Controls Introduction ActiveX controls are DLLs that have an OLE2 interface using an OCX file extension by default instead of DLL ActiveX controls include simple controls such as buttons and edit boxes more sophisticated controls such as gauges and DLL components that have no user interface ActiveX controls require a container which is provided by the operator interface ActiveX controls have three types of functions e Properties these functions within the control can be called by the container to configure the control s appearance e g colors fonts captions bitmaps etc e Methods these functions within the control allow the container to send or receive information about the control For example a method can be used to get the value of a cell in a grid control or tell the control to
136. abens 4 112 General Operations Example 0 eeeeecesecesecssecssecseecaeeeseeeeeseeeseeeseesseenseenaes 4 113 Call to Function Block Example 0 ee ee eecesecesecssecneeceeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeseenseeeseenaes 4 114 Section 6 Online Editing ccsccsssscssssscssssscsssscssssccsssscceees 42 115 Online Editing O peratlony 325 ec25 ses yoais you saces aren caagca eaaeeesyaceseves acs ee 4 115 RUIES 3 ccna Gn daha eau hanna vais 4 116 Generally 0 28 a Ak A Ae AS ELS BS A ee A E 4 116 AS00010 8 een ee ee ee eee 4 116 D O N ATEA E EO EET E E E E E E 4 116 REL Protams os A N e a E A E E Bieteloecbacneees 4 117 SEC Progra Sie e a E ie A eae 4 117 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Chapter 5 Chapter 6 GFK 1424B Contents Pile Operations is0 s25 38 sissies Aleve E teh E ER E 4 117 Structured Text Prosrams 32 05 ne aen Ses eee ea omeeees seems 4 118 Instruction List Programs eee eeeeeceseceseceseceseceeecaeecaeeeseseaeeseeeeeeseenseenseenaes 4 118 Running Application Program cccsscccssssccssssscssssssssssssessees D L Runtime SUDSYStEMS 2 ssichsas dscaacselecdets na ndaaiie Wes odatasaphaneeaveee 5 2 Running an Individual Program 0 cece cescesecee cece eeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseensecsseeaeenaes 5 2 Running the Active Program cc scsss sssesoscessesscassceseghognvseceseensosaosonsscndssesesvasevasesess 5 2 Canceling a Running Program cece eescesecssecsseceeceeecne
137. ains the value to be transferred Transferring Values to the Control System Upon Request Transferring values from Excel to the control system upon request from the control system requires a DDE transaction routine coded in an Excel macro similar to the following GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 39 3 40 Dim TimeSet As Double Sub RunMeFirst TimeSet Now TimeValue 00 00 05 Application OnTime TimeSet Transfer End Sub Sub Transfer Dim x y Dim z As Variant tal li DDEInitiate ProgMgr _main _main N li DDERequest x Trans1 y Val z 1 If y 1 Then Set rangeToPoke Sheets Sheet1 Cells 2 3 DDEPoke x Datal rangeToPoke Set rangeToPoke Sheets Sheet1 Cells 3 3 DDEPoke x Data2 rangeToPoke Set rangeToPoke Sheets Sheet1 Cells 4 3 DDEPoke x Data3 rangeToPoke Set rangeToPoke Sheets Sheet1 Cells 1 3 DDEPoke x Transl rangeToPoke End If DDETerminate x RunMeFirst End Sub When executed this macro will check a global variable called Trans1 every 5 seconds If Trans1 is set to 1 it will then transfer the value of the cell in row 2 column 3 C2 to the global variable called Data1 likewise C3 to Data2 and C4 to Data3 It will then transfer C1 which was preset to 0 to Trans1 resetting the transfer request Make sure that you type one space between _main and _main as mentioned above Replace Sheet1 with the name of your worksheet that contains the v
138. al 1 These terminals accept two AWG 20 wires 0 54mm2 cross section plus one lead of a 0 25 Watt resistor optional used for bus termination The minimum recommended wire size is AWG 22 0 36mm2 cross section Connect the Serial 1 terminal of each connector to the Serial 1 terminals of the previous device and the next device Connect the Serial 2 terminal of each connector to the Serial 2 terminals of the previous device and the next device If the PCIM has two daughter boards they may be connected to different busses or to the same bus Shield In of each connector must be connected to Shield Out of the preceding device For the first device on the bus Shield In can be left unconnected For the last device on the bus Shield Out can be left unconnected oe Eng 46356 Terminating Seem mee Terminating Resistor Resistor eee Be a Serial 1 D Serial 1 Serial 2 2 Serial 2 Shield In 2 A Shield In Shield Out 2 Shield Out When making bus connections the maximum exposed length of bare wires should be two inches For added protection each shield drain wire should be insulated with spaghetti tubing to prevent the Shield In and Shield Out wires from touching each other Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Bus Termination A bus must be terminated at each end by impedance that is correct for that cable t
139. al configuration details consult PC Control online help GFK 1424B Appendix B Personal Computer Interface PCIF for Series 90 30 I O B 5 B 6 After setting the Port address click the Test Board button to verify the installation is corre The Runtime subsystem must not be active A Board Test dialog box containing the message PCIF Board found shared RAM access successfully found should appear If thi message does not appear you should try configuring a different block of shared RAM 3 Configure Series 90 30 I O From the PCIF Board dialog box you can continue the configuration process Auto Configuration If the I O racks and modules are in place and powered up and if the Runtime subsystem is not active you can use this feature When you click the Auto Configure button the software will activate the PCIF 30 card and read in information about attached racks and modules Manual Configuration To use this feature click the Define 90 30 Racks button The Rack Definition dialog box will appear For additional information refer to the online help for PC Control software Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Appendix C Overview GFK 1424B Personal Computer Interface PCIF2 for Series 90 30 I O The IC693PIF400 personal computer interface card allows PC Control software to communicate with up to seven Series 90 30 expansion or remote I O racks I O racks can be located up to 700 feet from the perso
140. al rung of the RLL window And click the left mouse button to drop in an ADD function block The ADD function block dialog box will appear In the Input1 edit box type Hopper In the Input2 edit box type 3 In the Output edit box type Hopper This will cause 3 to be added to Hopper each I O scan for as long as the action is active D 14 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Add Function Block ADD Ea oy Enable EN BOOL Enable Output ENO BOOL Rung Input Rung Output inputi IN1 ANY_NUM or ANY_BIT Output OUT ANY_NUM or ANY_BIT Hopper I Hopped I T p N2 ANY NUM or ANY BIT NOTE ANY_BIT excludes BOOL x Cancel Symbol Manager Help e Click the OK button to close the dialog box and accept the changes e Click the Close Window button to close the action block RLL program e Next name the Action Blocks on steps 4 and 5 Sugar and Chips respectively Place an ADD function block in Sugar action that adds 4 Hopper and an ADD function block in Chips adds 5 to Hopper Editing Step6 e Name the Action Block attached to Step6 Mixer e Select the Rung Tool from the RLL Tool Bar The cursor will change to the New Rung Cursor Place the cursor just below the existing rung and click the left mouse button to insert a new rung e Select the Contact Tool from the RLL Tool Bar The cursor will change to the Contact Cursor Place the cursor over the first rung and cli
141. alth Bit If a name is entered in this field a BOOL will be created This BOOL will be TRUE when the module is healthy and will become FALSE if the module is faulted GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 19 Section 4 Configuring Other Field Busses PC Control supports connections to widely used field bus types This section describes how to configure parameters for connection to DeviceNet and Profibus Configuring DeviceNet I O Capabilities The DeviceNet driver allows you to communicate with up to 63 nodes on a DeviceNet network The driver has an open configuration interface that supports all ODVA approved devices There are a wide variety of I O devices available to meet your control needs The DeviceNet driver uses the S S Technologies 5136 DN scanner board This card performs the scanning of the I O devices on the network DeviceNet supports up to 64 nodes With one MAC ID reserved for the 5136 DN board 63 nodes are available for application use The driver supports both the Polled TO and Bit Strobed I O connections Explicit messaging is not supported 125 250 and 500 Kbaud network speeds are supported The driver configures the 5136 DN scanner card to operate as a DeviceNet Master A DeviceNet Master owns the Slaves whose MAC ID s appear in its scan list Except for the duplicate MAC ID check a Slave cannot initiate any communication before being told by the Master to do so The 5136 DN is setup as an I O scanner serv
142. alues to be transferred The time interval may be changed from 5 seconds by changing the TimeValue in the RunMeFirst function Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Section 6 Import Export Configuration The import export features provide the following capabilities e For drivers that do not allow cut and paste capabilities you can export the configuration use a text editor to cut and paste the configuration and then import the configuration back into the control system e Offline editing of the configuration Instead of using the control system to edit configurations you can use a text editor or comma separated variable CSV compatible utility such as Microsoft Excel to edit the configuration Or you can write your own dialog based configuration software using VB VC etc to create CSV files You can then import the CSV into the control system e You can create your own application to automate the generation of customer specific configurations The following configuration information types are supported for CSV import and export Global symbols Yaskawa I O driver GE 90 30 driver PCIM driver The configuration is exported as a CSV file that can be read by a text editor or spreadsheet To export configuration to a CSV file 1 Open the configuration to be exported 2 Select Export Config to CSV from the File menu A file selection dialog box appears CS File to Export to 24 x Look in E C
143. am symbol changes the RS274 Block Display links to the new SFC program Only RS274 blocks located in the top level SFC program are displayed If RS274 blocks are located in a macro step SFC they are not displayed Performance Considerations To link the RS274 Block Display to the Program Editor the OLE subsystem must run the Program Editor application The time required to startup the Program Editor may cause an undesirable delay in the operator interface on some systems To eliminate this delay in the operator interface the following two recommendations are presented 1 Start the Program Editor minimized in the background with read only access if desired before the operator interface 2 Initialize all RS274 Block Display symbols with the desired SFC file paths Since all OLE links are connected when the operator interface is activated the link delay occurs at system startup Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Appendix Pointers in Structured Text F GFK 1424B Pointers should be used by experts only Misuse can result in unpredictable operation and great difficulty in debugging Structured Text has two pointer operators the pointer reference operator amp and the pointer dereference operator These operators are used in indirect addressing operations This appendix provides the following information e Addressing e Pointer Operators e Pointer Symbol Definition e Array Pointers F 1
144. ame with the name of the global variable that you wish to transfer The VariableName must use the same case and spelling as used in the control system application Array elements can be accessed by using the second format to address the appropriate element in any array but because of the square brackets the element name must be enclosed within single quotes This formula will establish a Hot DDE link to the control system that will update the value in the Excel spreadsheet whenever the variable in the control system is changed For a detailed example refer to Transferring Data to Excel in the online help For more information about entering formulas in an Excel spreadsheet refer to the Excel user documentation 3 38 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Transferring Data to the Control System Transferring a value from Excel to a control system global variable requires a DDE transaction routine coded in an Excel macro similar the following Sub transfer Dim x x Application DDEInitiate ProgMgr _main _main Set rangeToPoke Sheets Sheet1 Cells 7 11 Application DDEPoke x VariableName rangeToPoke Application DDETerminate x End Sub This routine when executed transfers the value of the cell in row 7 column 11 K7 to the global variable called VariableName Make sure that you type one space between _main and _main as mentioned above Replace Sheet1 with the name of your worksheet that cont
145. amo mmo on m elere e omm omama y ees aeae GFK 1424B Appendix B Personal Computer Interface PCIF for Series 90 30 1 0 B 3 Example Switch Setting This example shows how to set the board address to 310 PCIF 30 H Closed On F Open Off Low Middle High 1 2345 6 BR lol PRBB 1 Pl Configuring the PCIF 30 Card 1 Start PC Control Program Editor Software From the Start menu choose PC Control Applications Program Editor 2 Configure the PCIF 30 Card A From the PC Control Program Editor File menu click Open Config or New Config The following configuration window will appear SE Empty Slot BS Empty Slot a Empty Slor3 GF Empty Slot 4 HF Empty Slot 5 a Empty Slo 6 B 4 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B B In the tree display on the left side of the window select the slot that you want to configure The following window will appear Y Config cfg E system Ba L Empty Slot 2 SF Empty Slot3 SP Empty Slot 4 QF Empty Slot 5 SF Empty Slot C Inthe Board Type field select PCIF GE Fanuc Series 90 30 I O Interface Click the Define Board button The PCIF Board dialog box will appear PCIF GE Fanuc Series 90 30 Board Version 4 00 0032 D Set configuration parameters for the PCIF 30 card Make sure the Port Address is set correctly Port Address should match the DIP switch setting see page B 3 For addition
146. and blue values to a DWORD Used by the ActiveX control feature of the Operator Interface String to Byte Array STOBA Converts each character in the input string to its decimal value and stores the result in a byte array A zero is placed in the last byte of the array String to Date StringToDate Converts a STRING to a DATE and returns the result String to Integer ATOD Converts an ASCII numeric string to its integer equivalent Non numeric ASCII characters or numeric characters following a non numeric character are ignored Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Statement Statement String to Real ATOR Converts an ASCII numeric string including decimal point to its real equivalent Non numeric ASCII characters or numeric characters following a non numeric character are ignored String to TOD Converts a STRING to a TOD and returns the result StringToTOD Time of Day to String Converts a TOD to a STRING value and places the result in the TODToString symbol pointed to by pString Mathematical Description Absolute Value ABS Returns the absolute value of the input Addition ADD Returns the result of summing the inputs Division DIV Returns the result of dividing the first input value by the second input value Exponent EXPT Returns the result of raising a value to the power specified by a second value M
147. and click The new Jump and two Transitions appear in the program at the location you specified os er 4 To edit the Jump click on the Select Tool gt and then double click on the arrow head of the Jump GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 71 R The Edit Jump Target dialog box appears Edit Jump Target X Target label v Cancel Help 5 Enter the label to which the Jump transfers program flow Then click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box 6 Edit the two Transitions Adding a Label 1 Click on the Label Tool on the SFC menu bar The cursor changes into the Label Tool cursor 2 Move the cursor to the location in the program where you want to place the new label and click The new label appears in the program at the location you specified PaintColorAction 4 72 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B 3 Click on the Select Tool gt to edit and then double click on the label The Edit Label dialog box appears Edit Label x Label name Cancel Help 4 Enter a meaningful label and click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box Adding a Loop 5 A loop allows the SFC program execution to go back to a preceding location in the program in order to repeat a series of Steps 1 Click on the Loop Tool on the SFC menu bar The cursor changes into the Loop Tool cursor 2 Move the cursor to the location in the program wher
148. ands G40 cancels compensation Appendix E Motion Control E 17 Configuring Motion Options The control system software contains these features that help you configure motion options e Using the Suspend on Spindle Commands Feature on page E 18 e Using the Suspend on Tool Changes Feature on page E 19 e Using the Define M Flag Symbols Feature on page E 10 e Using the Wait on All M Codes Feature on page E 10 e Using the Do Not Process M Codes Feature on page E 10 Using the Suspend on Spindle Commands Feature If you want an RS 274D program to suspend motion execution whenever spindle S M3 M4 or M5 commands are executed select the Suspend on Spindle Commands option box This option lets the application program suspend RS 274D execution until your application logic indicates that the spindle command has completed The remainder of the program can then be executed When a spindle command is executed the motion program is suspended and the S WAIT flag is activated until the application program sets the S CONT flag which causes the motion program to resume and the S WAIT and S CONT flags to be reset by the controller The application programmer is responsible for supplying logic that sets the S CONT flag after the S WAIT flag is activated and the spindle command has been completed S WAIT Spindle AtSpeed lot Example E 18 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Using the Suspend on T
149. appears Program Editor BREEN1 Config File View Project Execute Tools Window License Help ojs alz 21 a 1Y Config System F PC Slot Name Slott PCIM GE Fanuc Genius 0 Interface PF Emply Slot 3 s Empty Slot 4 pd meen Close amp Savel Cancel Activate Config Help Clear Al Fauis mpty Slot Se Empty Slot 6 gt Help press F1 3 Click on an Empty Slot icon under the System icon 4 Inthe Board Type field choose PCIM from the drop down list then click the Define Board button The PCIM Genius I O Driver dialog box appears Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B PCIM GE Fanuc Genius 170 Driver Version 3 01 0016 m Board Location Rack Read PCIM Params From Registy Slot lott Slot No oxo m PCIM Board Definition Name Board OK bit Model No NULL 7 Cfg Mismatch I Disable outputs when no programs are running Description Optional m Portt m Port2 Simulate Port fin Sinrulete Port Network Number bo H Network Number bo y Interrupt Number TS Interrupt Number bo y Shared RAM Addes 4H Shared RAM Addes 4H 120 Port Address ooo H 170 Port Address ooo H PCIM Bus Addes o 4 PCIM Bus Addes o 4 Test Port Wontiquration Cancel dii Test Port Gontiguraton Auta Wontaure NEOR Devices Auta Wontigure Wetwork Devices Setup mona Wate Setup lotal Wate Deine BEA
150. ard Interrupt level NONE Status SIMULATED Define Modules onos He You can give the board a meaningful name at this point or leave the default as displayed 3 30 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B 15 To define the actual mapping of the network I O data to PC Control variables select the Define Modules button The PROFIBUS Module Configuration dialog box will be displayed PROFIBUS Module Configuration x Module name Number fi Description Next Previous 1 0 type No Data in Module t Digital Fee Byte e nput Input Input Delete Digital Analog Byte Output Output Output F anaoa bite siap Module words fo Mem byte offset fo Define Potts Define Board Cancel Help You must create a module configuration for each piece of I O received or sent to from the Master First define a name and description for each piece of data Then define the type of data the length and the offset into the Master cards memory This is the offset that you recorded earlier Below are sample screens for a Field Control BIU with one 16 point input and one 16 point output module Note The Field Control BIU status control and discrete modules with 16 points are defined to be Byte Input or Byte Output with Module words equal to 1 GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 31 PROFIBUS Module Configuration Ea Module name Field Control BIU Number 1 BIU Statu
151. ayPtr 3 0 Varlnt1 ArrayPtr 3 1 Varlnt2 ArrayPtr 3 2 Varlnt3 Appendix F Pointers in Structured Text IntArray1 0 Varint1 IntArray1 1 Varlnt2 IntArray1 2 VarInt3 IntArray2 0 Varlnt1 IntArray2 1 Varlnt2 IntArray2 2 Varlnt3 IntArray3 0 Varint1 IntArray3 1 Varlnt2 IntArray3 2 Varlnt3 Appendix Instruction Set Reference G This appendix summarizes the RLL SFC Structured Text and Instruction List instruction sets For detailed explanations of the instructions refer to Online Help RLL Instruction Set Summary Contacts and Coils Type Toolbar Description Button Normally Open J L The contact passes power flow if the point that it Contact represents is TRUE Normally Closed 4 2 The contact passes power flow if the point that it Contact represents is FALSE Positive Transition The contact passes power flow if the point that it Sensing Contact represents transitions from FALSE to TRUE immediately prior to the evaluation of the contact Negative Transition The contact passes power flow if the point that it Sensing Contact represents transitions from TRUE to FALSE immediately prior to the evaluation of the contact Output Coil The coil sets the point that it represents to TRUE when the coil has power flow Negated Output Coils The coil sets the point that it represents to TRUE when the coil does not have power flow Set
152. back of overlapping controls To move a control front or back 1 Select the control 2 Do one of the following e To move the selected controls in front of any overlapping controls choose Move to Front from the Layout menu e To move the selected controls behind all other controls choose Move to Back from the Layout menu 6 12 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Ls Section 4 Symbol Operations The Symbol Manager can be used directly inside the Operator Interface Editor However the Symbol Manager cannot be open inside the Operator Interface Editor and the Program Editor at the same time When the Symbol Manager is opened from the Operator Interface Editor it operates only on global symbols It is available from the tool bar Operator Interface menu and control dialog boxes that allow you to select symbols Note Only global symbols can be used within operator interface controls Editing Symbols To edit global symbols e Select Symbol Manager from the Tools menu Refer to Symbol Manager in the Programming Guide for information on using the Symbol Manager Activating Configurations To make the symbol edits available within the Program Editor you must activate the configuration To activate the configuration do one of the following e Click Apply in the Symbol Manager e Select Activate Config from the Tools menu To save the configuration e Select Save Config from the Tools menu GFK 1424B
153. canning e If outputs are configured enabled sets default state and starts scanning First Scan with Active Configuration The following occurs on the first scan e Local and function block variables are initialized e RT_FIRST_SCAN set high for first scan of first running program e Logic is solved e I O is updated and the sequence repeats Power down Sequence The following occurs on the last scan e The program does not receive any advance notification of an impending shutdown and cannot take any specific action e Interface modules set disable state of I O according to individual design 2 32 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Normal Operation The following occurs during normal operation e All actions associated within a step are solved once each scan a step is active depends on the action qualifier e Actions are solved before the structured text within a step is solved e Ifa transition associated with a step becomes TRUE the I O is updated again after which all the appropriate actions not pulsed inactive delayed or limited inactive are solved by turning off all output coils except latched coils Function blocks are not solved The I O is updated and then the next active steps are solved the following scan e If structured text is used within a step then the transition is not evaluated until all structured text statements have been completed e All structured text statements withi
154. ceesndecevanvcosane R F 5 Instruction Set Reference ccccccccscssssssscscscscssscssscscssscsssssssssces G L RLL Instruction Set Summary 2 5cccscccseneacesscccesssccsenaecesctasessaccosens G 1 SFG Instruction Set Summary siesta iesteees taut ands oes G 7 Structured Text Instruction Set Summary ceeeeceeeeseeeesteeeeees G 10 Instruction List Instruction Set Summary eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeenteeees G 17 Glossary of Terms ssessseessecccosecooscosossooossocecosecoosessessseosssecssssessses El L Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Chapter Introduction 1 Welcome to PC Control GE Fanuc s new software package that provides an integrated programming configuration operator graphical user interface GUI and run time package that runs under the Windows NT 4 0 environment PC Control software provides support for connecting to Genius Field Control DeviceNet PROFIBUS and Series 90 30 I O With PC Control software you can e Create an application project e Configure your I O hardware e Create and edit symbols e Create and edit an application program e Run the program under Windows NT This chapter provides the following information e Requirements and procedures for installing PC Control software on your computer e Guidelines for running PC Control software under Windows 95 e How to use the product s Online Help Windows NT and Windows 95 are registere
155. cified in the block Feed Per Minute Mode Feed per min only Using M Codes M codes are user defined operations supported in RS 274D and SFC Valid M codes are MO to M99 M codes execute in RS 274D and signal supporting logic in SFC or RLL programs to execute For each M code corresponding control system symbols Mflag0O to Mflag98 exists Even numbered M codes turn off the M flags while odd numbered codes turn on the corresponding flag For example M10 Mflag10 set false M96 Mflag96 set false M97 Mflag97 set true Notes Special purpose M codes must be on a line by themselves This includes M00 M01 M03 M04 M05 M58 and M59 M codes on a line with motion execute before the motion E 8 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Predefined M Codes The control system software predefines several M codes for internal operations these cannot be used to turn on or off M flags 3 M30 os Wait and Continue M Code The control system software has the ability to wait on RS 274D M Codes Once the M code processing is done the control system software lets the application program wait for your logic to inform the system that the operation has completed and for execution to resume with the next sequential RS 274D block To enable this feature you must check the Wait on All M Codes box in the Motion Options Configuration Page These control system symbols apply to the Wait and Continue M
156. cifies the intervals at which control programs update the I O and execute program logic Lower priority Windows tasks are interrupted by the I O scan Each TO scan active control programs begin execution and run until completion Before program logic is solved the I O Scanner reads inputs After the control logic is executed outputs are written The executing time of control logic is variable since the numbers and type of instructions active in any I O scan interval is variable Once the outputs are updated the control task is suspended and other lower priority NT tasks resume execution When defining a scan rate consider e Minimum input pulse width the minimum time an input must maintain a state to be recognized by the software e Minimum throughput the minimum time for the control system to produce a change in state of an output in response to a change in state of an input e Maximum throughput The maximum time for the control system to produce a change in state of an output in response to a change in state of an input GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 5 Using the Define Board Dialog Box 3 6 Each type of I O board has a slightly different dialog box for configuring I O points For more specific information about configuring I O points see the help file for the driver you are using 1 From the configuration dialog box click Define Board Serial Port Driver Version 3 0 0034 ComPon0 comi g i 256 w Emm
157. ck the left mouse button to insect a contact e The Edit Contact dialog box will open From the Symbol List box select light1 For the Contact Type select Normally Closed Contact Click the OK button to close the dialog box and accept the changes Appendix D Application Examples D 15 Edit Contact light5 BOOL light6 BOOL Shift BOOL switch1 BOOL switch2 BOOL switch3 BOOL switch4 BOOL e Select the Coil Tool from the RLL Tool Bar The cursor will change to the Coil Cursor Place the cursor over the first rung to the right of the contact and click the left mouse button to insect a coil e The Edit Coil dialog box will open From the Symbol List box select light1 For the Coil Type select Output Coil Click the OK button to close the dialog box and accept the changes D 16 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Edit Coil buzzer BOOL FirstScan BOOL light BOOL e Add a second light1 Normally Closed Contact to the second rung and an Output Coil for light2 e When finished your RLL program should look like this light1 light1 light1 light2 GFK 1424B Appendix D Application Examples D 17 Step7 e Name the Action Block attached to Step7 Cook e Add rungs contacts coil and function blocks to match the following figure F Step Cook x FirstScan FirstScan 1 light1 Shift 2 s light6 Shift e The MOVE function block on rung 1 moves a 1 into the
158. codes Cleared C by Set S by Variable Name Type Use Read R amp Write AxisGroup MWAIT BOOL Waiting for M S C code processing Group C Value of M code M code R W C processing complete resume execution Appendix E Motion Control E 9 E 10 Using the Define M Flag Symbols Feature If you want to the control system software to generate 46 global symbols of type BOOL select the Define M Flag Symbols option box The symbols are generated when this option is selected and the configuration is saved and activated These symbols appear in the Symbol Manager and their symbol names are be Mflag6 through Mflag96 counting by even numbers Using the Wait on All M Codes Feature If you want you application program to suspend execution of RS 274D until your M code logic indicates that the action is complete select the Wait on All M codes option box The remainder of the program can then be executed When an M code is executed the motion program is suspended and the axis_group MWAIT flag is activated until the application program sets the axis_group MCONT flag which causes the motion program to resume and the axis_group MWAIT and axis_group MCONT flags to be reset by the controller The application programmer is responsible for supplying logic that sets the axis_group MCONT flag after the axis_group MWAIT flag is activated The axis_group MCODE is an integer value the contains the value of the M code
159. conditions Display Increment Specifies the scale numbering increment Bar Style The bar style specifies the orientation of the bar control and the direction toward which the moving bar fills Bar Colors There are four bar colors Normal the color of the bar when it is tracking the symbol value but before reaching a limit Limit 1 the color of the bar once it reaches its specified Limit 1 Limit 2 the color of the bar once it reaches its specified Limit 2 Unfilled the background color of the moving bar Select Font Clicking this button displays a Font dialog box to specify the font style size and color for the control text name units and scale numbering Symbol Manager Clicking this button opens the Symbol Manager Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 17 Bitmap 6 18 A bitmap is a visual element that can be used to describe the control application screen or add visual interest to a screen A bitmap will never obscure the appearance of any control or text The Edit Bitmap dialog box is shown in the following figure and described in the following table Edit Bitmap x Bitmap File D Project01 Graphies Bitmap03 bmp Browse mea ee Field Description Bitmap File Type in a path and bitmap file name or click Browse to locate one Only Windows bitmap files BMP can be used Using PC Control Software August
160. contained within the branch 4 32 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Adding a J ump Coil 1 Click on the Jump Tool on the RLL toolbar The cursor changes into the Jump cursor 2 Move the cursor to the location on the rung where you want to place the new jump vki viv1_on CW Nag SMP 3 Click the left mouse button The Edit Jump Coil dialog box appears Edit Jump Coil x Target label Begin Hirl Cancel Hep 4 Enter a target label and click on OK A target label name cannot contain any spaces The editor inserts the jump at the specified location vWwi jump1 viv1_on Hw Adding a SFC Transition Coil The SFC transition coil is an RLL program element that you can use only under specific conditions within an SFC action in an SFC program Note To add an SFC transition coil to the program you must be editing an action in an SFC program GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 33 4 34 To add an SFC Transition Coil 1 Click on the SFC Transition Coil tool on the RLL toolbar The cursor changes into the SFC Transition Coil cursor 2 Move the cursor to the location on the rung where you want to place the SFC Transition Coil 3 Click the left mouse button The Edit SFC Transition Coil dialog box appears Edit SFC Transition Coil SFC target label Painter sfc Cancel Help 4 Type the name o
161. cseeeaeseeeeeeeneenerens E 4 Using Predefined Motion Control Symbols 0 0 0 cece eecesecesecesecnsecneeceeeseeeneeees E 11 Configuring Motion Options eee eeceescesecesecesecsseceecaeecaeeeaeseeeseeeeeeesereeseees E 18 Using Program Flow Control in Motion Applications 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees E 19 Using the G56 Macro Calls with Motion cece cece ceecseecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeees E 22 Monitoring and Running Motion Application Programs cceseeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeees E 24 Embedding Structured Text into Motion Control Code ou cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeees E 27 Structured Text Motion Functions 000 00 cece eeeeceeeeceeseeesceecesecaecsaeceecseeeeeeaeeees E 29 Operator Interface Motion Controls ccesscecessceeeeeeeeesseeeesteeeenee E 31 JOG Pane wcis cc scent EE S ER sk sa dasd cout sesh jagse E E 31 Single AXIS Panele ne raa e a pevyencesaceet e e o Rs E 32 Multi Axis Status Panel sccscesecssseseeneecneecnevenevensesncessesssenseesseesaeessessevenesens E 33 RS274 Block Display cece ne en E AE E E ER E NS E 34 Pointers in Structured Text ccccccssssssscscscsssssssssssssssssssssssesesee F L Addressind snenie e e a e ar aaah F 2 Pinter Operators e e a Seas oss ee N S EAS F 2 Pointer Symbol Definition iscsccssscseigecessscseadencsed cacpassiea ents secataonsbaceoaness F 3 Pointer Notesis veh eee ede eke SA eae ae eee nae eee F 3 AITAY POUMETS 5001seecaedseaccasesestncodanncdevasesuaueadvera
162. cte Eas 6 13 Activating CONT DURAN ONS a eet cardi Segue tenatot alae aneaantecscanaa sens 6 13 Section 5 Creating Operator Interface Application 6 14 Standard Control s cccccccccccccccessssessecececcceesesesseaseceeeeceseeessnseaeeeeees 6 14 TnthOCU CHO Sst E EE AE EE A E E ed eesad E E es 6 14 Babee e a eaae a eea a a ea 6 16 Bitmap e ea nena eo bes bbe EEEE E Sh ona aul E E AR SS 6 18 BOX EEE EESE EE E ASES EEEE ES E AE ASEE EEEE E EE AASS EE EEEE EEE 6 19 Click BUttOns ermee E A T E r R 6 20 CONntNUOUS B UI IOT e r n a a 6 23 GUE ssa E E E E E E E 6 25 Ena nOA rO AREE EE EE SEEE S EE EE E E TE SEES 6 27 Numeric DISplay eeror erinra areen eses enrete eba eSEE OER Er cs REE es b SCESE E Taas 6 29 Selected Program Status Pan l sspieer peteeres eeoa ennei oiee SRE SESH ori i 6 30 DTG sens Ae E SAA N EA A AAP E E O connanaseesneaseeonse 6 30 0 gt en EA AE E EEE S E EEAS eS EEEO EEES 6 32 ACTIVEX Contool Snerre isd es HEH ede Nal 6 33 Tntrod uctioneks n cases aboes tepees n tecees vee dan a svase deca wolves sence ed eeeeey 6 33 ActiveX Limitations cccccccccccccsessscecececeesenseaececececseaueceecceceesssaeeeeececsessaseeeeeeees 6 33 ActiveX and Standard Controls c cccccccesssssscccececsessaececcceceessssscecececeenenseaeeeeeees 6 34 ActiveX Control SOULCES seiere aee E EE SEEE E E EE 6 34 Registering ActiveX Controls s sesssseesseeesssereessrsresrrsrerrsstsrrnsestenresrerrssesrrsrerreet 6 35
163. ction block 7 To enter a constant an integer real number characters of a string etc type the value directly into the field To enter a symbol either type the symbol name into the field or click on the display tool for a list of valid symbols from which to select Click on the display tool mie on for list of valid variables Enter constant or variable name here 8 When you have finished filling out the dialog box click on OK The editor inserts the block at the specified location 4 36 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Moving and Editing Program Elements Selecting Program Elements To select elements with the keyboard Use the arrow keys to select the next element in the desired direction A beep will sound if the selection cannot be made To select elements with the mouse 1 Select the Selector tool from the RLL Tool Bar or the SFC Tool Bar 2 Move the cursor to the desired element and press the left mouse button The element will highlight in the select highlight colors Special Notes about Single Element Selection To select a select diverge or simultaneous diverge in a SFC program select the top or bottom bar of the diverge To select a rung in a SFC program select the left or right power rail of the rung To select multiple elements at one time 1 Select the Selector tool from the RLL Tool Bar or the SFC Tool Bar 2 Move the cursor to the t
164. ctured Text program the program is solved to the end and loops back at the start of the next I O scan A transition is not tested until the Structured Text has been solved to completion You can use the Structured Text constructs END_FOR_NOWAIT and END_WHILE_NOWAIT to finish looping in one I O scan Even though the SFC editor lets you place one step immediately after another each step still takes a minimum of two I O scans to complete because parsing the program creates dummy transitions between the steps These transitions are always evaluated true These transitions are required to be there per the IEC 1131 3 standard The SFC editor helps reduce your programming effort by automatically including these transitions in the parsed program In the following example one step follows another Program flow still moves from top to bottom and execution of a program element does not begin until the preceding element has completed After the first transition becomes true Step2 becomes active After the Step2 logic is complete Step3 becomes active Scan 1 Scan 2 Scan 3 Active gt Step1 Step1 Step1 T 1 T True T 1 T 1 gt gt Step2 Active gt Step2 Step2 Step3 Step3 Active gt Step3 When Step1 completes and T1 When Step2 Code in Step1 becomes true completes code executes code in Step in Step3 begins to begins
165. d see Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual GEK 90486 1 Unplug bus communications cable from PCIM refer to the Device number sheets from which you configured the system and use the HHM to read configuration compare device numbers and I O reference numbers If all appears to be in order replace PCIM System shuts down with parity errors Duplicate or overlapping PCIM I O References Input duplicated on same bus Input references from other PCIMs overlap Bus Errors cannot get PCIM up and running Serial 1 Serial 2 crossed Intermittent or total lack of communications Mixed Baud Rates Power up blocks one at a time and confirm baud rate Any change to baud rate in block will not take effect until block power is cycled No Global Data Destination device off line Verify destination on line Unsuccessful Datagram completion Destination device off line Verify destination on line Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Appendix B Personal Computer Interface PCIF for Series 90 30 I O The Personal Computer Interface for Series 90 30 I O IC693PIF301 provides I O access to up to four Series 90 30 expansion and or remote racks The half slot card is designed for IBM PC AT compatible computers The PCIF 30 supports all discrete and analog I O modules in addition to some specialty modules The connection from the board to the racks uses the same cable as used in a standard Series 90 30 expansi
166. d contact or coil type for an RLL program To print program cross references e Select Print Xref from the File menu Managing Application Programs Program management allows you to create and save Relay Ladder Logic RLL and Sequential Function Chart SFC programs You can open many programs at the same time The active program is displayed on the Program Editor title bar To access other open programs in Program Editor 1 Click Window on the menu bar 2 Click the program you want to view Note You can also use the mouse to click on a partially visible program and bring that to the front Commands that are executed from the menus or by pushing buttons on the tool bars are performed on the active program Closing Application Programs 2 24 To close a program Click File on the menu bar and select Close or Click the Close button at the upper right corner of the window Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Viewing Programs When a program is opened the contents of the program are displayed in a window You can open many windows of the same RLL SFC IL or ST program To access other open programs in Program Editor e Select the program from the list under the Window menu e Use the mouse to click on a partially visible program and bring it to the front Sizing a Program to Fit the Window Click View on the menu bar and select Scale to Fit Window or Toggle the view by clicking the Scale t
167. d trademarks of Microsoft Corporation DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc GFK 1424B 1 1 Section 1 Setting Up PC Control This section provides the recommended system requirements for running PC Control on your computer and tells how to install the program Before You Begin Running Under Windows NT Your system must meet the following minimum requirements to successfully install and run PC Control for Windows NT Windows NT 4 0 requires Service Pack 3 Recommended CPU Pentium 100MHz RAM 32 MB 64 MB preferred Hard Drive 100 MB free CD ROM Drive Yes Monitor VGA minimum SVGA recommended Keyboard and Yes Pointing Device UPS System Recommended Appropriate I O interfaces are required Additional resources may be required to support other applications which will run concurrently You should also check the Important Product Information document shipped with your release for any last minute changes to these requirements 1 2 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Running Under Windows 95 Windows 95 is not a protected mode operating system We do not recommend controlling any process with PC Control software running under Windows 95 The Windows 95 operating system should be used for program development only PC Control supports offline development and demo operation under Windows 95 with I O in simulation mode Your system must meet the following minimum requirements to ru
168. da spbusen iuscevadved eye E E E cases eveedvey 2 7 Access HO VEIS sci scecccaviseg tes leven wengunncere cower ica unseen ton cave EAE o buat pv vageeas SEE RS ENa 2 7 Keyboard Shortcuts for the Operator Interface 0 0 0 eee cesses eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseenseenaes 2 9 Menu Descriptions imene ubastesces teal atiden tons Seesela pasties bers Uadetiayecnions Gesbu eee wae 2 10 Toolbars and Status Bar cissecsscesscsedcuseuscocs ves socvonncesshsuscngceadhcusebtenicecbstvsuecuanbceeske 2 16 Answers to COMMON QUESTIONS ccecsecessesceceessececeeseececseeeceesaeeecseseeeessnseeeseaaes 2 18 Section 2 Working with Projects and Applications 2 20 Wands ing Projecisi22ii lel eel ae eee ese ee 2 20 Creating a New Project svii nocni aneio oiei ase a EA o nR E a es 2 20 Opening a Project nsien aes ei te E R R ee ed 2 20 Copying a Project 2cec edness iekdaudtiins kiaiiSiekdadesivieesieteieetee 2 21 Renaming a Projects vale sedisvesdevgeessstcececasdteehsovsdeve cn sdeguneesigederaddvedesvadeenes ahs 2 21 Activating a Configuration cee eeeesceseceecssecseecseeeeeseeeeseeeseeeseensecsaeesaessaesaeeees 2 21 Working With Application Programs eesceceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeees 2 22 Creating a New Program ec eceecceecesecesecsseceeecseecaeeeaeseeeeeeeeeenseensecaecsaeeaeeaeeeas 2 22 Opening Propram seere aie Heb te i lees fio een eed 2 22 SAVING a ii eE E EE sevasbeobacessgnasebabes sana gestessssesetesseashessbes ses 2 23
169. ddress set using the PCIM Configuration Utility A block of four I O ports for each GENI daughter board This block must begin on a 4 byte boundary 0 4 8 C hex in the range 100 to 3E4 hex A block of 4000 hex shared memory for each GENI daughter board This block must begin on a 16 kilobyte boundary 0000 4000 8000 C000 hex An unused IRQ 3 4 5 6 9 10 or 11 to be shared by all GENI daughter boards in your system Suggested Addresses to Avoid Conflicts The PCIM Configuration Utility PCU automatically fills in suggested values for the Controller Port I O Port and Memory Base addresses and the IRQ value These values are taken from the suggested values below Be sure to check your Computer s System Configuration to verify their are no conflicts Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B EEPROM Address same value as Controller Port Address Address of a 1 byte I O port set using the PCIM DIP switches EEPROM address and configured in the PCU Controller Port address This I O port is used by the PCU to write PCIM configuration data to the EEPROM on the PCIM and to allow applications to access the data when needed This I O port address is independent from the I O ports required by the daughter boards see I O Base address However we suggest setting it within an unused portion of the I O port space you will reserve for the first GENI daughter board on the PCIM that is 2 higher than the I O Base address
170. de Vibration Shock Environmental Requirements Non operating Temperature Humidity Altitude Vibration Shock A 14 Using PC Control Software August 1998 IC660ELB921 IC660ELB922 GENI OK COMMS OK Communications OK 5 volts DC 10 400 ma maximum 1 LS TTL load per input line 10 LS TTL loads per output line Single slot AT style board External connector with HHM and bus terminals Board edge terminals or external connector Board edge terminals accept two AWG 20 0 55mm2 cross section wires or three AWG 22 0 36mm2 cross section wires fully ISA compatible 4 bytes 16 Kilobytes 0 to 60 degrees C ambient temperature at board 5 to 95 non condensing 10 000 feet 0 2 inch displacement 5 to 10 Hz 1 G 10 to 200 Hz 5 G 10 ms duration per MIL STD 810C method 516 2 40 to 125 degrees C ambient temperature at board 5 to 95 non condensing 40 000 feet 0 2 inch displacement 5 to 10 Hz 1 G 10 to 200 Hz 5 G 10 ms duration per MIL STD 810C method 516 2 GFK 1424B PCIM Electrical Characteristics GFK 1424B Power Supply Requirements The PCIM requires a 5 volt DC source for logic power Supply voltage should not vary more than 10 above or below nominal below 4 5 V DC or above 5 5 V DC or the PCIM will not function correctly The PCIM with one daughter board single channel PCIM typically draws 1 0 Amps The PCIM with two daughter boards dual channel PCIM typically draws 1
171. dit an RLL program 1 Select the program from the Project RLL Programs list or the Running RLL Program list 2 Click on Edit The Program Editor is activated with the selected RLL program at the forefront If the RLL program is running the Program Editor will highlight the running RLL program GFK 1424B Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 5 _ Section Working with Operator Interface Screens Operator Interface Operations An operator interface file contains one or more screens A project can contain more than one operator interface file The start screen of the last opened operator interface To start a new operator interface file e Select New File menu or use the tool bar button OPI and the default screen name Operator Interface To open an operator interface file e Select Open File menu or use the tool bar button Saving an operator interface file saves all the screens in the file To save the file Select from the File When you save a file for the first time the Save As name the file To save the file with a new name or to a new folder Choose from the File new folder and or name for the file 6 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Screen Operations Creating a New Operator Interface Screen To create a new operator interface screen 1 Select New Screen from the Edit menu The Enter New Screen Name dialog box appears 2 Type in the name for the new screen and click OK
172. dule Configuration x Module name Field Control BIU Number B Description BIU Control Word Addr 2 Next Previous 120 type Byte Outputs Insert Digital Analog Byte Input Input Input Delete Digital Analog Output Output Output Af ialog bile 3 7 Module words f Mem byte offset fo Define Ports Define Board Save amp Exit Cancel Help GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 33 Port Configuration for Control Word PROFIBUS Analog Byte Port Configuration x Analog Byte Outputs Module name Field Control BIU Next Port Module position 2 Word fo Previous Port Port name FCBIU contro Define Module Save amp Exit Cancel Help Module Configuration for 16 point Input PROFIBUS Module Configuration x Module name Field Control BIU Number 3 Description Slot1 16pt Input Next Previous Byte Input 120 type ane nputs Insert Digital Analog Byte Input Input Input Delete Digital Analog Byte Output Output Output AEE anac ble Sap Module words Mem byte offset 4 Define Ports Define Board Cancel Help Il 3 34 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Port Configuration for 16 point Input PROFIBUS Analog Byte Port Configuration xX 4Analog Byte Inputs Module name Field Control BIU Nest Port Module position 3 Word a Previous Port Port name Define Module
173. e Inc P O Box 322 Madison Alabama 35758 gms globalmajic com www globalmajic com Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Registering ActiveX Controls Ls An ActiveX control must be registered before it can be used in an operator interface screen If the ActiveX control has not been previously registered it can be registered in the Operator Interface Screen Editor Registered controls appear in the list displayed when Insert ActiveX Control is selected from the Edit menu To register an ActiveX control 1 Choose Register ActiveX Control from the Edit menu The OCX Files to Register dialog box appears 2 Select the control to register then click Open to register it If successful a message appears indicating that the registration was successful Note This process does not guarantee that the control can be properly inserted into a screen For example if the control is not licensed or is not implemented properly you will not be able to add it toa screen OCX Files to Register a system32 l gl JE Look in File name GFK 1424B Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications os2 ja Activedd ocx a dzstat32 0 config ras a Cometl32 ocx a imgadmin dhcp Ez Repl a Comdlg32 ocx a imgedit oc drivers 3 spool a Dbarid32 ocx a imgscan oi inetsry C viewers a duzocx32 ocx a ingthumb wins 32 00 intrinse oc d20cx32 0cx Fil
174. e active A Board Test dialog box containing the message PCIF2 Board found shared RAM access successfully found should appear If this message does not appear you should try configuring a different block of shared RAM 6 Configure Series 90 30 I O From the PCIF2 Board dialog box you can continue the configuration process Auto Configuration If the I O racks and modules are in place and powered up and if the Runtime subsystem is not active you can use this feature When you click the Auto Configure button the software will activate the PIF400 card and read in information about attached racks and modules Manual Configuration To use this feature click the Define 90 30 Racks button The Rack Definition dialog box will appear For additional information refer to the online help for PC Control software Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Appendix Application Examples D This appendix steps you through an example application that shows how to create a project configure I O create an application program using RLL SFC and Structured Text create an Operator Interface screen and run and monitor the application An additional tutorial that leads you through the creation of an SFC application can be accessed through the Program Editor Help menu Exercise 1 Create a New Project e From the Program Editor click the Project menu and then select New e Type Cookie into the New project box Your scre
175. e and error conditions 4 104 Click button 6 20 Closing a program 2 24 Conin Comments Instruction List 4 107 RLL SFC Structured Text 4 88 turning on and off Index 2 Using PC Control Software August 1998 Common questions 2 18 Comparison functions RLL G 3 Configuration 3 5 editing e R new 3 4 Configuration Utility Configuration Utilit description Configurations activating Configuring Motion Control E 2 Configuring a Macro Step Configuring a step 4 63 a es Series 90 30 I O Conflicts hardware 3 2 Connectors PCIF2 PCIF 30 PCIM Contacts and Coils RLLG I Context sensitive help 1 8 Continuous button ea Logic Manager 6 5 Control loops 4 54 Controller Port Address A 5 Controlling RLL programs from Operator Interface 6 5 Controls Button functions 6 22 Click button Continuous button 6 23 Cutting copying and pasting 6 11 deleting 6 12 Deselect a control 6 10 GFK 1424B Numeric display Program Status Panel Conversion functions IL G 18 RLL G 4 Copying a screen 6 7 Copying a symbol 4 16 Counters and Timers RLL G 4 Creating array of symbols 4 12 new Operator Interface screen 6 7 Relay Ladder Logic programs 4 28 SFC program symbols user defined data type 4 17 Creating Structured Text application oean T Creating a new configuration 3 4 CSV file exporting 3 41 Cuttin
176. e format T nD nH nM nS nMS where n is the number of Days Hours Minutes Seconds or Milliseconds If you create an expression of TIME data types all values must be of the same type and the result must be a time Generic type ANY Size Range Default value T OS Format GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 9 TOD TIME_OF DAY This data type is used to represent the time of day only in the format HH MM SS If you create an expression of TOD data types all values must be of the same type and the result must be a TOD Generic type Size Range Default value Format UINT Unsigned Integer ANY ANY_DATE 4 bytes 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 TOD 00 00 00 HH MM SS hours minutes seconds A UINT is an unsigned integer data type that is composed of one or more of the digits 0 9 and cannot contain a decimal point Generic type Size Range Default value WORD ANY ANY_NUM ANY_INT 2 bytes 0 to 65535 0 A WORD is a bit string of length 16 Generic type Size Range Format Default value 4 10 Using PC Control Software August 1998 ANY ANY_BIT 2 bytes Not applicable MSB LSB 15 0 ca M fale UN aed eM iy 0 GFK 1424B Generic Data Types The following table shows the data type and generic type hierarchy The generic types are those prefixed by ANY_ and are used in the function or function block descriptions where applicable instead of detailing a lo
177. e then select Single Step The program enters the Run mode for one scan then enters the Break mode Any I O controlled by the program is updated during the program scan Clearing Fault Mode and Error Conditions To clear the emergency Estop and any I O faults select Reset Estop from the Execute menu 4 104 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Section 5 Overview Instruction List Programming The Instruction List IL programming language is an IEC 1131 3 textual programming language Its format is similar to an assembly language You use the Instruction List editor to create stand alone Instruction List programs The Instruction List editor is accessed from the Program Editor and features typical text editing functions such as cut copy and paste find and replace It also has tools and commands to automatically insert Instruction List statements and functions This section provides information on using the Instruction List editor writing Instruction List programs It is assumed that you are familiar with general Program Editor operation and have some familiarity with the Instruction List language Note Instruction List programs are continuously running programs once each scan Opening an Instruction List Document To open an existing document select Open Editor from the Program Editor File menu and locate the document using the Open dialog box that appears To open a new document select New Editor from the
178. e you want to place the lower end of the loop and click The loop appears in the program at the location you specified 3 Click on the Select Tool R and then place the cursor over the loop arrow GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 73 4 Press and hold the left mouse button and move the loop arrow to the point where the upper end of the loop is to be located Choose the points in Place cursor on loop Move the loop arrow to the SFC where the arrow Then press the location of the upper loop connections are and hold the left end of the loop to be located mouse button 5 Edit the loop Transitions 4 74 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Moving a Loop Dragging the top of a loop 1 Select the selector tool from the RLL Tool Bar or the SFC Tool Bar 2 Move the cursor over the loop top arrow Press and hold the left mouse button Drag the loop arrow to the desired location the cursor will change to a loop arrow cursor 3 Release the left mouse button to drop the loop arrow at the desired location To cancel the drag operation press the lt ESCAPE gt key If the target location for the loop arrow is On the same diverge branch and is not below the loop The dragged loop arrow is located at transition to which this loop arrow is tied the drop position and the loop transition remains in its current Not inside of any embedded loop a position Not outside of any nested loops
179. eX controls Relay Ladder Logic extensions how it is solved when function blocks used Relay Ladder Logic instructions 2 22 GFK 1424B Output Coils Positive Transition Sensing Contact 5 5 Relay Ladder Logic pro adding a branch adding a coil adding a contact 4 29 adding a jump coil 4 33 adding an SFC transition coil 4 33 adding function blocks 4 34 creating 4 28 inserting a new rung 4 31 Relay Ladder Logic Transition Manager 4 51 Renaming a screen 6 8 REPEAT REPLACE 2 11 Reserved system symbols Resource conflicts aes C 7 Resources you must reserve PCIM A aca Restart running RLL programs with 6 5 ams RLL Toolbar 2 17 RS274 Block Display E 34 RS 274 D Enhancements RUN Relay PCIF2 C 5 RUN ml Debug 2 13 4 103 5 3 Rung new Rung comments adding editing 4 40 Running active file with debug 5 3 ws with restart 5 5 one step of the active file 5 3 RLL programs from Continuous Logic Manager 6 5 GFK 1424B Index Index Running motion applications Running the Active Program 5 2 Running the software 3 5 Runtime overview 2 6 shutdown 2 5 start Saving files 2 23 Operator Interface file 6 6 with new name Scale to Fit Window 2 16 SCAN Scan rate Scope of symbols Screen operations Search and Replace Selected divergences Selecting controls elements multiple elem
180. ears on the Rung specified Adding and Editing symbol descriptions Open an RLL or SFC program Click on Symbol Manager Tool The Symbol Manager dialog box for local global symbols appears Add or change information as desired Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Section 3 SFC Programming Overview of Sequential Function Charts About Steps GFK 1424B A sequential function chart represents an application program as a series of sequential steps You associate control logic with these steps called actions The logic in the action executes when the step becomes active step Steps are connected by links and control is passed between steps via transitions Transitions can be a Boolean expression or a single RLL rung Step2 You can manage multiple control paths using divergences A select divergence lets you choose one path to be active from two or more control paths whereas a simultaneous divergence lets you activate multiple control paths simultaneously in parallel Other program flow capabilities exist You can include control End loops that let you repeat a series of steps or transfer control flow to another location using a Jump and Label structure You can create SFCs with multiple paths and it is possible for more than one SFC to be active at a time A step represents a condition in which the behavior of the system follows a set of tules defined by the actions and functions associated with t
181. ect dialog box will be displayed 2 22 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Saving a File To save the active program to its current name and directory Click File and select Save or the Save Program button on the editor tool bar When you save a program for the first time the Program Editor displays the Save As dialog box so you can name your program If you want to change the name or directory of the active program before you save it use the Save As file command To save the file with a new name Click File and select Save As The Program Editor displays the Save As dialog box so you can change the name of the program Printing a Program To print an SFC RLL ST or IL program Click File and select Print or the Print Program button on the editor tool bar To change the printer setup click File and select Print Setup menu command or from the print dialog box push the Setup button When printing a SFC program the SFC diagram will be printed first Actions embedded in the SFC are printed alphabetically following the SFC diagram and any embedded Relay Ladder Logic Transitions will be printed alphabetically following the embedded Actions GFK 1424B Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 23 Printing Program Cross References This lists symbol usage for a program It lists all symbols in a configuration the number of times they are used in the program and their location in the program For example the rung number an
182. ecuted If no Int value matches IntExpression the StatementList following ELSE is executed otherwise no StatementLists are executed The ELSE part of the CASE construct is optional Example This code fragment assigns a value to a string variable CASE ColorSelection OF 0 ColorString Red I ColorString Yellow 2 3 4 ColorString Green Ds 69 ColorString Blue ELSE ColorString Violet END_CASE Comments Comments let you incorporate useful annotations into your program code to document program operation The compiler ignores anything between a pair A comment can be placed after a line of code or on a separate line Format free form text Example Result SQRT x Uses the square root function 4 88 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Exit Statement The EXIT statement is used to terminate and exit from a loop FOR WHILE REPEAT before it would otherwise terminate Program execution resumes with the statement following the loop terminator END_FOR END_WHILE END_REPEAT Format ConditionForExiting EXIT Where ConditionForExiting An expression that determines whether to terminate early Example The following code fragment shows the operation of the EXIT statement When the variable number exceeds 500 the FOR loop is exited and execution continues with the statement immediately following END_FOR number 1
183. ed I O port addresses for each GENI daughter board The first port in the block is the O Base address for a channel configured in the PCIM Configuration Utility 5 Find a block of 4000 hexadecimal unused unlisted memory for each GENI daughter board The starting address of this block is the Memory Base address for a channel configured in the PCIM Configuration Utility 6 Find a free unlisted IRQ for the Interrupt configured in the PCIM Configuration Utility GFK 1424B Appendix A The Personal Computer Interface Module for Genius I O A 7 A 8 Setting the DIP Switches on the PCIM The I O port set using the DIP switches is used by the PCU to write PCIM configuration data to the EEPROM on the PCIM and to allow applications to access the data when needed Switch positions are numbered 1 through 8 Use switches 1 and 2 to set the high hex digit switches 3 4 5 and 6 to set the middle hex digit and switches 7 and 8 to set the low hex digit 8 1 r Daughter Board 1 Daughter Board 2 Dip Switches IC660ELB922 only j PEM 12345678 i Off open Lever switches 4 On closed a TOP Edge of PCIM Board High Middle Low 12 3456 78 yvi o vers jolyyi2 val bod a 16 y 2 vvay 2 ay A oo 3 vv4 3 Sle vod 4 voy 15 epa E A L g Sov 9 v4 la EAT B Ad c Ad D AA E AA P
184. ed or in macro steps called by the program The program must be open for you to define local symbols to be used within in it You cannot access a local symbol within the Operator Interface for DDE operations Local symbol definitions are stored in the application program file Global symbol A global symbol can be referenced by all programs within a project You can use global symbols within the Operator Interface and for DDE operations Global symbol definitions are stored in the active configuration file T O Points TO points are external locations Because you can reference them in a program just like symbols I O points appear in the Symbol Manager and are listed as global symbols TO points function like global symbols you can reference them from any program and you can use them within the Operator Interface and for DDE operations I O symbols can only be edited from the Configuration Utility you cannot edit an I O point from within the Symbol Manager 4 2 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Function Blocks Most function blocks need to be instantiated To be used in Structured Text or Instruction List programs an instance of the function block type must be explicitly declared in the Symbol Manager System Objects PID PRGBC and TMR These need to be instantiated To be used in Structured Text an instance of the system object type must be explicitly declared in the Symbol Manager Identifiers Identifi
185. ee Calling the Macro for Execution Designing the Macro You can place the macro anywhere within your program The G65 macro calling function can appear before or after the macro The structure of the macro has the following syntax O lt x gt lt RS 274 commands gt M99 Where lt x gt is an integer identifier for the macro to be called lt RS 274 commands gt is the macro code consisting of normal RS 274D commands M99 is an M code block that declares the end of the macro The RS 274D commands between the O lt x gt identifier and the M99 code block are only executed when called from the G65 command In other words program execution skips over the code between the O word block and the M99 block unless a G65 block has explicitly called it Here is an example of an SFC program in the control system software that demonstrates G65 functionality H0010123 HO02G4F2 HO03G4F2 HO04M99 HO05G4F2 HOO6G65P123L5 HOO7G4F2 E 22 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Calling the Macro for Execution You call a macro within a G65 block Use the following command syntax to call the macro for execution G65P lt label gt L lt loop gt Where lt label gt is the integer identifier for the macro This integer identifier must match the identifier in the O word lt loop gt is an integer that indicates the number of times to execute the macro The lt label gt parameter must match t
186. ee page C 6 for details GFK 1424B Appendix C Personal Computer Interface PCIF2 for Series 90 30 I O C 7 C 8 amp Program Editor SAMPLES New clq Ble View Project Exacte Tonk Window License bhl 3 Install the PIF400 Card in Your PC Note The PC and the Series 90 I O racks should be connected to a common ground connection Normally this common ground connection is provided by connecting the PC and the I O racks to the same power source with the same ground reference point but this will need to be verified for each installation Install the IC693PIF400 in an available PC AT ISA expansion slot inside the PC by following the instructions provided by the computer manufacturer To ensure maximum system noise immunity make sure the PIF400 card s metal I O bracket makes good electrical contact with the PC chassis using the screw removed when the blank plate was removed and the computer s power supply is solidly grounded Connect the Series 90 30 expansion and or remote racks to the card s 25 pin D Expansion connector J1 For details see page C 4 Connect the RUN relay connector J2 to control external equipment making sure not to exceed the specified contact ratings on the relay For details see page C 5 Start PC Control Program Editor Software From the Start menu choose PC Control Applications Program Editor Configure the PIF400 Card A From the PC Control Program Editor File menu click Open Config or New C
187. eeceeseecsscecseccecssececseeceeseeeeesees 3 2 Data I O POrt E EE ETE sbeedepessgevieasteh seaettes 3 3 Memory Addres Sessies eesriie 3 3 Interr pt IRQ eaeoe ee es eo EE E dba cde E E OEA E EE ERES 3 3 Working with Configuration Files seeeseeeeeeeseseereeseeereeresersrerereseese 3 4 Elements of a Configuration eesssesesseessereessstseeesrsreeresrerrsseresserrentesrerreserrresesrreresre 3 4 Creating a New Configuration ssssssssssessssesseessssseseseseesenresesesterenesensesenrenensnnnsenenee 3 4 Editing an Existing Configuration File cece cece cseecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseenseenaes 3 4 Activating a Configuration File cece ee cescesecssecseecseecseeeeeeeeeeseessseeseensecsseeaeenaes 3 4 Navigating Within the Configuration Utility ee eeeeeereee 3 5 About the System Configuration Dialog BOX cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseceseeeseenseenaes 3 5 T O Scan RAE 552555 05s cet sss Mieke ects cob Ae iw EE Sih Mie AS 3 5 Using the Define Board Dialog BOX 00 ccc cee ceeeceeescseeseesecesesecaeeseseeeessseseseseens 3 6 Section 2 Configuring GENIUS I O eesssessocsssesssecesocesoossosesse O27 The PC Interface Module PCIM c cccccccccsesessssecececeesesessrseneees 3 7 Global Data Setup Dialog BOX ieee eecesecesecesecnseceecaeecaeeeaeseaeseeeeseeeeeeseens 3 11 Global Data Device is sic cic ccscbssecsst sakes sstaveciettavass ior EESE Tara VESES EEr PbS USERE IESE StS 3 11 Global Data Device Word ereer aaran a a e
188. eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseenseesaeenaeenaes 5 3 Configuring Programs to Execute Automatically 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeees 5 4 Starting Programs with a Batch file 0 0 eee eee cesesscseeescssecesesecseessesesesesseseeeneegs 5 4 Starting Programs with the Run With Restart Command eee eee eeeeeeeees 5 5 Monitoring Power Plow inieaie ate Regd i tenn 5 5 Active REL Programs ss cos eainnt nee ase ae eee 5 5 Active SEC Program S i sa neen nee aetna ested eda tenia 5 5 Viewing the Status of Application Programs seeeeeeeeeseeeeeeee 5 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications sscccscscesseeeee O 1 Section 1 Overview of the Operator Interface Editor 6 2 Starting the Operator Interface j ici s ccsasasasssdivesdcecasacssaeadesededeassecessaness 6 2 Access TIt VIS sc cndirsscerivdadap aes niniaeiniscors turer a A A 6 2 Entering an AcCess Code sneinen oein nee e re E E AEE r s 6 3 Changing Access Levels armie EE NIE EREE AE A S REES III NASE 6 3 Activation and Edit Modes s sssssseseseesssesssseseseesesessesesesrenesessesesesee 6 4 Switching Operator Interface Modes 000 eee eeseceeeeeeeeeeeeenseenseenees 6 4 Controlling RLL Programs from an Operator Interface 4 6 5 Section 2 Working with Operator Interface Screens 6 6 Operator Interface Operations 2 2 deci A Alaina caeilaiats 6 6 Starting a New Operator Interface File cee ccs scsesecssesscneeesessesesssessuesecneeaes
189. eeseeeeseeeereeseens 4 81 Section 4 Structured Text Programming ccccscssssscesseee 4 82 OVELVIEW sain stoslgnsats tats ccassovendetivecqastysiasceaatee aa E A E aS 4 82 Opening a Structured Text Document ee eee cee ceeecseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseens 4 82 Editing Structured Text in an SFC Step ooo eee eeeeeeeeeceeeeeecesecesecsseeeesneeees 4 82 Entering Statements ossi iiiei ccd stceesceaswacn ese E eE eS EEE EEEE EE ESE EES eS 4 83 Editing Structured Texten e ao A AE E EE AE R ENS 4 83 Langage OVeErview icisiicieads casiaacrtlacceeasa nsi Es 4 84 EX Pression i 4 3 508 tees jepclih e aS Se ee gS A a ASi 4 84 Operators ccitinadicaschnud sik ibuddisis nimi T 4 84 Pointer Operators mer sovacesves a aer eae E aP pave Se RETETE E 4 85 Structured Text Syntaks r e aoi ar aaee EE E TA EEE E AAEE evened 4 85 Assignment St tement sssrini aue peere ee ae r rE a nee i Enee eaeoe rotons 4 86 Contents xi Contents BREAK Statement morieris oeeo essorer errean esperara ict abso dagessgssevst es sgbaseed csvssesetescctebesebeests 4 87 CASE Statement fe cc pees r a R a su eecep Ar E e EEEE ERE 4 87 COMMENIS e eere Erer ESETET EERE EEE EEEE E EEEE AER E EA EE EE aS 4 88 Exit Stateme t e cote Ni es ee eee E N 4 89 TE Statement o scsiciiigoa sieht eg ae shies ae yaa leet 4 90 JALO ELOD DEEE costes bi sarc Sassen tab SL aaa vc ea hat Seabee eon tated 4 91 FOR Statement iseenese iee eiie eoa enoar E e Ml esas Ree wee 4 91 Function Calka
190. eleting the Symbol Name in the Device Edit Dialog disables the creation of this variable GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 21 Configuring Profibus 1 0 PC Control communicates with a Profibus fieldbus network using a Hilscher CIF30 CIF104 CIF30_FMS or CIF30_PB card Configuration of the ProfiBus driver is a two step process First it needs to be configured in the SyconDP Configuration software which is Synergetic Microsystem s creation Second all the configuration information needs to be completed in PC Control in a similar fashion The process to configure a ProfiBus network in the SyconDP software is described in greater detail below Before beginning make sure that the GSD files that will be used have been installed in the appropriate directory Program Files Hilscher GmbH SyCon Fieldbus Profibus GSD The files needed are gef_0534 gsd Hil_7506 gsd Hil_7501 gsd Hil_7507 gsd Hil_7502 gsd Hms_1002 gsd Hil_7503 gsd UN_COMBL gsd Hil_7504 gsd UN_DP gsd Hil_7505 gsd VMXM0534 gsd 1 Start the SyCon SYstem CONfigurator software and create a new file The New dialog box will appear Device et Cancel New 3 22 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B 2 Highlight the PROFIBUS selection and press OK The main network screen will appear Syfnn pi hws 18 3 Select the leftmost toolbar button to Insert Master or choose Insert then Master from the pull down menu Position the cursor over t
191. en and allow you to give a name to the configuration Type in pedio in the File name field and click OK After the new configuration is activated the System Configuration dialog box will be displayed again Click Close and Save to finish creating the configuration Exercise 3 Creating an SFC GFK 1424B If the Program Editor is not already running open the PC Control Applications program group and click on the Program Editor icon to start the utility On the editor tool bar located at the top of the screen press the new file button to create a new program file Select SFC M from the dialog box and press the OK button to create a new Sequential Function Chart A window will open which contains the new SFC program Appendix D Application Examples D 5 Creating the Program Structure e Select the loop tool from the SFC Tool Bar e Move the cursor over the control path between the Start step and the End step Press the left mouse button to drop a control loop element into the SFC program e Select the simultaneous diverge tool from the SFC Tool Bar e Move the cursor to the center of the loop and press the left mouse button to drop a simultaneous diverge element into the SFC program e Select the simultaneous diverge tool again and add a third branch to the divergence by clicking the top double horizontal line D 6 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B 2 Guidelines for Using Simultaneous Divergences
192. en should look like the box below Click the OK button to create the new project New project Cookie Existing project list Cancel Help GFK 1424B D 1 e Exercise 2 Create a New System Configuration System Dialog D 2 Using PC Control Software August 1998 From the Program Editor select the File menu and then click on NEW CONFIG A new system configuration dialog box is opened like the one below 1Y pedio cfg Bele System System Configuration Name L gt PCDIO a COMPORT System Description optional PF Empty Slot 3 fp S Empty Slot 4 10 Scan Rate a0 milliseconds Motion Options QS Empty Slot 5 Close amp Save Cancel Activate Confia Help Reset I O SP Empty Slot 6 For this example you should will use the default System Configuration Name Config1 and an I O Scan Rate of 250ms Note The I O scan rate is the frequency at which PC CONTROL reads and updates I O and solves logic The PC CONTROL scan rate is asynchronous to the scan rate of the I O hardware GFK 1424B 2 Slot Dialog The next step in configuring I O is to define the local I O boards I O scanner boards and or motion cards you will be using with your system The slot dialog contains information about the type of communications card that is in a particular slot On a PC the actual slot numbers are not significant but by numbering them maintenance technicians can be directed to the appropriate ca
193. en the loop is immediately exited otherwise if the BooleanExpression is TRUE the StatementList is executed and the loop repeated The statement list may never execute since the Boolean expression is evaluated at the beginning of the loop The END_WHILE statement causes the system to do an I O scan at the end of every cycle of the WHILE loop Alternatively you can use the END_WHILE_NOWAIT statement to loop back without an I O scan Note It is possible to create an infinite loop that since the control system runs at the highest priority does not return control to the operating system especially when using the END_WHILE_NOWAIT keyword Avoid infinite loops by insuring that the BooleanExpression provides a determinate exit condition Example The following code fragment asserts an output I O point as long as the input I O point EndLimit remains FALSE A WHILE loop is used since there is no reason to process the statement list if EndLimit is TRUE The END_WHILE loop keyword is used since the I O points should be scanned WHILE NOT EndLimit DO MoveForward TRUE END_WHILE oveForward FALSE Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Structured Text Operators GFK 1424B The table below lists the operators that you can use within an expression The order of precedence determines the sequence in which they are executed within the expression The operator with the highest precedence is applied fir
194. ename and delete those actions About Transitions A Transition represents the condition that lets program flow to pass from one or more Steps preceding the Transition to one or more Steps following the Transition along the corresponding directed link Each transition has an associated transition condition that is the result of the evaluation of a single Boolean expression When the system evaluates the code of a Transition the result must be either TRUE or FALSE A transition condition can be a e Boolean Transition Boolean expression in the Structured Text language It is represented as an unlabeled horizontal line e RLL Transition named RLL object containing a single rung with an output coil that has the same name as the transition object It is represented as a labeled line RLL Transitions containing the name of the RLL output coil The step that follows a transition cannot execute until the transition before it evaluates as true In this figure program flow has passed the Boolean Transition and Step2 which follows it and is currently at the RLL Transition Until the RLL Transition evaluates to TRUE Step3 cannot execute Boolean Program flow into and out of the Transition Transition is through a vertical line extending through the horizontal line 4 50 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B The IEC 1131 3 standard specifies that a SFC diagram must have a transition between every step and a step b
195. ents 4 37 screen to edit 6 8 start screen Selection functions st G 15 Sequential Function Charts creating o described how Bic overview Series 90 30 TO configuring 3 16 SFC extensions Motion Control SFC Functions Action Macro Step SFC menus 4 62 SFC program 5 3 Application Icon Step 2 14 Boolean Transition 2 16 RLL Transition 2 14 Index 9 Index SFC program flow controls adding a Jump SFC 4 71 adding a Label SFC 4 72 adding a loop 4 73 adding a Select Divergence 76 adding a Simultaneous Divergence moving a loop PRGCB SFC Toolbar 2 12 2 17 4 62 SFC transitions how evaluated 4 57 Sharing data 3 38 Shift Rotate functions sT G 14 Shutting down Runtime Signal conditioning A 15 Simultaneous divergences guidelines for using 4 79 Single Axis Motion Status Single Axis Panel E 25 Single axis status panel E 32 Single stepping a program 4 104 Sizing Controls 6 11 Sizing program to fit window 2 25 Slide 6 30 SNF file exporting 4 25 Software overview 2 2 Software subsystem Configuration Utility 3 5 I O Scanner 13 21 3 5 Operator Interface Program Editor Program Execution Specifications PCIM Spindle Output Symbols Standard controls 6 14 Standard Toolbar 2 16 Starting Operator Interface Program Editor 5 2 15 3 Index 10 Using PC Control Software August 1998 Run
196. er 4 Creating Application Programs 4 77 To Add Another Path 1 Highlight the top of the Simultaneous Divergence before adding another 2 Locate the cursor at the top of the Simultaneous Divergence and click Another divergence path appears Highlight top of Click on Simultaneous Click and another divergence Divergence Tool Then simultaneous place cursor at top of divergence path divergence appears 4 78 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B To Delete a Path 1 Highlight the path you want to delete 2 Click the Cut tool EJ To Delete an entire Simultaneous Divergence 1 Highlight either the top or the bottom of the divergence 2 Click on the Cut Tool Guidelines for Using Simultaneous Divergence Observe the following guidelines when you create a Simultaneous Divergence To ensure that proper convergence do not use Labels in the following ways e To jump outside a Simultaneous Divergence e To jump into a Simultaneous Divergence e To jump to another path within a Simultaneous Divergence GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 79 Integrating Structured Text into an SFC The Structured Text programming language is an IEC 1131 3 compliant set of text based instructions that is designed for the easy creation of mathematical and logical operations When you create the application code for an SFC step you can choose to use Structured Text code as illustrated below When the SFC
197. er Pulse Edge Detect Falling Edge Trigger FTRG Turns on an output when triggered by a falling edge trigger Rising Edge Trigger RTRG Turns on an output when triggered by a rising edge trigger Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Extended Timers Extended Timer Off XTOF Provides off delay timing of events Delay Extended Timer On XTON Provides on delay timing of events Delay Extended Timer Pulse XTP Activated by a pulse provides off delay timing of events File Open File FOPEN Opens an existing file Read File FREAD Reads data from a file Rewind File FRWN Rewinds a file to the beginning D Write to File FWRIT Writes data to a file Math Exponent EXPT Raises the first number to the power specified by the second number Modulo MOD Divides one number by another and stores the remainder Move MOVE Copies data from one location to another Multiply MUL Multiplies two numbers Negate NEG Negates inverts the inputs Square Root SQRT Computes the square root of a number Subtraction SUB Subtracts one number from another Appendix G Instruction Set Reference G 5 Miscellaneous Abort All Programs ABTAL Aborts all programs in the runtime subsystems Display Message MSGB Displays a message in a Windows message box Message Window MSGW Displays a message in the Program Editor Output Window Change MMI Screen Change Displays a specified HMI
198. ers are used for symbol names Identifiers have the following characteristics e Consist of upper and lower case letters A Z and a z numerals 0 9 and the underscore _ character e Must begin with a letter or single underscore character e Case is considered e For uniqueness of an identifier every character position is considered e Cannot contain multiple sequential underscore characters e Cannot contain spaces e A maximum of 100 characters are allowed e Cannot be a system reserved keyword Refer to Keywords for a list of keywords e Must be unique within its scope Examples of valid identifiers are _Sym1 Sym_Two_A SYM SYM and sym are considered unique identifiers Sym A A and AA are considered unique identifiers AA Examples of invalid identifiers are 1A begins with a numeral Sym__Two multiple sequential underscores Sym Two contains a space Sym amp One contains an invalid character END a reserved identifier GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 3 Literals Literals are used to define or represent data values For example literals can be used as inputs to functions or function blocks to assign values to variables and constants and within program statements There are four types of literals numeric character string time duration and time of day and date Numeric Literals Numeric literals are either integer or real Integer literals can be decimal base 2 ba
199. es are 0 7 for bytes 0 15 for words and 0 31 for double words 4 16 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B 7 Enter the optional description into the Description field 8 Click on the OK button The indexed bit appears in the Symbol List field Editing User Defined Data Types You can custom define a data type A user defined data type consists of a group of data type members integers real numbers strings etc that operate as a group Data type members do not have to be of the same data type For example you can define a data type called Report It consists of three members called Year Task and ItemNumbers Year and ItemNumbers are integers and Task is a string You can then use a symbol of the Report data type in any program and the data it contains consists of three members that represent a year a task name and a number User defined data types can be global or local A local data type can be used only by the program that is open active when you define the data type To edit user defined data types 1 Open the Symbol Manager 2 Click on Local User Types or Global User Types The respective User Types dialog box appears It lists defined user types either local or global and provides buttons to add edit and delete user types Local User Types x User types in aessoo a2 Delete Type Edit Type OK Cancel Help GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs
200. es of type ocx Files 0cx x Cancel 6 35 s Inserting ActiveX Controls To insert an ActiveX control 1 Choose Insert ActiveX control from the Edit menu The Insert ActiveX Control dialog box appears 2 Select an ActiveX control and click OK to continue Insert ActiveX Control x YI COMponents AnalogMeter Control YI COMponents Annunciator Control YI COMponents Bar Meter Control YI COMponents Digital Meter Control YI COMponents Knob Control YI COMponents Led Control YI COMponents Scope Control YI COMponents Slide Switch Control YI COMponents Slider Control YI COMponents SpinBar Control YI COMponents Strip Chart Control YI COMponents ThreeDFrame Control YI COMponents Toggle Control YI COMponents XY Chart Control VECO Mnonents e Plan Control W Cancel Help Alternatively a list of the last four recently inserted ActiveX controls appears at the bottom of the Edit menu from which the control to be inserted can be selected An example of the VI components XY Plot control is shown in the following figure jen end TTT i 7 1 1 1 1 4 4 m 6 36 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Note The list contains all ActiveX controls registered on the PC Some may not make sense to use in a control environment If you distribute an operator interface screen configuration using an ActiveX control the ActiveX control must be registered on the target sy
201. eters with ones you have defined in the Symbol Manager Refer to Language Overview for more information on using functions and function blocks in the Instruction List language Editing Instructions The Instruction List editor supports the common editor functions such as cut copy and paste and find and replace These commands are found on the Edit and context menu 4 106 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Language Overview Instruction List Syntax An Instruction List program consists of a list of instructions Each instruction starts on anew line and can contain a label operator operator modifiers operands and comment fields as shown below Label Operator Operand Comment Example LD Sym01 Load Sym01 value into accumulator ADD Sym02 Add Sym02 to it The sum is now the current result Comments can only be at the end of the line Blank lines are allowed between the instruction lines The current result is maintained in an accumulator Instructions work in the following manner current_result current_result OPERATOR operand where the current_result is always to the left of the operator GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 107 Operators The table below lists the Instruction List language operators Operator Modifier Operand Description LD N Set current result equal to operand n J Z _ Store current result to operand location Note 1
202. etween every transition As an extension to the standard the SFC editor allows you to place one step immediately after another or one transition after another However at runtime the necessary dummy steps or dummy transitions are inserted automatically Transition Parameters Transition Parameters IRLL ransition name IRLL Logic About the RLL Transition Manager Use the RLL Transition Manager to manage the RLL actions that are embedded in a SFC program The RLL Transition Manager displays a list of all RLL transitions that are embedded in the active file and lets you rename and delete those RLL transitions About Divergences You can control multiple paths in an SFC using divergences Divergences can be a selected divergence or a simultaneous divergence Selected Divergence A select divergence lets you choose from two or more control paths Each path begins with a transition condition that determines which control path is activated At some point in the SFC diagram all paths within the select diverge must converge into a single path GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 51 4 52 Simultaneous Divergence A simultaneous divergence lets you execute multiple control paths simultaneously in parallel All the control paths in the simultaneous divergence are activated as soon as power flow enters the divergence At some point in the SFC diagram all paths within the diverge must converge into a single path but
203. f the SFC target and click OK An SFC name cannot contain any spaces The editor inserts the SFC Transition Coil at the specified location SFC Paim T1 1 TRANS H Adding Function Blocks Several predefined algorithms exist that are called function blocks that you can use in an RLL program You can enable function blocks with inputs from an RLL rung have them do operations such as trigonometric math logic functions bit shift operations file operations etc and then send the results to an output that feeds into another element on the RLL rung Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B To Add a Function Block 1 If the Function Blocks palette is not displayed select View Function Block Palette from the menu bar The editor displays the Function Blocks palette Function Blocks 2 Select the type of function block that you need from the drop down list The Function Blocks palette changes to display the selected function block types Function Blocks Counter Timer f 3 Click on the specific function block that you want to add such as an OR Bitwise block 4 Drag the function block to the location on the rung where you want to place it GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 35 5 The dialog box for the function block appears when you release the left mouse button Bit String OR Function Block OR 6 Fill in the appropriate information for the fun
204. figured for automatic state change or state change based on a Boolean symbol An access level and a keyboard key or combination can be assigned to the button The Edit Button Control dialog box is shown in the following figure and described in the following table Edit Button Control State Symbol BOOL Override Symbol K F T All Shift Access Level T Ctrl jo Cancel X 7 Symbol Manager Help rm State 1 State Symbol Low Definition Define Button Face Ia Delete Function Edit Function Move Up _ Move Down _ Button Functions State 2 State Symbol High Definition Button Functions Move Up _ Move Down _ Define Button Face aa pea Delete Function m Override State Ovr Symbol High Definition Button Functions Define Button Face Aae Delete Function Edit Function Move Up_ Move Down Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B a Field Description Automatic State Change If checked enables automatic state change when the button is clicked It will alternate between State 1 and State 2 automatically When enabled the State Symbol edit box is disabled If Automatic State Change is disabled and no state symbol is defined for the button the button is a single state button and remains in State 1 State Symbol Defines the Boolean state symbol for the button If a state symbol is defined
205. for the selected board D Click the Define Board button For details on completing the configuration refer to online help for your Motion Control interface board E 2 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Motion Control Programming Adding Motion Control to an SFC When you create the application code for an SFC step you can choose to use Motion Control code as illustrated below When the SFC is executed the Motion Control code that you incorporate within each step is processed as the step becomes active You can enter the Motion Control code directly into a step or you can link a file containing the Motion Control code to the step when you configure the step The type of information in the file should be in the same format as the type of information entered directly into a step Step1 N001G00X0Y0F1000 T 1 N002G00X50Y75 N003G00X150 N004G00X220Y 150 Step2 N005G00X300 N006G00Y75 Step3 N007G00X500 For information about how the CONTROL SYSTEM software enhances the RS 274D specification see PC CONTROL Software Enhancements to RS 274D on page E 3 PC CONTROL Software Enhancements to RS 274D GFK 1424B The control system software provides the following enhancements to the RS 274D specification e You can embed Structured Text assignments and expressions within the Motion Control code See Embedding Structured Text into Motion Control
206. g copying and pasting oontiols fe Ti Data port Data types BOOL BYTE DATE DINT INT 4 8 GFK 1424B Index Index Datagrams using with the PCIM driver DATE Daughterboard Define Board dialog 3 2 3 6 Define M Flag Symbols Deleting Demo mode DeviceNet I O configuring 3 20 DINT 4 3 DIP switches PCIF2 PCIF 30 B 3 DIP Switches PCIM A 8 Display property options 2 27 Divergences selected 4 51 simultaneous Do Not Process M Codes Feature E 10 Documenting RLL one programs 4 40 SFC programs Drive capability A 15 DWORD 4 8 Dynamic data exchange DDE 3 38 E Edge Detect RLLG 4 ST G 13 Index 3 Index Edit Menu 2 10 Editing Action parameters 4 45 Actions 4 70 ActiveX controls 6 37 configuration parameter of an Action 4 71 configurations controls 6 9 existing SFC programs 4 61 online 4 115 program comments SFC ksi RLL programs from Continuous Logic Manager rung comments Structured Text 4 83 symbol ener symbols ets Transitions EEPROM aed Electrical characteristics A 15 Error conditions 4 104 Event Log 5 2 Events ActiveX controls 6 42 Examples identifiers Instruction List 4 112 literals 4 4 online editing 4 118 operator interface screen 6 15 PID 4 99 SFC program simple RLL Structured Text 4 85 Symbol Manager 4 13 time duration 4 48 Execute Menu 2
207. gauge scale once it reaches its specified Limit 1 Limit 2 the color of the gauge scale once it reaches its specified Limit 2 Symbol Manager Clicking this button opens the Symbol Manager Select Font Clicking this button displays a Font dialog box to specify the font style size and color for the control text name units and scale numbering Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Indicator An indicator is a state control whose appearance text color etc changes depending on the value of a BOOL or BYTE data type symbol A BOOL symbol can select between two states and a BYTE symbol can select from up to eight states The Edit Indicator and Define Indicator Face dialog boxes are shown in the following figure and described in the following table Edit Indicator Ea State Symbol Indicator v Symbol Manager m Indicator State Definitions State Indicator 0 Define Indicator Face C 1 Define Indicator Face 2 Define Indicator Face 3 Define Indicator Face C 4 Define Indicator Face C 5 Define Indicator Face C 6 Define Indicator Face C 7 Define Indicator Face C Cancel Help GFK 1424B Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 27 6 28 Define Indicator Face Ea m Face Definition Select Font L Text Surface Color m Light Definition Select Light Co
208. he lt Boolean expression gt evaluates to FALSE program flow continues with the RS 274D command following the IF GOTO command Format IF lt Boolean expression gt IF GOTO lt Block Number gt Where lt Boolean expression gt is any Structured Text expression that evaluates to a Boolean value lt Block Number gt is the line number of the next block to execute The value in lt Block Number gt must match the line number of the RS 274D command exactly including all leading zeroes and not including the N designator IF GOTO Example The following is an example of the IF GOTO command N0010X0 59Y 5 5F100 N0020X0 63Y 5 5 N0030X0 67Y 5 4 N0040X0 71Y 5 4 Step2 N0050X0 74Y 5 39 N0060X0 78Y 5 35 N0070X0 81Y 5 3 N0080X0 84Y 5 25 NO090X0 88Y 5 2 Step4 IF T59 GOTO 013 NO100X0 91Y 5 14 NO110X0 95Y 5 09 N0120X0 99Y 5 21 N0130X1 03Y 4 21 Step3 When step3 is active program flow continues at block N0130 when T 59 is TRUE Otherwise blocks 100 130 execute GFK 1424B Appendix E Motion Control E 21 Using the G56 Macro Calls with Motion As an enhancement to the RS 274D specification the control system software lets you call macros sometimes called subroutines by using the G65 command within RS 274D motion code There are two simple steps to programming a G65 subroutine 1 Design your macros see Designing the Macro 2 Call the macros for execution s
209. he Host bus In addition to the normal interface lines the mother board provides the following daughter board control and monitoring functions A standard unit load to the IBM bus Works in ISA compatible backplanes Low supply voltage detection Power up RESET signal sequencing Host system address decoding over the full PC AT memory maps A built in watchdog timer that can monitor system operation and shut down the daughter board if the Host system faults preventing any conflicts on the Genius bus Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Faceplate For each daughter board two LEDs Board OK and Communications OK are provided in the PCIM faceplate For each daughter board the LEDs are as shown below LEDs for Daughter Board 1 OO Bus Connector Daughter Board OK O for Daughter Board 1 Communications OK LEDs for 4 Daughter Board 2 oo Bus Connector for Daughter Board 2 1 Openings in the faceplate accommodate the serial bus connectors for the PCIM daughter board s Installation and Configuration In order for you to interface the PCIM with the Genius serial bus you must first perform the following steps Determine the I O Port and Shared Memory addresses and the IRQ you will be using for the PCIM Set
210. he PCIM Board in the configuration The Name is used to describe the Board in the I O Point locations in the rest of the software Model No There are two valid models Single and Dual Port The Single Port Board only supports one Genius I O bus while the Dual Port model will support two buses The PCIM Board Definition Dialog will only let you define the I O and hardware Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 7 3 8 configuration for Port 1 on a Single Port Board Ports 1 and 2 can be configured for the Dual Port Board No I O can be defined for the NULL Board type Board OK Bit If a name is entered in this field a BOOL with that name will be created This BOOL will be TRUE when no modules are faulted If any modules are faulted this BOOL will become FALSE Cfg Mismatch If a name is entered in this field a BOOL with that name will be created This BOOL will be TRUE if the modules actually attached to the bus do not match the blocks set up in the configuration Description The Description is a free format text description for the Board This is an optional field in the configuration Disable outputs when no programs are running If this box is checked all outputs will be 0 when there are no programs running Port 1 Port 2 Simulate Check Box The Simulate Check Box will cause the port I O to be disabled The fault and configuration information will be ignored This feature is useful if the I O for the port is not being used Any
211. he control path below the convergence will become active Slot A space in an I O or computer in which a card is placed GFK 1424B Appendix H Glossary of Terms H 9 Step Named graphical element in an SFC that represents a state or span of time in the program execution during which the actions and functions associated with the Step are performed Step Name The Step Name is an identifier that refers to a step in a Sequential Function Chart The Step name can be changed by double clicking on the Step box to open the Edit Step dialog box then double clicking the identifier in the Step Name edit box and entering a new identifier STRING Member of the ANY group of data types STRING data types are valid in any instruction or function block that accepts an ANY or STRING data type The format for a STRING data type consists of a string of up to 250 ASCII characters in single quotation marks Structured Text Structured Text is a textual programming language defined by IEC 1131 Symbol Internal memory location that contains information The content of the information is defined by the data type and can be real numbers integers strings of characters etc The Symbol Manager is used to define a symbol and to assign it a symbolic name and data type TIME TIME Member of the ANY group of data types TIME data types are valid in any instruction or function block that accepts an ANY or TIME data type The format of the TIME data type
212. he o lt label gt identifier in the macro Both parameters lt label gt and lt loop gt must be specified For example if macro 22 were to be called one time the syntax is G65P22L1 The following is an example of a macro call StepS N001048 T99 N002G4F2 N003G4F2 N004M99 N005G4F2 N006G65P48L5 Step7 N007G4F2 Step6 When step6 is active program flow skips the first four blocks which consist of the macro and begins executing at block N005 Then block N006 is executed which calls the macro blocks N001 N004 a total of five times After the fifth execution of the macro program flow resumes at block N007 GFK 1424B Appendix E Motion Control E 23 Monitoring and Running Motion Application Programs This section describes how to use the Jog Panel Single Axis and Multi Axis Status Panel and how to monitor the axis plot Note These panels only display the first three characters of an axis name They are also limited to the first eight axes Using the J og Panel Use the Jog Panel to home and jog configured axes The jog axis panel contains buttons that let you select the e jog axis e jog type home continuous or incremental e jog speed e jog increment The selected axis is displayed at the top of the Jog Panel and is jogged or homed in the desired direction by pressing and holding the jog or jog button If the jog or jog button is released
213. he rectangular box and click the left mouse button The Insert Master dialog box will appear Insert Master Master type All x ike Available masters Sasi CIF30 DPM CIF104 DPM CIF3O FMS CIF30 FE __ Ad gt gt COM DPM 7 PKY20 DPM KPO104 DPM Add All gt gt Other DF device Other DP FMS device lt Remove All Other FMS devices _ amp Bemove Vendor name Hilscher GmbH Station address Ident number Mone Description GSD file name GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 23 4 Select your master card and click the Add button then click OK Insert Master x Master type All z DK Available masters Selected masters Cancel CIF30 DPM CIF104 DPM COM DPM PKY20 DPM KPO104 DPM Add All gt gt Other DP device Other DP FMS device lt Remove All Other FMS devices i lt lt Remove Vendorname Hilseher GmbH Station address ft Ident number Ox 505 Description GSD file name HIL_ 505 G5D You should now see the following network screen with the Master card you selected displayed Syfun Jihwa lt DP niate IFD IF CM 3 24 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B 5 Select the toolbar button to Insert Slave or choose Insert then Slave from the pull down menu Position the cursor below the rectangular box and click the left mouse button You should now see the following screen with available slaves for all the GSD files that you placed in
214. he step A step is either active or inactive At any given moment the state of the system is defined by the set of active steps and the values of its internal and output variables A Step is graphically represented within an SFC as a box containing the Step name which identifies the step Program flow into and out of the Step is through a vertical line entering the top of the box and another line exiting from the bottom of the box When you create a new SFC the system automatically generates the e first Step labeled Start e Jast Step labeled End You cannot edit these Steps they simply represent the initiation and termination of the SFC Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 4 Typically you separate Steps in an SFC with Transitions which are program elements As an enhancement to the IEC 1131 3 specification the PC CONTROL software lets you place a Step immediately before or after another Step at runtime the system inserts the required dummy transition for you SFC steps can have one of more Actions attached to them An Action can contain one or more rungs of ladder logic and uses special Action Qualifiers to control the execution of the Action From within a single step you can call another entire SFC the child for execution a Macro Step When the child SFC has completed program control returns to the macro step that made the call 4 42 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Step Properties
215. hen using the END_REPEAT_NOWAIT keyword Avoid infinite loops by insuring that the BooleanExpression provides a determinate exit condition 4 94 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Example The following code fragment reads values from an array until a value greater than 5 0 is found or the upper bound of the array is reached Since at least one array value must be read the REPEAT loop is used REPEAT Value Array01 Index Index Index 1 UNTIL Value gt 5 0 OR Index gt UpperBound END_REPEAT NOWAIT SCAN The SCAN statement suspends program execution while an I O scan takes place Format SCAN Example Statementl SCAN Statements 2 amp 3 do not execute until after an I O scan Statement2 Statement3 WHILE Statement The WHILE loop repeatedly executes iterates a statement list contained within the WHILE END_WHILE construct as long as a specified condition is TRUE It checks the condition first then conditionally executes the statement list This looping construct is useful when the statement list does not necessarily need to be executed Format WHILE BooleanExpression DO StatementList END_WHILE Where BooleanExpression Any expression that resolves to a Boolean value StatementList Any set of Structured Text statements GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 95 4 96 Operation If BooleanExpression is FALSE th
216. hows the variables associated with instances of timers TMR Enumerations PIDs and PRGCBs Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B IEC Style Locations The following figure shows an example of normal and IEC 1131 3 style locations for TO points Display Symbol Locations must be enabled If a symbol is memory mapped variable Memory appears for the symbol location PCIF1_Rack0101 PCIF1 GE9030Rack1 1 PCIF1_Rack0101 PCIF1_Rack0101 1X1 The IEC 1131 3 symbol location syntax is as follows Directly represented variable Input point Output point BOOL BYTE WORD I g w x o DWORD GFK 1424B Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 29 UPS Configuration 2 30 The control system can work in conjunction with a UPS The control system can receive signals from the UPS in order to prepare an orderly shutdown The signals appear in the Symbol Manager as RT_POWER_FAIL Power failure detected RT_LOW_BATTERY Low battery detected To use the UPS e Locate the PC Control Applications menu from the Windows Start menu and choose UPS Monitor The UPS Monitor icon ra appears in the tray Configure the UPS by double clicking on the icon The PC Control UPS Monitor dialog box appears Item Description UPS is installed on Select the serial port to which the UPS is connected UPS Configuration Refer to your UPS documentation to fill in these fields Power failure signal Check this option if the UPS provides a power fail
217. i VEL Using the Multi Axis Motion Status Panel The selected status information is displayed at the top of the status box To change the selected status information press the button with the desired status information Multiple copies of the multi axis motion status can be activated at the same time GFK 1424B Appendix E Motion Control E 33 RS274 Block Display E 34 The RS274 Block Display allows you to display the active RS274 block commands on the operator interface screen All the block commands in the active SFC step will be displayed The active block will be highlighted green and a pointer gt will be at the front of the block Editing an RS274 Block Display To edit an RS274 Block Display double click on the desired RS274 Block Display or select the desired RS274 Block Display and press Enter The Edit RS274 Block Display dialog box is displayed allowing the user to change the RS274 Block Display definition data The RS274 Program Symbol combo box is used to define the STRING symbol that contains the file path of the SFC program from which active RS274 blocks will be displayed To select a display symbol for the RS274 Program Symbol either select a symbol name from the drop down list box or type a symbol name into the edit box The RS274 Block Display uses OLE technology to link to the Program Editor The Program Editor displays the RS274 blocks in the RS274 Block Display on the operator screen Whenever the progr
218. iables that are used across all the control programs in a given project The configuration tells the software what interface cards are in the computer and what I O are attached to those cards Using the configuration editor you can assign symbol names to I O points You can also enter comments regarding the function of particular elements The configuration editor takes you step by step through the configuration process You start by naming the system the computer you are working on and defining the program scan time The PC slots follow this on the system and the control system cards not the basic computer cards in each slot and then to each I O module connected to the card and finally the I O points If a card is a communications card or I O scanner the configuration goes even deeper to describe remote racks slots boards etc The following figure shows the configuration levels for simple onboard I O Hardware Conflicts There are several settings that must be properly configured to communicate with most interface cards The most common are the data port address the memory base address and the interrupt For the interface card to work properly the jumper setting on the card must match the setting in the Define Board dialog box AND not conflict with other hardware in the PC IMPORTANT The best way to figure out what resources your current hardware devices are taking up is to look in the NT Diagnostics in the Administrative
219. ication Examples D 23 2 D 24 e Using the Define Button Face buttons for State 1 and State 2 edit the button to say Set Buzzer On and Set Buzzer Off respectively When finished the dialog box should look like this Edit Button Control xi l Key l Atf Shit Access Level OK aS as State Symbol BOOL Override Symbol Cancel buzzer z 7 Help r State 1 State Symbol Low Definition Define Button Face E ee Delete Function Set Buzzer On _Edit Function Function Button Functions Move Up _ Move Down _ r State 2 State Symbol High Definition Define Button Face Add Function Delete Function Set Buzzer off Edit Function Move Up_ Move Down _ Button Functions r Override State Ovr Symbol High Definition Button Functions Define Button Face Add Function Delete Function Edit Function MoveUp _ Move Down e Click the OK button to close the dialog box and accept the changes If you do not have an I O simulator you will need to create two additional click buttons to control the symbols switch1 amp switch2 Numeric Indicator So that you can monitor the weight of your hopper add a numeric display e Select the Numeric Display tool from the Operator interface tool bar The cursor will change to the Numeric cursor Move the cursor to a desired spot on the operator screen and click the left mouse button to d
220. ication programs Qualifiers appear within the Action as shown below Label A P PaintColorAction GFK 1424B Appendix G Instruction Set Reference G 7 Action Qualifiers If after the Step becomes active you want the RLL to begin running and stop when the Step becomes inactive RLL to begin running and continue to run until reset by the Reset qualifier RLL to execute once RLL to begin running after a delay The RLL stops when the Step becomes inactive RLL to begin running and stop when the time limit expires or the Step becomes inactive RLL to begin running after a delay and continue to run until reset by the Reset qualifier If another Action qualifier resets the RLL during the delay the reset has no effect because the RLL has not yet been stored If the Step becomes inactive before the delay completes the RLL is never stored and does not run at all RLL to begin running after a delay and continue to run until reset by the Reset qualifier If an Action is reset during a delay then the RLL does not execute RLL to begin running and after the specified time stop A Reset qualifier is required to reset the RLL Otherwise without the reset the RLL does not run again If the Step becomes inactive the RLL continues to run until the duration times out A Reset qualifier is not required but one can be used to stop the RLL execution RLL begins running and stop after the specified time expires
221. icing all of the enabled devices in the driver configuration Installing and Configuring Devices on the DeviceNet Network 3 20 Refer to the operator s manual for each device for details on how to install the unit on the DeviceNet network Be sure to set each device s MAC ID correctly to avoid addressing conflicts Many simple devices are DIP switch configurable However more sophisticated devices are configured online via the network Such devices require a DeviceNet management utility to be properly configured GE Fanuc recommends that you use an ODVA approved software package to configure your device Contact your DeviceNet distributor for a list of network management software vendors There are a variety of dialog boxes used to configure your DeviceNet network This section summarizes the dialog boxes and their function Refer to your online help for detailed information about each dialog box Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Board Dialog The board dialog box allows you to configure the 5136 DN scanner Box board for your DeviceNet network Fault Detection The Fault Detection dialog box allows you to choose the network and Dialog Box device errors to fault on Edit DeviceNet The Edit DeviceNet Nodes Dialog box allows you to select and edit each Nodes Dialog of the devices on the network Box Device Edit The Device Edit Dialog box allows you to edit a DeviceNet device at the Dialog Box specified MAC ID TO Strea
222. ignment i Ipfalue VT_Ra4 REAL xVChartValues v Field Description Name Select the method to configure from the Name list box They will be in alphabetical order Enable Method Check this to enable the method The method must be enabled to be called Return If the method has a return type of VOID VT_VOID appears in the Return box and it cannot be changed otherwise the return type is indicated and a symbol of the appropriate type must be assigned in the Return list box If necessary click Symbol Manager to create a new symbol Arguments If the method accepts arguments they are listed with their number name and data type Methods are limited to 16 arguments An error message appears if the method has greater than 16 arguments For each argument to which a value is to be assigned assign a symbol from its Symbol Assignment list If necessary click Symbol Manager to create new symbols Pointers to arrays defined in the Symbol Manager can be passed to the method Specify the array name without a subscript to pass the entire array The array size must match the method s required size 6 40 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Ls Field Description When method should be If the method is to be called strictly by time interval click called Every Timer Interval and select a multiplier If the method is to be called when a Boolean symbol goes TRUE select a time interval m
223. in edd Y_ cmdPos 0000 0000 count O cps Pos FE 0000 0000 count j 0 cps Velocity 0000 0000 cps 0 ops Jog Increment JOG JOG 1 count count Jog Type 10 count Home 0 count Continuous C 100 count C Incremental C 500 count The Jog Panel is automatically set up for the number of configured axes There are no configuration options for the Jog Panel control Appendix E Motion Control E 31 Single Axis Panel The Single Axis Status Panel displays the status for a single axis The axis for which status is displayed is selected by pressing the desired axis button on the panel The title of the selected axis is displayed at the top of the panel The status which is displayed for the selected axis consists of absolute position commanded position following error and velocity An axis fault indicator is used to indicate that a fault has occurred on the selected axis If no fault has occurred the indicator is green When an axis fault occurs the indicator turns red and the fault button is enabled To view detailed information on the axis fault press the fault button When the axis fault is cleared the indicator turns green The Single Axis Status Panel is automatically set up for the number of configured axes There are no configuration options for the Single Axis Status Panel control Fur X Axis Actual Pos 0000 0000 count _Y_ cmadPos 0000 0000 count Pos FE 0000 0000 count Veloc
224. ing Surface Color Specifies a background color for the control Bevel Bevel values are from 0 to 6 A bevel of 0 makes the control appear flat Increasing the bevel gives the control a 3 D appearance Slide Limits The raw values determine the interaction between the control and its symbol the display values determine the interaction between the control and its scale Max Raw Value Specifies the maximum and minimum values that the slide can Min Raw Value assign to the symbol The slide will not set values above the maximum or below the minimum values Max Display Value Specifies the maximum and minimum numbering of the scale Min Display Value Display Increment Specifies the scale numbering increment Output Display The Output Display displays the control display value not the symbol value That is the position of the slide with respect to the scale Text Color Defines the Output Display text color Surface Color Defines the background color for the output display Decimal Digits Defines the number of digits to the right of the decimal point that are displayed Symbol Manager Clicking this button opens the Symbol Manager Select Font Clicking this button displays a Font dialog box to specify the font style size and color for the control text name units and scale numbering Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 31 Text 6 32 The text element can be used to l
225. inition dialog box permits manual configuration of the rack attached to the PCIF card Simply enter a rack name and select the type of rack The module buttons bring up the module definition dialogs for the associated rack The Module Dialog 3 18 Module Name Enter a descriptive name for this module This name is displayed in the symbol manager to aid in locating a particular I O symbol Module Position This is the physical slot number in the rack Use the Next Module and Prev Module buttons to move between modules on the same rack Module ID Code Enter the module ID Code for the module in this particular slot Press the Lookup button to display the modules model number in the description field Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Ports Button This button opens a dialog for defining the individual ports on this module Defining Digital Port Connections Enter symbol names for each I O bit used Use the Next Conn and Prev Conn buttons to move between groups of I O on this module The box at the top of the dialog identifies the direction of I O either Input or Output Module Health Bit If a name is entered in this field a BOOL will be created This BOOL will be TRUE when the module is healthy and will become FALSE if the module is faulted Defining Analog Port Connections Enter descriptive names for each analog port listed Each name must be unique to the entire global symbol database Module He
226. ion Literals Time duration literals are prefixed by the keyword T TIME t or time and followed by one or more units of time Examples of time duration literals T I1DIHIMIS 1 day 1 hour 1 minute 1 second Time 1d_lh_1m_ls same as preceding time 25h1 ms 25 hours 1 millisecond t lm_2 5s 1 minute 2 5 seconds Time duration literals have the following characteristics e The time units can be written in upper or lower case D d days H h hours M m minutes S s seconds and MS ms milliseconds e An underscore _ can be used to separate the time duration units e The most significant unit of a time duration literal can overflow e The least significant unit of a time duration literal can be written as a real number with no exponent GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 5 Time of Day and Date Literals Time of day and date literals are prefixed by one of the following keywords and followed by time of day and date in the appropriate format DATE Y YY Y MM DD date only D YYYY MM DD same as previous TIME_OF_DAY HH MM SS MS time only TOD HH MM SS MS same as previous DATE_AND_TIME YYYY MM DD HH MM SS MS date and time DT Y YY Y MM DD HH MM SS MS same as previous Examples of time of day and date literals DATE 1998 02 13 D 1998 02 13 TIME_OF_DAY 12 00 00 TOD 12 00 00 01 DATE_AND_TIME 1998 02 13 12 00 00 01 e The date and time keywords can be abbreviated DATE or D TIME_OF_DAY or TOD DATE_AND_TI
227. iptions File Menu New Editor Open Editor Close Save Save As Save All Print Print XRef Print Setup New Config Open Config Save Config Save Config As Import CSV to Config Export Config to CSV Recently Used File List Exit Edit Menu o Creates a new program file Opens an existing program file w Closes all the windows associated with the active program file Saves the active program file Saves the active program under a different name la 4 Saves all open program files and related project information Prints program variables and where and how often they are used in the program This option appears only when a program file is open o Imports a comma separated configuration file Exports the active configuration to a comma separated file that can be accessed by a text editor or spreadsheet List of the last four files accessed by the Program Editor Closes the PC CONTROL software If the unsaved programs are open you are prompted to save them Description Undoes the last action Redoes the previously undone action Cuts the selected object and places it on the clipboard Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Copies the selected object and places it on the clipboard r i LO Eer Description New Function Block New SFC Element Step Properties Insert ST Statement Insert ST Function Calls Insert IL Statement Insert IL
228. irections only the bits that correspond to input points should be read from the Whole Block Input symbol and only bits corresponding to output points should be written to in the Whole Block Output Bit Display of the bit numbers in the I O Block The values go from 1 to 16 You cannot edit these values they are for reference only Name The Name field contains the user defined name for the I O Point The name must comply with IEC 1131 standard naming conventions The name must start with a letter and may contain alphanumeric characters and underscores There can be no blanks in the I O Point name Note that the names are case sensitive GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 13 3 14 Direction Button Clicking on the Direction Button will cause the button to toggle between Input and Output if the block type allows point direction to be configured Back to Bus Button Clicking on the Back to Bus Button will cause the edit changes to be saved You will be returned to the Genius Bus Address Definition Dialog Analog Point Information The Analog Point Information Dialog is used to define the I O Points associated with the Genius I O Block Status Bit Name If a name is entered in this field a BOOL by this name will be created If the block is healthy this BOOL will be TRUE If the block is faulted the BOOL will be FALSE Name The Name field contains the user defined name for the I O Point The name MUST comply w
229. is FALSE program flow returns to the point above Step3 When Condition_C is TRUE and Condition_A and Condition_B are FALSE program flow returns to the point above Step2 Condition_A Condition_B Condition_C Condition_D With multiple branches logic evaluation takes place from left to right If all Transitions are FALSE program flow halts until one Transition becomes TRUE You can define the Transitions for the Loop by either of the following methods e A Boolean Transition consisting of a Boolean expression that is composed in Structured Text e An RLL Transition consisting of a single RLL rung with an output coil having the same name as the Transition itself J ump and Label You can transfer flow to any part of an SFC using a Jump and Label construct The Jump element is represented by two transitions one to continue downward and one to transfer to a label identifier The label element is represented by a directed arc to the left that identifies the point where power flow re enters the control path and a label identifier followed by a colon In the following figure program flow continues to Step when Condition_A is TRUE When Condition_B is TRUE and Condition_A is FALSE program flow jumps to Label_B bypassing Step1 When Condition_C is TRUE and Condition_A and Condition_B are FALSE program flow jumps to Label_C bypassing Step1 and Step2 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Condition_C Conditi
230. ith IEC 1131 standard naming conventions The name must start with a letter and may contain alphanumeric characters and underscores There can be no blanks in the I O Point name Note that the names are case sensitive Direction Button This button is for informational purposes only The direction of analog points is fixed by the type of I O block Back to Bus Button Clicking on the Back to Bus Button will cause the edit changes to be saved You will be returned to the Genius Bus Address Definition Dialog Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Sending Datagrams with the PCIM Driver In the Bus Address Definition Dialog there is a checkbox that says Enable Datagrams for this port If this box is checked 11 symbols will be created in the cfg file They will have a prefix of lt Your Board Name gt _Network lt your network number gt _ These symbols correspond to the command block on the uGeni board of the PCIM board as described in Chapter 10 of the uGeni Board User s Manual GFK 0845 The only commands that should be issued in this way are Transmit Datagram and Transmit Datagram with Reply All fields should be filled in before DGramStatus is set to 1 After this the DGramStatus variable will behave as described in the uGeni Board User s Manual For information on datagram data formats see the Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual GEK 908486 1 Symbol Descrip
231. ith in the Structured Text language Select the function you need and it will automatically be entered at the cursor position with the correct syntax Replace any parameters with ones you have defined in the Symbol Manager Refer to Language Overview for more information on using functions and function blocks in the Structured Text language Editing Structured Text GFK 1424B The Structured Text editor supports the common editor functions such as cut copy and paste and find and replace These commands are found on the Edit and context menu Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 83 Language Overview Expressions Operators 4 84 An expression is defined as a combination of operators mathematical logical relational and operands constants symbols literal values other expressions that can be evaluated yielding a result in one of the supported data types such as integer real number and so on The table below lists the operators that you can use within an expression The order of precedence determines the sequence in which they are executed within the expression The operator with the highest precedence is applied first followed by the operator with the next highest precedence Operators of equal precedence are evaluated left to right Structure Index i a YY 1 Highest Array Index Pointer Reference Pointer Dereference Function Evaluation Identifier argument list 3 e g LN A ABS X 5
232. ity 0000 0000 cps Using the Single Axis Motion Status Panel The selected axis is displayed at the top of the status box To change the selected axis press the button with the desired axis name Multiple copies of the single axis motion status can be activated to view complete axis status on more than one axis at the same time E 32 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Multi Axis Status Panel The Multi Axis Status Panel displays the specified status of all configured axes at the same time The specific status which is displayed is selected from any of the following absolute position POS commanded position CMD following error FE and velocity VEL The desired status is selected by pressing the specific status button on the panel The title of the selected status is displayed at the top of the panel For each axis a fault indicator is used to indicate that a fault has occurred on that axis If no fault has occurred the indicator is green When an axis fault occurs the indicator for that axis turns red and the fault button for that axis is enabled To view detailed information on the axis fault press the fault button When the axis fault is cleared the indicator turns green The Multi Axis Status Panel is automatically set up for the number of configured axes There are no configuration options for the Multi Axis Status Panel control Actual Position x 0000 0000 count raui cmp Y 0000 0000 count Lau
233. k button or continuous button SELECT PROGRAM command The Selected Program Status Panel has no configuration options The slide control provides the capability of continuously changing a symbol value When the slide is moved up or down the symbol assigned to the slide control changes value The current setting of the slide is displayed at the bottom of the control A scale running along the slide path gives an approximate value to which the slide is set The Edit Slide dialog box is shown in the following figure and described in the following table Edit Slide Eg Slide Symbol Help Oox ns zi Symbol Manager Cancel Slide Name Name Text Color O Slide Units Units Surface Color L Bevel a m Slide Limits Output Display Max Raw Value 100 Text Color Min Raw Value fo Surface Color X Max Display Value 100 Decinal Digits aa Min Display Value jo Display Increment 10 EE Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B a Field Description Slide Symbol Specifies the symbol whose value is changed by the slide control If necessary a new symbol can be defined by opening the Symbol Manager with the Symbol Manager button Slide Name Specifies a name for the control For screen documentation only Slide Units Specifies units for the control For screen documentation only Text Color Specifies a color for the control name units and scale number
234. l Manager SFC1 SFC CONFIG1 CFG oP x M Local Copy Symbol L I Board Info Mem 0 170 0 T Global add Global Jee Delete Symbol Listtypes ALL SYMBOLS __BrintLocals _ lose Apply e Local User Types Global User Types Print Globals Name Type 0 Mem Space _ Initial Value Board Info L pArayBool ARRAY OF PTR TO BOOL Memory PTR TO BOOL Memory PTR TO BYTE Memory PTR TO DATE Memory PTR TO DINT Memory PTR TO DWORD Memory PTR TO INT Memory PTR TO REAL Memory L pString PTR TO STRING Memory L pStruct01 PTR TO Struct01 Memory L pTime PTR TO TIME Memory L pTOD PTR TO TOD Memory L punt PTR TO UINT Memory L pword PTR TO WORD Memory Pointer Notes 1 When a pointer symbol is defined it is defined as a pointer to a symbol of a specific data type REAL INT STRING etc For example the pointer symbol pVar1 could be assigned the location of any symbol of its data type 2 Pointers to standard data types user structures and arrays can be defined Pointers to function blocks and system objects cannot be defined 3 A pointer symbol can be substituted for a symbol of the same base type by prefixing it with the dereference operator pVarIntl VarIntl provided the assignment pVarInt1 amp VarInt1 has been performed GFK 1424B Appendix F Pointers in Structured Text F 3 F 4 A pointer to a structure can be used directly in place of the structure name For example As
235. l system is started it will attempt to lock the Heap into physical RAM otherwise it can use virtual memory You are not given an indication of whether locking the Heap in memory was successful or not therefore it is best to start the control system run time system before any other application to allow as much physical memory for the Heap as possible Display Properties Tab Field Description Runtime Tray Icon If set displays the Runtime icon in the tray otherwise it is also displayed in the task bar If it is displayed in the task bar you can access it using keyboard operations however if it is displayed in the tray it is necessary to use the mouse to access it Number of Decimal Places This controls the number of decimal places displayed in the function block details in an RLL program The more decimal places displayed the more space is used Number of FB Symbol This controls the length of space for displaying characters in the function Characters block details in an RLL program not necessarily the actual number of characters A standard character size of an upper case X is assumed If characters take up less space e g lower case J then more characters will appear Editor Display Update This controls how often the Program Editor is updated for example the Time values in the Watch Window Show IEC Style Locations If set displays I O points in IEC 1131 3 syntax rather than by symbol name Fonts amp Colors Tab
236. lInt1 To use an array of pointers which point to an INT Assume an array of pointers ArrayPtr ARRAY 1 10 OF PTR TO INT is defined ArrayPtr index amp VarInt1 ArrayPtr index is assigned the address of Varlnt1 ArrayPtr index Varlnt2 Varlnt1 is assigned the value of Varlnt2 GFK 1424B Appendix F Pointers in Structured Text F 5 F 6 To use an array of pointers which point to an array of INT Assume an array of integers intArray ARRAY 1 10 OF INT and an array of pointers ArrayPtr ARRAY 1 10 OF PTR TO INT are defined ArrayPtr index amp IlntArray ArrayPtr index is assigned the address of the first element in intArray ArrayPtr index Varint1 IntArray 1 is assigned the value of Varint1 ArrayPtr index 1 Varlnt1 Same assignment as above To use an array of pointers to arrays of INT Assume arrays of integers intArray1 intArray2 IntArray3 ARRAY 0 10 OF INT and an array of pointers ArrayPtr ARRAY 1 3 OF PTR TO INT are defined ArrayPtr 1 amp lntArray1 0 ArrayPtr 2 amp IntArray2 0 ArrayPtr 3 amp lntArray3 0 Refer to the following figure ArrayPtr IntArray1 IntArray2 IntArray3 Using PC Control August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B The following syntax can be used ArrayPtr 1 0 Varlnt1 ArrayPtr 1 1 Varlnt2 ArrayPtr 1 2 Varlnt3 ArrayPtr 2 0 Varlnt1 ArrayPtr 2 1 Varlnt2 ArrayPtr 2 2 Varlnt3 Arr
237. lay the value of a symbol numeric or string The Edit Numeric Display dialog box is shown in the following figure and described in the following table Edit Numeric Display Ea Display Symbol Bard1Value v Symbol Manager m Numeric Display Definition Display Surface Color Decimal Digits je Select Font ei Help Field Description Display Symbol Specifies the symbol whose value is displayed by the numeric display control Select a symbol name from the drop down list box or type a symbol name into the edit box If necessary a new symbol can be defined by opening the Symbol Manager with the Symbol Manager button Symbol Manager Clicking this button opens the Symbol Manager Display The selected text color background color and font type is displayed in the box titled Display Surface Color Defines the background color for the control Decimal Digits Defines the number of digits to the right of the decimal point that are displayed Select Font Defines the text font size and color for the control GFK 1424B Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 29 s Selected Program Status Panel Slide 6 30 The Selected Program Status Panel displays the name and current Selected Program Status status i e running stopped etc Selected Program of the selected program The selected program is that program Program Status selected by a clic
238. le click the transition connected to the End step Scroll the Symbol List box down until the switch1 symbol is visible Double click on the switch1 symbol to copy it to the Transition Logic edit box Press the OK button to close the edit transition logic dialog box and accept the changes e Double click the transition on the loop back branch Scroll the Symbol List box down until the switch2 symbol is visible Double click on the switch2 symbol to copy it to the Transition Logic edit box Press the OK button to close the edit transition logic dialog box and accept the changes After filling in Boolean transition details the SFC program should look like this Hopper gt 3000 Hopper 2500 Hopper gt 2000 Step6 T gt TH10s Step 7 T gt T 15s HOT buzzer switchi Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B 2 Exercise 6 Entering Structured Text Commands e Double click on Step3 to open the Edit Step dialog box e Select Structured Text as the Command Type Select the Command List edit box and type in the following structured text assignment statement State 0 e Click OK button to close the step edit dialog box and accept the changes e Double click on Step6 to open the Edit Step dialog box and enter the following State 1 e Double click on Step7 to open the Edit Step dialog box and enter the following State 2 Hopper 0 e Double click on Step8 to open the Edit Step dialog box and en
239. le will not be closed and reset to the start The file operations will fail or execute incorrectly after the online edit Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 117 Example 1 STEP1 FILE_OPEN fcb test dat WHILE NOT fcb EOF DO FILE_READ fcb struct1 END_WHILE If an online edit is executed during the WHILE loop STEP1 will be reset and the FILE_OPEN command will fail because the file is already open Example 2 STEP1 FILE_OPEN fc b test dat STEP2 WHILE NOT fc b EOF DO FILE_READ fcb structl1 END_WHILE If an online edit is executed during the WHILE loop STEP2 will be reset and the FILE_READ will work correctly There will probably be a timing problem in this case because the FILE_READ is not aborted and may still be active when the online edit is executed Structured Text Programs e Structured text does not support seamless online editing If changes to the Structured Text file are made while the program is running and the file is saved the non seamless online editing buttons are enabled Instruction List Programs e If changes to the Instruction List file are made while the program is running and the file is saved the online editing buttons are enabled 4 118 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Chapter gt GFK 1424B Running Application Programs After you have created an application program you must start up the Run time system in order to run and monitor the
240. lement Edit Step Select RLL Transition Logic Bypass Jump Transition Logic etc appears 3 Make changes in the dialog box as needed Deleting a Branch The operation of the Cut tool is based on your selecting an object and then clicking on the Cut tool to delete the object To delete the branch however follow one of these procedures To Delete a Branch without any elements 1 Click on the Select Tool 2 Place the cursor in the middle of the branch and click 3 Click on the Cut tool to delete the branch To delete a Branch that contains one or more elements 1 Click on the Select Tool 2 Drag an area that includes the entire branch and its connection points 3 Click on the Cut tool to delete the branch Undoing Redoing Edits Click the Undo button on the Tool bar to undo an operation GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 39 4 40 Documenting RLL Application Programs A program comment can consist of any meaningful description that you want to display on a Rung You can choose whether the system displays the comments or hides them Adding and Editing Rung Comments 1 Click on the Comment Tool on the RLL menu bar When no comment is associated with a rung the comment displayed is Rung Comment Move the cursor to the Rung in the program where you want to edit the comment and double click The Program Comments dialog box appears Enter the comment and click on OK The comment app
241. lete Returns the result of deleting a specified number of characters DSPMSG from a specified position in the middle of the input string Displays a message in a window on the operator s screen Equal EQ Returns a Boolean TRUE if the inputs are equal otherwise returns FALSE Sets the RLL rung output accordingly Find Returns the starting position of one string within a second string FIND returns 0 if the string is not found Greater Than or Equal GE Returns a Boolean TRUE if the first input is greater than or equal to the second input otherwise returns FALSE Sets the RLL rung output accordingly Greater Than GT INT_TO_STRING Returns a Boolean TRUE if the first input is greater than the second input otherwise returns FALSE Sets the RLL rung output accordingly Converts an integer to an ASCII character string MSGWND Not Equal NE REAL_TO_STRING Insert Returns a string formed by inserting one string of characters into another string at a specified position Left Returns a specified number of the leftmost characters of the input string Length Returns the length of a character string Less Than or Equal Returns a Boolean TRUE if the first input is less than or equal to LE the second input otherwise returns FALSE Sets the RLL rung output accordingly Less Than LT Returns a Boolean TRUE if the first input is less than the second input otherwise returns FALSE Sets the RLL
242. light using the active highlight colors to show the status of the running program 5 2 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B To run the active file with debug enabled 1 Click Execute 2 Select Run with Debug menu command To run one step of the active file 1 Click Execute 2 Select Single Step If the step contains more than one command line the next command line within the step is executed To run the active file with restart 1 Click Execute 2 Select Run with Restart A program running with restart will automatically start running when the Runtime Subsystems start up Canceling a Running Program GFK 1424B To cancel a running SFC program 1 Click Execute 2 Select Abort The program will be aborted and reset to the start of the program Note To cause a program break point in a SFC step use the Structured Text BREAK function in that step Chapter 5 Running Application Programs 5 3 Configuring Programs to Execute Automatically In some applications it is necessary to start a SFC program running automatically every time the controller is powered up or every time the Runtime Subsystems are started You can accomplish the first option by making a Batch file with the appropriate commands and adding the Batch file to the Windows NT Startup folder The second option is accomplished using the Run with Restart command Starting Programs with a Batch file Note Only one SFC application
243. liseconds of maximum I O scan RT_IO_LAST REAL duration in milliseconds of last I O scan RT_IO_AVG REAL duration in milliseconds of average I O scan Rolling average calculated over the last 100 scans RT_MEM_PCT REAL contains remaining percentage of system RAM heap space allocated for the programmable control system software RT_LOW_BATTERY BOOL low battery signal from UPS RT_POWER_FAIL BOOL power fail signal from UPS RT_SCAN_RATE REAL configured scan rate of in milliseconds as set in the active configuration GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 21 Keywords 4 22 The identifiers listed in the following table are reserved system symbols keywords Do not create user symbols using these identifiers Note that all system symbols are in uppercase letters This list is subject to change on future releases of the product To avoid future conflicts user created symbols should be of mixed case or lower case Keyword Listing ABORT_ALL ABS AC ACCEL ACOS ACTION ADD ADD_NOFLY AND_SLOWFLY AND AND_BITS ANDN ANDT ANDTN ANY ANY_BIT ANY_DATE ANY_INT ANY_NUM ANY_REAL APPENDFILE ARRAY ARRAY_TO_STRING AS ASIN AT ATAN AXIS AXISGRP AXSJOG BCD_TO_INT BEGIN BEGIN_IL BEGIN_RS274 BOOL BREAK BY BYTE CASE CAL CALC CALCN CD CLK CLOSEFILE CONCAT CONFIGURATION CONSTANT COPYFILE COS CTD CTU CTUD CU CV D D
244. ll not run until it receives a Start signal from the PC If the PC is reset the PIF400 resets and waits for the Start signal from the PC If J3 is installed the PIF400 runs as soon as power is applied to the PC If the PC is reset the PIF400 is not reset and continues to run The default position for JP3 is removed J P1 Flash Protect and J P2 Boot Protect These jumpers are set at the factory and must be left installed for the PIF400 card to operate properly GFK 1424B Appendix C Personal Computer Interface PCIF2 for Series 90 30 I O C 3 Connectors J1 Expansion Remote I O Connector This 25 pin female D connector is used to communicate with up to seven I O racks This connector is connected to the expansion port on the first I O rack in the system Pin Assignments for J1 Expansion Connector 1 SHLD Shield N A 2 Data frame signal pair Output Da A Run signal pair Output oe 12 Parity error signal pair Input ce 16 Data signal pair Input and fore om 20 Bus select signal pair Output aE or a 24 Data clock signal pair Output Stoo You must supply a cable to connect the PIF400 card to the I O racks This cable should feature seven twisted pairs with an overall shield and drain wire Belden 8107 or equivalent The final rack on the I O Bus should be terminated with an I O Bus terminator plug catalog number IC693ACC307 Interconnecting cables can be standard length GE Fanuc expansion cables listed below or cus
245. llowing e You can drag a Boolean symbol onto an RLL rung You are prompted to add the symbol as a contact or a coil When you select contact or coil the standard Edit Contact or Edit Coil dialog box appears e You can drag a Boolean symbol onto an existing RLL contact or coil You are prompted to replace the existing contact or coil symbol with the one you have dragged from the Symbol Manager e You can drag symbols from the Symbol Manager directly into a location in a Structured Text or Instruction List document Enumerations For symbols that have member elements structures function blocks and system objects when a symbol of that type is dragged from the Symbol Manager into a Structured Text document for example the Select Symbol Members list appears You can then drag and drop the member element you want to use from this list This also works when adding symbols that have member elements to the Watch Window described on page 4 102 GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 19 System Symbols Predefined System Symbols 4 20 The system software automatically creates the following symbols that can be used with application programs Symbol TODAY NOW NULL TMR Variables Counter Variables Timer Variables stepname X stepname T Motion Control File Control Block Program Control Description Contains the current system date The TODAY system symbol is a DATE data type that contains
246. llowing the program Label Qualifiers appear within the Action as shown below step2 Ey 0 Lal PaintColorAction Motion Qualifier Choose from the following qualifiers Leave a blank for no qualifier If you do not want the RLL to begin se this qualifier Imotion starts IMotion Started MS acceleration profile is complete Acceleration Complete AC Imotion reaches the target speed At Speed AS Imotion begins the deceleration profile Deceleration Started DS motion finshed Motion Complete MO Imotion is finished and all axes associated with the In Position IP Imotion are within the In Position tolerance of the programmed endpoint Imove command is finished End of Block EB 4 46 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Action Qualifiers Action Qualifiers specify constraints on the execution of the RLL code Qualifiers appear within the Action as shown below Label A a PaintColorAction If after the Step becomes active you want the Use this qualifier IRLL to begin running and stop when the Step becomes inactive Non Stored N IRLL to begin running and continue to run until reset by the Reset Stored S qualifier IRLL to execute once Pulsed P IRLL to begin running after a delay Time Delayed D he RLL stops when the Step becomes inactive IRLL to begin running and stop when the time limit expires or the Time Limited L Step becomes inactive L to begin running and after
247. lop debug parse and execute application programs Whenever you start the Program Editor you will be prompted to enter an access level password The default password for unlimited access is 4567 This chapter provides the following information How to configure symbols How to structure and create RLL application programs How to structure and create Sequential Function Charts How to create Structured Text application programs How to create Instruction List application programs Motion Programming Online editing 4 1 Section l Configuring Symbols About Symbols The PC Control programming tools allow you to define and use symbols which are internal memory locations that contain information The content of the information is defined by the data type and can be real numbers integers strings of characters etc Use the Symbol Manager to define a symbol assign it a symbolic name and data type and designate its scope as local or global Global symbol definitions are stored in the active configuration file Local symbol definitions are stored within the application program file SFC RLL Structured Text or Instruction List T O points and system and run time symbols are predefined and can be viewed and used in programs but not edited They appear as global symbols Symbol Scope The scope of a symbol can be local to a program or global Local symbol A local symbol can be referenced only within the program in which it is defin
248. lor Remove Light Cancel Field Description State Symbol Specifies the symbol to which the indicator responds State symbol data types can be BOOL or BYTE If the state symbol is a BOOL the indicator can have two states if a BYTE the indicator can have up to eight states If necessary a new symbol can be defined by opening the Symbol Manager with the Symbol Manager button Symbol Manager Clicking this button opens the Symbol Manager Indicator State Definitions For each possible binary state 0 through 7 the corresponding indicator text background color and optional light are shown Define Indicator Face Clicking this button displays the Define Indicator Face dialog box This dialog box is used to define the text text color and background color for a state and the font type and size for the entire indicator An optional colored light can also be defined for each indicator state Face Definition Text The string to be displayed for the state Select Font Defines the font and size for the indicator control and the text color for the state Surface Color Defines the background color for the state Light Definition Select Light Displays a group of light colors that can be selected for the state Remove Light Removes a light defined for the state Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Numeric Display The numeric display control is used to disp
249. m G01 Positions a tool to the next point along a straight line path Sets the X axis position Sets the Y axis position Sets the Z axis position F95 Sets the feed rate at 95 units Example 2 NO11G02X 0 5Y 1 010 75J0 0 NO11 Eleventh block in the program G02 Positions a tool in a circular motion Sets the X axis position Sets the Y axis position 10 75 Sets the X axis position for the arc JO 0 Sets the Y axis position for the arc Example 3 N003G70X 1 3 Y 7 0Z 2 1M08 N003 Third block in the program G70 Sets mode for programming in units of inches Sets the X axis position Sets the Y axis position Sets the Z axis position MO8 Causes coolant number 1 to turn on Using G Codes The control system software supports RS 274D G codes to control many motion control operations The G code support is driver dependent Not all G codes are supported by all drivers If a driver is marked with a bullet it supports that G code The available G codes are listed in the following table Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B G00 04 G17 G18 G19 G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G45 G46 G47 G48 G52 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 61 motor Rapid point to point motion Axes may not arrive at the endpoint at the same time Coordinated Linear motion The speed of the motion is controlled and all the axes move in a coordinated manner First two axis only Circular Motion Clockwise The axes are
250. m The I O Stream Editor Dialog allows you to define the exact format of the Editor Dialog input or output stream for the selected device It also allows you to attach Box symbolic information to each stream component Stream The Stream Component Edit Dialog allows you to assign a symbolic Component Edit name for the selected stream component and define its type Dialog Box Global Variables When certain symbol names are defined in the DeviceNet configuration the driver will automatically provide a set of global variables that will report status and error information If a board name is provided the driver will create a set of global variables that provide status and error information on the CAN bus If a device symbol name is defined then the driver will provide a variable that reports the status of the device CAN Bus Global If a board name is provided in the Board Dialog the driver will Variables automatically create a set of global variables that provide status and error information on the CAN bus Symbolic information is appended to the end of the board name to create each global variable Deleting the board name in the dialog disables the creation of these variables Device Status If a device name is defined in the Symbol Name field of the Device Edit Global Variables Dialog then the driver will automatically create a device status variable Symbolic information is appended to the end of the device name to create the global variable D
251. mand To run the active file with restart 1 Click Execute 2 Select the Run with Restart menu command A program running with restart will automatically start running when the PC CONTROL software Runtime Subsystems start up A program that has been Aborted or is Faulted will no longer be marked to run with restart After the program begins running the program display will highlight using the active highlight colors to show the status of the running program Monitoring Power Flow When a program is running the program display will highlight using the active highlight colors to show the status of the running program Active RLL Programs When a RLL program is running or an embedded action and or RLL transition program window is open in a running SFC program the contacts coils and function blocks in the program will begin highlighting A normally open contact will highlight when the BOOL symbol attached to it is TRUE A normally closed contact will highlight when the BOOL symbol attached to it is FALSE A positive transition sensing contact will highlight when a positive transition occurs on the attached symbol A negative transition sensing contact will highlight when a negative transition occurs on the attached symbol All output coils will highlight when the attached BOOL symbol is TRUE coil highlighting reflects the state of the coil symbol All function blocks will highlight when the function block is active Note If the BOOL s
252. mber it must be first in the block Optional for the control system G The preparatory function s G must follow N X The linear dimension words follow G Specify the X axis first Y The linear dimension words follow G Specify the Y axis second Z The linear dimension words follow G Specify the Z axis third A The rotary dimension words follow G Specify the X axis first B The rotary dimension words follow G Specify the Y axis second C The rotary dimension words follow G Specify the Z axis third l The interpolation words follow the dimension words Specify the X axis first J The interpolation words follow the dimension words Specify the Y axis second K The interpolation words follow the dimension words Specify the Z axis third D The selection of tool compensation must follow K F If you specify a feed rate that applies to more than one axis F must follow the last dimension word and interpolation to which it applies T The tool function selection follows S M Any miscellaneous function s that you specify must be last in the block just ahead of the end of block character End of Block Indicate the end of a block with the carriage return line feed character Make sure that there are no extra spaces tabs or other characters between the last command and the End of Block GFK 1424B Appendix E Motion Control E 5 E 6 Motion Control Block Examples Example 1 N009G01X 3 0Y 7 0Z 1 0F95 NO009 Ninth block in the progra
253. merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc Alarm Master GEnet PowerMotion Series One CIMPLICITY Genius ProLoop Series Six CIMPLICITY PowerTRAC Genius PowerTRAC PROMACRO Series Three CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Helpmate Series Five VuMaster CIMSTAR Logicmaster Series 90 Workmaster Field Control Modelmaster Copyright 1997 1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc All Rights Reserved Preface Revisions to This Manual GFK 1424B Release 2 0 of PC Control software provides the following new features Runtime error reporting page 2 5 Cryp Key emergency authorization page 2 14 Smart Shutdown UPS monitor pages 2 19 and 2 30 New System Option dialogue window page 2 26 Structure and Function Block Enumeration page 2 29 IEC reference display page 2 29 Import Export of symbols via a CSV file for Global Symbols and GE Fanuc PCIM and PCIM variables page 3 41 Enhanced parser error handling page 4 102 Seamless online editing page 4 115 Structured Text and Instruction List programming languages for standalone programs Sections 4 and 5 in Chapter 4 Menu driven Structured Text Editor Section 4 in Chapter 4 ActiveX interface page 6 33 PCIF2 driver support for Series 90 30 I O interface Appendix C APM and DSM configuration Program 0 creation and download page E 2 and the online help for configuring your
254. moved in a coordinated circular motion clockwise when viewed from the top First two axis only Circular Motion Counter The axes are moved in a Clockwise coordinated circular motion counter clockwise when viewed from the top Dwell Execution of the program is suspended for a programmed length of time The duration is specified by an F word in the same block i e G04F2 5 delay for 2 5 seconds Cancels Radius Compensafon Cutter diameter compensation Three dimensional compensation left Cutter diameter compensation Three dimensional compensation right Toot Length merry _ SSS S S ToolLength Offer Mins SSSSS Tool OfietInewe SSCS Tool OffetDecrene S Tool Offer Double eres SSS Tool Offet Double Derese 777 7 Local Offsetting Coordinate Zero Application Specific Point Motion in Machine Coordinate System Workpiece Coordinate System 1 Po Workpiece Coordinate System 2 o Workpiece Coordinate System 3 Po Workpiece Coordinate System 5 Workpiece Coordinate System 6 Exact Stop Mode Workpiece Coordinate System 4 GFK 1424B Appendix E Motion Control Description Notes PMAC PCDSP Compu motor Inch Mode Defined during configuration not Not in Not in available during runtime Runtime Runtime Metric Mode Defined during configuration not Not in Not in available during runtime Runtime Runtime Position Preset Axis positions are set to the values spe
255. ms and configuration files in the project Activate Config Activates the current configuration file The current configuration file is displayed on the status bar at the bottom of the screen Execute Menu o YOS Compiles then executes the program Run with Debug Executes the program until it reaches a Structured Text BREAK statement and then stops executing and put the program in a Break status BREAK statements are ignored if a RUN command is given Available only when an SFC program is open for edit Single Step Executes one command at a time Available only when an SFC program is open for edit Run with Restart Marks the program to begin executing every time the runtime is started A program that has been Aborted or is Faulted will no longer be marked to run with restart Stop Stops executing program where it was stopped When you restart the program it begins executing at the point it left off Available only when an SFC program is open for edit Abort Stops executing program When you restart the program it starts executing at the beginning of the program Reset Estop and clear I O Resets the I O drivers and reestablishes communication with the I O Faults hardware Startup Runtime Startup the runtime subsystem programs Subsystems GFK 1424B Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 13 2 14 Icon Menu New App Icon Accesses the Application Icon Step Library allowing you to create predefined Steps in the library Edit
256. n Activate operator screens and controls Select and run SFC programs Run and cancel continuous RLL programs for environment and machine logic View RLL and SFC programs Edit SFC programs Execute project management functions Edit RLL programs Modify the operator interface Modify system configuration files Change the passwords for access levels 1 to 4 6 2 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Ls The default access code values are located on the printed installation instructions that initially accompanied the PC CONTROL software Entering an Access Code The Program Editor and Operator Interface require access codes The Program Editor automatically presents the access level keypad upon startup To Enter an Access Code Program Editor Click the numbers on the keypad that represent your access code and click OK Operator Interface Click Access from the menu bar and select Password A keypad appears Click the numbers on the keypad that represent your access code and click OK To set the access level to 0 Click Cancel button on the access keypad Changing Access Levels The access code for any level can be changed only from Operator Interface with a level 4 access code There is one access code for each level To change the access level password 1 Click Access from the menu bar and select Password A keypad appears 2 Click key 4 times The message Enter Access Level to Change
257. n To edit events 1 Do one of the following e Select the ActiveX control and choose Edit ActiveX Events from the Edit or context menu or tool bar e Double click on the ActiveX control and choose Edit Events from the Select ActiveX Editing Mode dialog box that appears 2 An Event Setup dialog box appears Refer to the following table and configure events as needed When done click OK to save the configuration and return to the Operator Interface Screen Editor For controls that do not have an Event Setup dialog box a message indicating this appears instead Event Setup YI COMponents Knob Control Ea Name ME nt V Event BOOL KnobRotate Enabled Me Rotate Cancel Control Help Event Help Symbol Manager Dialog Help Argument Name Type Symbol Assignment 1 bLeftButton V T_BOOL BOOL Lens utton v 2 Malue T_R REAL KnobValue Me Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B a Field Description Name Select the event to configure from the Name list box Enable Event Check this to enable the event The event must be enabled to be reported to the operator interface Event BOOL If this is enabled and a Boolean symbol has been assigned then in operation the event sets the Boolean symbol TRUE If necessary click Symbol Manager to create a new symbol Arguments If the event accepts arguments they are listed with their number name and data type Events are limited to 1
258. n Icon Step 1 Access the Application Icons by clicking on the Jcon Tool on the SFC toolbar 2 Drop the Application Icon into the SFC 3 After placing an Application Icon Step into an SFC edit it in the same way as you edit a normal Step Since the code is a template you need to modify the code to suit your application You can also make other changes to the Step options Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 65 Once you customize an Application Icon Step you can add this customized Step to the library Then whenever you need to use a copy of the customized Step within an SFC access it from the library Working with Transitions A Transition is a graphical element in the SFC programming language that represents a single Boolean condition that must be satisfied before program execution continues Adding an RLL Transition z2 1 Click Edit on the menu bar and if a check is next to Boolean Transition deselect it by clicking 2 Click on the Transition Tool on the SFC toolbar The cursor changes into the Transition cursor 3 Move the cursor to the location in the program where you want to place the new Transition and click The new Transition appears in the program at the location you specified Editing an RLL Transition 1 Click the Select Tool gi and double click on the Transition The Select RLL Transition Logic dialog box appears 2 Entera name for the Transition and click OK e An RLL Transition can have the
259. n PC Control under Windows 95 Recommended CPU Pentium 100MHz RAM 32 MB 64 MB preferred Hard Drive 100 MB free CD ROM Drive Yes Monitor VGA minimum SVGA recommended Keyboard and Yes Pointing Device UPS System Recommended You should also check the Important Product Information document shipped with your release for any last minute changes to these requirements GFK 1424B Chapter 1 Introduction 1 3 Upgrading PC Control If you are upgrading an authorized version of PC Control perform these steps before installing Version 2 0 1 From the Control Panel double click Add Remove Programs 2 Click the Install Uninstall tab Highlight PC Control and click the Add Remove button 3 4 Click Yes to remove previous versions 5 Using Explorer delete the BIN folder in the path PCCONTROL BIN 6 Follow instructions for Installing and Authorizing PC Control Software Installing PC Control Software Before you begin check the Important Product Information document shipped with your release for any last minute changes or special operation notes about the installation procedure The installation instructions given here assume that the CD ROM drive is d If you have assigned another drive to the CD ROM make the appropriate substitutions in these instructions You can quit or exit installation anytime during the process To install PC Control for Windows NT software 1 Place the CD ROM in the CD ROM drive Setup is invoked aut
260. n a FOR loop are executed one iteration per scan unless a NOWAIT statement is encountered which causes the loop to complete all iterations in a single scan e All structured text statements in a step are executed once during the first scan the step is active and are not repeated during subsequent scans e All statements within a WHILE loop will continue to be executed until the WHILE condition becomes FALSE e The normal execution sequence is update I O solve logic then repeat GFK 1424B Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 33 File Names The following list describes the file types by extension that are located in the project folder _gprog bbn Binary global configuration file _gprog st Structured text version of the global configuration CFG Configuration file CSV Comma separated variable file DAT Environmental parameters for program files IL Extension for Instruction List programs OPI Operator interface files R Extension for RLL programs S Extension for SFC programs SBN Binary file executed by the runtime engine SFR Stores redo information SFU Stores undo information SFX Stores information for canceling online edits SNF Shared name file SST Structured text version of the SFC program ST Extension for Structured Text programs SWC Stores names of symbols added to the watch window Note Files with RLL OPI SFC CFG ST IL extensions constitute the source for
261. n be used to control the complexity or provide a high level view of a larger SFC by breaking the SFC into a collection of smaller and simpler SFCs Actions can be attached to Macro Steps just as they can be for regular Steps Operator Interface The operator interface is a series of computer screens messages or windows that are presented to the operator to control and monitor a machine or process Parallel Diverge SFC graphical programming element that splits a control path into two or more parallel paths When program execution reaches the beginning of a Parallel Divergence all the subsequent control paths become active in parallel These control paths continue to be active until all the control paths within a Parallel Diverge reach the point of convergence At this point all the paths within the Parallel Divergence are deactivated and the control path below the convergence point will become active Port TO port usually consisting of eight I O bits A port may be accessed as an integer within programs PRGCB The Program Control Block allows SFC programs to crate and control the execution of other application programs Program Editor The Program Editor is a utility used to edit application programs It consists of editors for SFC and RLL programs GFK 1424B Appendix H Glossary of Terms H 7 Project Organizes or groups the application programs and configuration files for an application in a separate subdirectory REAL
262. n icon within the Step Access the Application Icon palette Delete an icon from the Step if one is assigned Using PC Control Software August 1998 Click Symbol Manager Display 1 Click Step Name 2 Type a Step name in the edit box 1 ClickMotion Process Commands 2 Enter the code or link a file All the programming code for the Step appears within the Step For a long series of commands this can enlarge the size of the Step significantly Click Step Description Click Edit Description 3 Enter a Step Description in the Edit Description box In the Width field enter the number of pixels for the Step description Click Icon Click Icon Click Remove GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Displaying a Step as an Icon 1 Edit a Step 2 From the Edit Step dialog box click Icon The Icon palette appears E Attach New Icon xj JAR ODAR Jag 3 From the Icon Palette click on the icon and enter a title when the system prompts you for it 4 Click OK to return to the Edit Step dialog box After you finish editing the Step the icon and title appear within the Step box Adding an Application Icon Step An Application Icon Step is a Step containing a code template which is predefined for a specific function and an icon which is appropriate for the function PC Control software provides a library of several Steps or you can create your own that can be used within an SFC To add an Applicatio
263. n is pressed the Program Editor is activated and the specified file is opened If the file does not exist a new file is opened Delete Function Deletes the highlighted control function from the Button Push Functions list or the Button Release Functions list Edit Function Edits parameters of the highlighted control function in the Button Push Functions list or the Button Release Functions list Move Up Moves the highlighted control function up one position in the Button Push Functions list or the Button Release Functions list Move Down Moves the highlighted Control Function down one position in the Button Push Functions list or the Button Release Functions list Define Button Face Opens the Define Button Face dialog box Line 1 Title Line 2 Title The button can be given two lines of text to describe its function Bevel Bevel affects the border of the control Bevel values are from 0 to 6 A bevel of 0 makes the control appear flat Increasing the bevel gives the control a 3 D appearance Surface Color Specifies a background color for the control Select Icon Remove Icon Clicking Select Icon displays icons that can be assigned to the button Select Font Clicking this button displays a Font dialog box to specify the font style size and color for the control text Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Gauge GFK 1424B The gauge c
264. n the step or within an associated action attached to the step The control logic executes when the step becomes active Control passes to the next step when the transition is cleared Function Block Diagram Function block diagram is best suited for analog signal processing and any control process or algorithm that runs on a continuous basis Functions and function blocks appear in the FBD language as graphical blocks labeled with their function name and inputs and outputs Function block diagrams consist of a network of these graphical functions and function blocks connected by signals This language is currently not supported by PC Control GFK 1424B Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 3 Quick Start ONS Note You must be logged on as administrator to install or upgrade PC Control software Install all PC hardware and I O cards Start Windows NT operating system Install PC Control software and I O drivers se the Program Editor utility to create a new project to hold the application rogram and configuration files gej se the Configuration utility to configure the system hardware define I O symbol names for thi pplication programs The Configuration Utility is run from the File menu of the Program Edito C 2 se the Program Editor utility to construct the application program G se the Operator Interface s Screen Editor located under the Tools menu to onstruct the Human Machine Interface screens fo
265. nager Cancel m Button Definition Define Button Face Peron Delete Function Edit Function Move up Move Down _ Button Push Functions Button Release Functions Add Function Delete Function Edit Function Move Up_ Move Down _ GFK 1424B Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 23 Field Description Specifies a keyboard key which can be pressed to click the button Function keys can be selected from a list or a single key in the range A Z or 1 9 can be typed The Alt Shift and Ctrl keys can also be used in combination with another key Access Level Specifies an access level for the button If an access level is specified the access level of the operator interface must be set to the specified access level or higher in order to click the button Button Push Function Button Release Function Displays the list of control functions executed when the button is pushed Displays the list of control functions executed when the button is released Add Function Adds a control function to the Button Push Functions list or the Button Release Functions list Refer to the Button Functions table for a list and description of functions that can be assigned to a button control If the function added is a RUN STOP or ABORT function and a program name is given an Edit Program button appears below the function list If the Edit Program butto
266. nal computer PC Control software can monitor and control up to 25 886 bytes of I O through the PIF400 Practical limits on T O capacity depend on scan requirements and I O configuration The PIF400 card plugs into a personal computer s PC AT ISA bus 16 bit slot Expansion and remote racks connect to the card in a daisy chained fashion using a 25 pin female D connector The PIF400 provides a watchdog supervised RUN output signal and relay to allow integration with safety circuits For specifications refer to the datasheet provided with the interface card GFK 1540 This appendix provides the following information e Compatibility e Hardware Overview e Jumpers e Connectors e DIP Switch e Quick Start Guide C 1 Compatibility The PIF400 supports all Series 90 30 discrete and analog I O modules that can be configured by PC Control Hardware Overview The PIF400 card has one configurable jumper an I O cable connector and a Run relay A mno ae Debug rt oooooc J2 E Factory Set a MN i i Jumper removed TUONO TEM 2 z C 2 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Jumpers J P3 Run at Power Up This jumper can be used to determine whether the PIF400 will require a Start signal from the PC to run If J3 is removed the PIF400 wi
267. nch connector cursor Release the left mouse button to drop the branch connector at the desired location To cancel the drag operation press the lt ESCAPE gt key If the target location for the branch connector is on the same rung and not inside of any embedded branches or outside of any nested branches the dragged branch connector will be located at the drop position and the other end of the branch will remain in its current position However if the target location for the branch connector is on a different rung inside of an embedded branch or outside of a nested branch both ends of the branch will be moved to the target position the entire branch will be moved Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Moving Program Elements 1 Select the desired element s and move the cursor over one of the selected elements 2 Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the selected elements to the desired location When dragging begins the elements being dragged will be blanked out and the cursor will change to represent the element being dragged If multiple elements are being dragged the cursor will be changed to the group drag cursor Release the left mouse button to drop the element s at the desired location To cancel the drag operation press the lt ESCAPE gt key Editing Program Elements Click on the Select Tool 2 Double click on the element Step Transition label etc The dialog box appropriate for the e
268. nd timer running in the operator interface Methods are eligible to be called every 200 milliseconds or a multiple of 200 milliseconds The multiple will be user defined up to a value of 100 20 seconds A method is eligible to be called in two different ways Every timer interval or a user defined multiple of the timer interval A BOOL symbol goes TRUE when a user defined BOOL symbol goes true the method is called within the next timer interval After the method returns the BOOL symbol is optionally set FALSE To edit methods 1 Do one of the following e Select the ActiveX control and choose Edit ActiveX Methods from the Edit or context menu or tool bar e Double click on the ActiveX control and choose Edit Methods from the Select ActiveX Editing Mode dialog box that appears 2 A Method Setup dialog box appears Refer to the following table and configure methods as needed When done click OK to save the configuration and return to the Operator Interface Screen Editor Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 39 s Method Setup YI COMponents XYChart Control x Name V Enable Method When method should be called Serv alue Enabled 7 Every timer interval OK VT_VOID Tamer terval it olialrer Cancel wie ZU TTS fda Dialog Help BOOL value goes to TRUE Seas Update aee podate Control Help IV Automatic Reset Method Help Return HHA Argument Name Type Symbol Ass
269. nditions that are located at the beginning of each of the new control paths Select Diverge Sequential Function Chart SFC is the graphical programming language for diagramming sequential logic using Steps Transitions and Actions SFC SFC stands for Sequential Function Chart which is used as a graphical programming language for diagramming sequential logic using steps transitions and actions The IEC 1131 has defined a specific implementation of SFC for use with PLCs SFC SFC is an enhanced version of the IEC 1131 Sequential Function Chart standard programming language used by PC Control SFC Transition Coil SFC graphical programming element that can be associated with a Step or a Macro Step and provide program flow control Associated with a Step the SFC transition coil can abort the Step and direct program flow to another Step Associated with a Macro Step the SFC transition coil can abort the child SFC and direct program flow to another Step in the parent SFC Simultaneous Diverge Simultaneous diverge is a SFC graphical programming elements that splits a control path into two or more parallel control paths When program execution reached the beginning of a simultaneous divergence all subsequent control paths will become active in parallel These control paths will continue to be active until all control paths with in the simultaneous divergence reach a point of convergence at which time the paths will be deactivated and t
270. ne This name is displayed in the symbol manager to help identify the location of the I O points Port Address and Board Number Use these spinners to enter the base I O address and board number of your PCIF card in the PC The base address must match the settings of the DIP switches on the card Each PCIF must have a unique board number starting with 0 See Appendix B PCIF1 or Appendix C PCIF2 or click the Help button next to the Base Address field for information on installing the PCIF and selecting an appropriate base I O address Simulate Check Box Check this button to run application programs without accessing the I O system This is useful for testing and development when the PCIF card or I O racks are not available Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Disable Outputs When No Programs are Running Check this box to clear all outputs when no programs are running This can be an important safety feature Clear this box if you wish to leave outputs active after programs complete or if you want to be able to force outputs on with no programs running Abort Program Upon Error If this box is checked any faults will be reported on the screen and the status bits will still be set correctly but any programs that are running will continue to run If this box is not checked programs will be aborted if a fault occurs Cfg Mismatch Bit Name If a name is entered in this field a BOOL will be created This BOOL will
271. ne documentation 1 7 Online editing 4 115 File operations 4 117 vo 4 116 IL programs operation 4 115 RLL programs 4 117 rules 4 116 SFC programs ST programs symbols Online Help 1 7 Opening an Operator Interface file 6 6 Operator Interface 2 2 Activation and Edit modes 6 4 controlling RLL programs 6 5 editing operations 6 9 Motion controls E 31 new file 6 6 starting 6 2 switching modes 6 4 symbol operations 6 13 Operator Interface file opening 6 6 saving Operator Interface operations GFK 1424B Index Index Operator Interface screen operations copying a screen creating a screen deleting a screen renaming a screen selecting a screen to edit 16 8 selecting the Start screen 6 8 Operator Interface screens 6 6 Operator Interface description 2 14 Operators Instruction List Structured Text 4 84 4 97 Overview Instruction List 4 105 of PC Control software Relay Ladder Logic ea Sequential Function Charts Structured Text 4 82 Parameters Step 4 43 system options Pasting controls 6 11 PC Control running and authorizing 1 3 PC hardware requirements 1 2 PCIF2 connectors DIP switches installing C 7 jumpers quick start guide C 7 PCIF2 IC693PIF400 C 1 PCIF 30 DIP switches installing B 1 PCIF 30 IC693PIF301 B 1 Index 7 Index PCIM 3 7 catalog numbe
272. ng Sources Adding Actions 4 69 Application Icon Steps Boolean Transitions branches 4 31 coils 4 30 contacts controls function blocks jump coils Jumps SFC 4 71 Labels SFC 4 72 GFK 1424B Index loops 4 73 Macro Steps 4 67 program comments SFC RLL Transitions rung comments Select Divergences 4 76 SFC transition coils Simultaneous Divergences 4 77 Steps 4 63 symbol descriptions 4 40 Adding a loop SFC 4 73 Addresses avoiding conflicts PCIF2 PCIF 30 PCIM Aligning controls 6 12 Arrays 4 12 pointers F 5 Assignment Structured Text 4 86 Authorization Authorized mode Axis Group Input Symbols TOOLLEN Axis Group Input symbols E 17 TOOLRAD Axis Group Input symbols E 16 Axis Group Output Symbols Axis Input Symbols E 13 FIXOFF Axis Input Symbols E14 JM and JP Axis Input Symbols E 15 TOOLOFF Axis Input Symbols Axis Output Symbols E 11 AXSJOGE 29 G 16 Backing up and restoring variables Bar control 6 16 Baud Rate Index 1 Index Bit String BIU Field Control sample configuration 3 33 Block display Motion Control Block Format Board Address BOOL 4 7 Box Branches connection to A 1JA 3 errors termination Button functions BYTE 4 7 C CASE 4 87 Catalog numbers CIMPLICITY HMI exporting symbols for 4 25 Clearing fault mod
273. ng CALC is shown below Example CALC ROL OUT VarBit IN BitString N RotateNum FunctionExample2 CALC ADD OUT VarNum Num1 Num2 Function Block Function blocks are called using the following form of the call CAL always call the function block The following are examples of the syntax used for a standard function block where ctu1 and ton1 are named instance of CTU and TON function blocks LD 10 LD TRUE ST ctu1 PV ST ton1 IN LD TRUE ST ton1 EN ST ctu1 EN LD t 30s LD In3 ST ton1 PT ST ctu1 CU CAL toni CAL ctu1 LD ton1 Q LD ctu1 Q ST Out2 ST Out3 Refer to Language Reference for standard function block descriptions and parameters PV EN CU Q etc 4 110 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Accumulator Relationships For function blocks there is no relationship between the accumulator and the function block The function block is always called the accumulator is not passed into the function block and after the function block returns the accumulator has the same value as it had before the function block was called For functions the accumulator has no effect on the function inputs When using CALC the function will not be called if the accumulator is FALSE When using CALCN the function will not be called if the accumulator is TRUE When the function returns if the return value is a BOOL the return value is automatically loaded into the accumulator If the function return val
274. ng list of data types For example if a function input accepts a data type of ANY_NUM then a symbol having a data type of REAL any of the integer types INT DINT etc or any of the bit string types WORD DWORD etc can be assigned to the function input If a function input accepts a data type of ANY_BIT then only a symbol having a data type of WORD DWORD etc can be assigned to the function input Data Type Hierarchy ANY_ ANY ANY_NUM ANY_REAL REAL OR_ ANY_INT_OR_BIT ANY_INT DINT INT UINT DERIVED ANY_BIT DWORD WORD BYTE BOOL STRING ANY_DATE DATE TIME_OF_DAY TIME Derived User Defined Data Type For more sophisticated data handling you can create your own structured data types A structure can contain several members of different base types or user defined structured types Consider a user defined structure named UserStructure01 having and integer type USInt member a Boolean type USBool and a string type USString The individual members can be accessed in the following manner UserStructure01 USInt 101 UserStructure01 USBool TRUE UserStructure01 USString ABC User defined types are valid any place that accepts an ANY or USER DEFINED data type Refer to Editing User Defined Data Types for more information GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 11 Arrays To access a particular element of an array enter the symbol name followed by s
275. nt Any Structured Text statement GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 93 Example The following code fragment causes an action with a label of ActionLabel to start running ActionLabel VarString1 Action should be running REPEAT Statement The REPEAT loop repeatedly executes iterates a statement list contained within the REPEAT END_ REPEAT construct until an exit condition is satisfied It executes the statement list first then checks for the exit condition This looping construct is useful when the statement list needs to be executed at least once Format REPEAT StatementList UNTIL BooleanExpression END REPEAT Where BooleanExpression Any expression that resolves to a Boolean value StatementList Any set of Structured Text statements Operation The StatementList is executed If the BooleanExpression is FALSE then the loop is repeated otherwise if the BooleanExpression is TRUE the loop is exited The statement list executes at least once since the BooleanExpression is evaluated at the end of the loop The END_REPEAT keyword causes the system to do an I O scan at the end of every iteration of the REPEAT loop Alternatively you can use the END_REPEAT_NOWAIT keyword to loop without an I O scan Note It is possible to create an infinite loop that since the control system runs at the highest priority does not return control to the operating system especially w
276. nter symbol to be initialized The input of the MOVE function block is either another pointer symbol or a direct symbol preceded by the pointer reference operator amp Pointers cannot be passed into FILE functions bit array functions SHL AND_BITS etc and STRING_TO_ARRAY functions Using PC Control August 1998 GFK 1424B Array Pointers To use an array pointer Assume IntArray is an array of ten integers IntArray ARRAY 1 10 OF INT and pArray is defined as a pointer to integer For array symbols the name of the array in this case IntArray is similar to a pointer to the array data values However the array name can never be assigned to a different location it will always point to the array pArray amp lntArray pArray is assigned the location of IntArray It points to the first element of the array pArray index Varlnt1 IntArray index is assigned the value of VarInt1 pArray amp IntArray index pArray points to the element of the array located at index To use a pointer to an array of user structures Assume an array of user structures structArray structArray ARRAY 1 10 OF USER_STRUCT1 is defined and a pointer to the user structure pStructArray is defined pStructArray PTR TO USER_STRUCT1 pStructArray amp structArray pStructArray is assigned the location of structArray pStructArray 5 intWember1 Varint1 The intWember1 member of structArray 5 is assigned the value of Var
277. ntrol Runtime Subsystems 1 Right mouse click on the Runtime icon on the Task Bar 2 Select Shutdown Runtime Starting the Program Editor 1 From Program Manager open the PC Control Applications group 2 Click the Program Editor icon GFK 1424B Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 5 PC Control Runtime Subsystems The Program Manager Program Execution and I O Scanner subsystems are visually represented by the PC Control Runtime icon The Event Log has its own icon The subsystems consist of the following The Program Manager The Program Manager prepares programs for execution and manages the external interface to Program Execution and the I O Scanner Program Execution The Program Execution subsystems have real time process priority meaning CPU time is given to Program Execution before all normal applications including mouse updates and disk access 1 0 Scanner I O Scanner subsystems have real time process priority meaning CPU time is given to I O Scanner before all normal applications including mouse updates and disk access When the I O Scanner starts up it searches for I O cards If no cards are detected in the PC backplane a message box is displayed Push the Simulate button to ignore the missing hardware and run the PC Control software in simulation mode In simulation mode the inputs and outputs are resident in a memory table but the values are not read from or written to the I O devices User simulation software
278. o Fit Window button on the tool bar Scale to fit window can also be used to scale action or transition RLL programs embedded in a SFC program To navigate using the Scale To Fit Window Scale the program to fit the window 2 Select the desired element 3 Remove the window scaling The view will scroll the selected element to the center of the screen if it is not in the last active unscaled view Turning Comments On and Off Descriptive comments can be added to application programs to document functions of the program The View Comments mode affects all open programs To toggle the View Comments mode Click View on the menu bar and select Program Comments or Use the View Comments button on the Tool bar to toggle the View Comments mode Note A check mark next to Program Elements and a depressed View Comments button indicates that comments are visible GFK 1424B Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 25 Setting System Options You can use the System Options dialog box to set parameters that affect the behavior and appearance of the control system System Options Ea Adjust Memory Sizes Display Properties Fonts amp Colors Symbol Enumeration m Display style Decimal C Hex Free Physical Memory paz KBytes Current Heap Size pos KBytes Requested Heap Size oe KBytes Current Data Table Size e KBytes Requested Data Table Size he KBytes Cancel Help Adjust Memory Sizes Tab Field Descripti
279. ods There are three general steps needed to configure an ActiveX control s methods e Select which of the control s methods will be called by the operator interface e Assign symbols to the method s arguments and return value if needed e Define when the method will be called Controls have a variable number of internal methods where each method is a function call to the control A function s arguments and return value can be one of many possible data types currently 38 Each of these data types may or may not be able to be mapped to a system supported data type If it is not possible to map a supported data type to a type that is expected in the method it will be impossible to call this method If you attempt to set up this method an appropriate error message appears Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B a Argument types for ActiveX controls start with VT_ The following table shows how the types are mapped to the supported data types ActiveX Control Data Type System Supported Data Type VT_BOOL BOOL VT_UIL VT_I1 BYTE VT_UI2 WORD VT_UI4 VT_UINT DWORD VT_I2 VT_INT INT VT_I4 DINT VT_R4 VT_R8 REAL VT_BSTR STRING VT_VOID VT_EMPTY VT_NULL Not mapped VT_PTR Pointer to all above VT_ types will be supported One part of configuring an ActiveX control is to define when the control s methods should be called This is done on a timer basis by a 200 milliseco
280. odulus MOD Returns the remainder of dividing the first input by the second input Statement Abort All Move MOVE Returns the result of converting the input value to the same data type as the output Multiplication MUL Returns the result of multiplying the input values Negation NEG Returns the result of changing the sign of the input value Square Root SQRT Returns the square root of the input value Subtraction SUB Returns the result of subtracting the second input value from the first input value Miscellaneous Description Aborts all programs in the runtime subsystem Change MMI Screen Displays a specified HMI screen Appendix G Instruction Set Reference G 19 Trigonometric and Logarithmic Arc Cosine ACOS Calculates the arc cosine of the input The result is in radians Arc Sine ASIN Calculates the arc sine of the input The result is in radians ARC Tangent ATAN Calculates the arc tangent of the input The result is in radians Cosine COS Calculates the cosine of the input which must be in radians Exponential EXP Calculates the natural log exponentiation of the input value raises e to the power of the input Natural Log LN Calculates the natural logarithm of a value Logarithm LOG Calculates the base 10 logarithm of a value Sine SIN Calculates the sine of the input which must be in radians Tangen
281. omatically Double click the icon beside Setup exe The PC Control Setup screen will appear 2 Read the introduction Click Next to continue with the install procedure 3 The Select Destination Directory dialog box will appear The default directory is C CIMPLICITY PCCONTROL To change the default directory click the Browse button and select an alternate directory To accept the directory click Next 4 The PC Control files will be installed in the destination directory This process can take several minutes to complete Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Running and Authorizing PC Control Software After installing PC Control you can run the software in Demo mode or you can register the software to operate in Authorized mode Demo mode is restricted to 32 T O points and 2 hours of operation To run PC Control in Demo mode 1 Locate the Control Program Editor icon from Programs as shown f amp CIMPLICITY 4b CRMC Latest README B Control gt Ey Operator Interface G Hmi gt Operator Interface Help Program Editor Program Editor Help ff Runtime Engine EY To Report Problems FA UPS Monitor The Key Validation dialog box appears 2 Click the Demo button The License Information dialog box will appear 3 Read the agreement and click the I Agree button to accept and continue The Enter Password dialog box appears 4 Enter the default password 4 5 6 7 and click the Enter button
282. on Display Style Displays memory size options in Decimal or Hex Free Physical Memory The current free physical memory available on the computer This cannot be edited but depends on the type and number of open Windows applications Current Heap Size This shows the current Heap setting and cannot be edited The Heap is memory allocated on start up for the control system The Heap is used up by open application programs and symbols As it is used up this setting may need to be increased However the larger the Heap size the less memory will be available for other Windows applications Requested Heap Size If the Heap needs to be increased or can be decreased provide a new Heap size here The Heap can be larger than physical memory as it will use virtual memory from the swap file If you run out of control system memory during an editing session you will get a message suggesting to increase the Heap Size 2 26 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Field Description Current Data Table Size This is memory used for symbols and depends on the symbol data type For example large arrays use more data table memory If you run out of data table memory during an editing session you will get a message suggesting to increase the data table size Requested Data Table Size If necessary provide a new data table size Lock Heap in Memory If this field is set it will improve the determinism of the control system When the contro
283. on or remote system Also the board features a hardware watchdog that forces all outputs to a reset condition and opens a relay if the PC stops updating outputs for any reason Watchdog Enable E D ra Jumper om JP1 To pip Switches PCIM 30 U Installing the PCIF 30 GFK 1424B To install the PCIF 30 you must reserve eight contiguous I O ports in your computer s I O port space This is done by setting the board address using the dip switches Before beginning the actual installation it is a good idea to determine what ports you can use that will not conflict with I O ports designated for devices already installed in your computer B 1 B 2 How to Begin 1 First refer to the topic Suggested Addresses to Avoid Conflicts 2 Determine if the suggested addresses resources are available on your system 3 Set the dip switches on the PCIF 30 and install it in your computer 4 Set the Watchdog enable jumper to D for disabled Suggested Addresses to Avoid Conflicts Board Address Starting address of the 8 byte I O port space you need to reserve in your computer for the PCIF 30 This address must be on an 8 byte boundary These addresses are usually OK to use 310 348 2E0 228 318 34C 2E4 22C 340 3E0 220 344 3E4 224 Check your computer s system configuration to verify that there is no conflict Determining 1 0 Port Resource Conflicts When installing the PCI
284. on_D With multiple branches logic evaluation takes place from left to right If all Transitions are FALSE program flow halts until one Transition becomes TRUE You can define the Transitions for the Jump by either of the following methods e A Boolean Transition consisting of a Boolean expression that is composed in Structured Text e AnRLL Transition consisting of a single RLL rung with an output coil having the same name as the Transition itself J ump and Label Parameters ump Target Label _ Specifies Label to which program flow is transferred Label Name Specifies point in SFC where program flow resumes Labels must start with an alphabetical character and be followed by any alphanumeric characters and or an underscore Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 55 How SFCs are Solved 4 56 Program flow in an SFC moves from top to bottom The code within each Step is executed When the code has completed program flow moves to the next program element Step the code within that step is executed Transition program flow continues when the transition becomes true Any step in an SFC takes a minimum of two I O scans to complete In the first scan any actions attached to the step are evaluated If there are no looping structures i e FOR WHILE REPEAT any Structured Text logic is solved to completion The transition is tested after all the logic has been solved in the second scan If looping occurs in a Stru
285. onfig The following configuration window will appear a Empty Slot System Conigureton Neme feom BV Empty Slot z System Daecripton Ernpry Slor3 optional PF Empty Slot 4 4 By 3 Empty Slot 5 Sweep Interval milixeeonds SF Empty Slot 6 Close amp Seve Era gioie Conta Hei Clear Ail Fout CONAGHORS Append NUMI Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B B In the tree display on the left side of the window select the slot that you want to configure The following window will appear Y Config E Sm B QS Empty Slot 2 PCIF2 GE Fanuc Series 90 30 1 0 Interface SF Empty Slot3 SF Empty Slot 4 QF Empty Slot 5 SF Empty Slot 6 C Inthe Board Type field select PCIF2 for the PIF400 Click the Define Board button The PCIF2 Board dialog box will appear PCIF2 Board Version 4 00 0021 PCIF21 D Set configuration parameters for the PIF400 Make sure the Port Address and RAM address are set correctly See Check System Resources on page C 7 e Port Address should match the setting of DIP switch S1 e RAM Address should select an available block of 32Kbytes For additional configuration details consult PC Control online help GFK 1424B Appendix C Personal Computer Interface PCIF2 for Series 90 30 I O C 9 C 10 After setting the Port and RAM addresses click the Set and Test Board button to verify the installation is correct The Runtime subsystem must not b
286. ontrol displays a scale and a rotating pointer The rotating pointer tracks the current value of the symbol assigned to the gauge As the symbol value changes the pointer moves clockwise or counter clockwise to indicate the current symbol value Limits can be given that change the scale color to the specified limit color Four gauge styles are available The Edit Gauge dialog box is shown in the following figure and described in the following table Gauge Symbol Help Z Symbol Manager Cancel Gauge Name Name Text Color W Gauge Units Units Surface Color LC Bevel a Gauge Limits Gauge Style Max Raw Value 100 Full Right C Left Top Min Raw Value Max Display Value 100 r Gauge Dial Colors Normal Color LI Limit Display Value 180 Limit Color L Limit2 Display Value 90 Limit2 Color LI v Display Increment 10 Min Display Value 111 Select Font Field Description Gauge Symbol Specifies the symbol whose value is tracked by the rotating pointer If necessary a new symbol can be defined by opening the Symbol Manager with the Symbol Manager button Gauge Name Specifies a name for the control For screen documentation only Gauge Units Specifies units for the control For screen documentation only Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 25 Field Description Text Color Specifies a color f
287. ontrol topics Use Help to get general information about a product feature to learn how to perform a specific procedure or to find the definition of an unfamiliar term The three ways to find information in Help are by viewing the Help contents performing a Help search or using context sensitive help Help Contents The Contents tab of Help shows the main topics covered in Help To access the Help Contents choose the Help menu and select Contents Help Tapica Program Editor Halp s8THey Sted e Corfigwaton and Operation Progresnming Lagaya Ratercice Arierence Sossen of Terms Double clicking the topic name or the book icon beside it opens the book and displays the topics subheadings To view the contents of one of the subheadings double click it GFK 1424B Chapter 1 Introduction 1 7 Searching Help 2 The Index tab of Help allows you to type the topic you are looking for or scroll through an alphabetical list of topics To access the Help Index choose the Help menu and select Search for Help On or click the Help Search toolbar button mi gram Editos Help About Croaing Saquenta Funchon Chars houlOwergancak About Macro Ste About Frogin Floe Gortra Features AboutSimuteneous Overgences houtthe Gooigan and ALL Trenton Modas bout tha ODE intarface About Ternitans ABS To initiate a search type the topic name in the field or scroll through the list Double click the selected topic to access help
288. ool Changes Feature If you want an RS 274D program to suspend motion execution whenever a tool T command is executed select the Suspend on Tool Changes option box This option lets the application program suspend RS 274D execution until your application logic indicates that the tool change has completed The remainder of the program can then be executed When a tool change is executed the motion program is suspended and the axis_group WA IT flag is activated until the application program sets the axis_group CONT flag which causes the motion program to resume and the axis_group WAIT and axis_group CONT flags to be reset by the controller The application programmer is responsible for supplying logic that sets the axis_group CONT flag after the axis_group WAIT flag is activated and the tool change has completed The axis_group is the name of the axis group to which the tool is associated Define axis group names are defined in the project configuration file Using Program Flow Control in Motion Applications As an enhancement to the RS 274D specification the control system software lets you use the WHILE and IF GOTO commands with other Motion Control commands to enhance program flow control See e Using the WHILE Command on page E 19 e Using the IF GOTO Command on page E 21 Using the WHILE Command The commands within the WHILE loop are executed repeatedly until a lt Boolean expression gt evaluates to FALSE Then p
289. oolbar Button To S O SFC Toolbar Button Too o Select diverge Simultaneous diverge Application icon 3 Add Comment Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 17 Status Bar The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the Program Editor window The status bar shows the name of the current configuration and the status of e NUM lock e SCROLL lock e CAPS lock e keyboard keys e insert and append modes Answers to Common Questions Does PC Control Require a PLC e PC Control does not require a PLC device to do logic execution e PC Control performs logic execution in the PC without the need for a PLC e PC Control can use PC based scanner cards to control PLC style I O racks modules and other devices Does PC Control Perform Parity Checking PCs can be purchased and configured to provide parity checking on all system memory The PC Control does not do parity checking on application programs but it does do background checksum calculations on all running application programs If an error is detected the application program is stopped faulted and the operator is allowed to determine what should be done to recover What Happens on a Parity Error If a parity error is detected in the system Windows NT will stop and display a error screen with a blue background indicating a Data Bus Error and the location where the error was detected The system must be rebooted to continue The PC Control system makes use of
290. op and left of the top leftmost element in the desired group be sure the cursor is not over any element 3 Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor As the cursor is dragged a selection box will appear 4 When the desired elements are in the selection box release the left mouse button All elements entirely inside of the selection box will be selected Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 37 4 38 Special Notes about multiple selection To select a branch connector in an RLL program both connectors and all elements on the branch must be inside of the selection box To select a rung in an RLL program the left and right power rails and all elements on the rung must be inside of the selection box To select a loop in a SFC program the topmost loop arrow all loop transitions and all elements contained in the loop must be inside of the selection box To select a jump in a SFC program the jump diamond all transitions and all target labels must be inside of the selection box To select a select diverge or a simultaneous diverge in a SFC program the top and bottom bars and all elements in the diverge must be inside of the selection box Moving a Branch 1 Select the Selector tool from the RLL Tool Bar or the SFC Tool Bar 2 Move the cursor over the desired branch connector Press and hold the left mouse button Drag the branch connector to the desired location the cursor will change to a bra
291. or EMS memory D4000 Used for EMS memory D8000 Usually OK DCO000 Usually OK E0000 Usually OK E4000 Usually OK E8000 Usually OK EC000 Usually OK Check your computer s system configuration to verify that there is no conflict Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B IRQ Interrupt for the PCIM Check to see if IRQ 10 or 11 is being used IRQs you can configure for the PCIM are 3 4 5 6 9 10 or 11 to be shared among all GENI daughter boards in your system Check your computer s system configuration to verify that there is no conflict Some common IRQ associations are shown below IRQ3 Serial COM2 IRQ4 Serial COM1 IRQ5 Network LPT 2 IRQ6 Floppy disk Determining I O Port Memory and Interrupt Resource Conflicts When installing and configuring the PCIM you will assign values for the EEPROM address Controller Port address Memory Base address I O Base address and IRQ You must choose values for these parameters that do not conflict with those used by other devices installed in your computer These are the resources used by the devices in your computer Windows NT 4 0 Resources Log in under an account with system administrator privileges 1 Press the Start button 2 From the Start menu choose Programs Administrative Tools Windows NT Diagnostics 3 Click the Resources tab then review the I O Port Memory and IRQ dialog boxes for unused addresses 4 Find a block of 4 unused unlist
292. or the control name units and scale numbering Surface Color Specifies a background color for the control Bevel Bevel affects the border of the control Bevel values are from 0 to 6 A bevel of 0 makes the control appear flat Increasing the bevel gives the control a 3 D appearance Gauge Limits Max Raw Value Min Raw Value Max Display Value Min Display Value Limit1 Display Value Limit2 Display Value Display Increment Specifies the maximum and minimum values to which the gauge pointer responds They limit the value of the symbol tracked by the pointer Any symbol value above the maximum raw value positions the moving pointer to its upper limit and any symbol value below the minimum raw value positions the moving pointer at its lower limit By default the moving pointer moves in a clockwise direction as the control symbol value increases To make the pointer move in a counter clockwise direction swap the Max Raw Value and Min Raw Value values Specifies the maximum and minimum numbering of the scale Specifies limits at which the gauge scale changes color For example to show alarm conditions Specifies the scale numbering increment Gauge Style Full circle Semi circle with the rounded side up Semi circle with the rounded side to the left Semi circle with the rounded side to the right Gauge Dial Colors Normal the color of the gauge scale below a limit Limit 1 the color of the
293. ou want to insert the new rung vvi vii_on 3 Click the left mouse button The editor inserts the rung at the specified location Adding a Branch E 1 Click on the Branch Tool on the RLL toolbar The cursor changes into the Branch Tool cursor 2 Move the cursor to the location on the rung where you want to insert the branch Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 31 vki vii_on aa 3 Click the left mouse button The editor inserts the branch at the specified location vki viv1_on Hei HO 4 After inserting the branch you can adjust the contact points as necessary To move the contact points of a branch 1 Click on the Select Tool R 2 Move the cursor over the contact point that you want to move and press the left mouse button 3 With the mouse button depressed move the cursor and the contact to the new location on the rung and release the button The editor connects the branch at the new location on the rung vvi viv1_on i ee You can insert a branch that contains no logic a shunt You can use a shunt to temporarily disable a section of logic without deleting it from the program Used with a contact that turns off power flow to the logic in question the shunt maintains power flow across the rest of the rung This feature is useful for debugging your program You can also move a contact point from rung to rung without deleting the logic
294. our SFC program you should save the work you have done Use the File Save menu command or the file save button on the editor tool bar to save the active file to its current name and directory Since you are saving this file for the first time the Program Editor displays the Save As dialog box so you can name the file Type cookie_maker in the File Name field and click the Save button The title bar on the SFC should look like this 7 cookie_maker sfc of x Exercise 4 Creating Symbols With the new program cookie_maker SCF selected as the active window access the Symbol Manager by press the symbol manager button on the editor tool bar T 4 The Symbol Manager displays the I O symbol names you defined in the Configuration Utility Since you can access an I O symbol from any application program in a project I O symbols are marked with a red G in front of the name indicating a Global symbol Adding Local symbols e Click the Add Local button at the top of the Symbol Manager In the Symbol Detail dialog box type the symbol name FirstScan Make sure the Type list box is set to BOOL and enter 1 for an initial value Click the OK button to finish and add the new symbol to the Symbol Manager list e Add another Local symbol Name Shift Type BOOL Initial Value 0 When finished Click the OK button Adding Global symbols e Global symbols are created in the same manner as Locals Click the Add Global button at the to
295. p of the Symbol Manager e Create two new Global symbols The first called Hopper of Type INT and an initial value of 0 The second called State of Type INT and an initial value of 0 GFK 1424B Appendix D Application Examples D 9 e Symbol Manager COOKIE_MAKER SFC PCDIO CFG x a na T BoardInfo Listtypes ALLSYMBOLS m AddLoca l Add Global Copy Symbol Delete Symbal Help Pint Locals Print Globals Local User Types Global User Types 3j 1 0 Mem Space _ _Initial Value G buzzer Output L FirstScan Memory 1 G Hopper Memory 0 G light Output G light2 Output G light3 Output Output Output Output Output Memory Memory e Click the OK button at the top of the Symbol Manager to close the window and accept the new symbols Because you have added new Global symbols the Program Editor asks what you want to do with the Global information Click the Save amp Activate button to save the Global symbols in the System Configuration and to activate the new configuration Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B 2 Exercise 5 Adding Transition Logic e Double click on the leftmost transition in the simultaneous diverge to open the edit transition logic dialog box Edit Transition Logic Ed Transition logic Hopper gt 3000 _NoT lt EE Use Symbol Symbol Manager No lt EN R Symbol list buzzer BOOL FirstScan BOOL jo PELE light1 BO
296. perator Interface software e How to create Operator Interface screens e Symbol Operations Editing Symbols Activating Configurations e Creating Operator Interface Applications Standard Controls ActiveX Controls For information about Motion Controls refer to Appendix E 6 1 s Section 1 Overview of the Operator Interface Editor Starting the Operator Interface The Operator Interface software lets you create operator interfaces for an application and lets operators use the interfaces you create To start Operator Interface software e Locate the PC Control Applications menu from the Windows Start menu and choose Operator Interface e If the Program Editor is open choose Operator Interface from the Program Editor Tools menu The Operator Interface starts in activation mode The last operator interface file opened for the current project is used to define the operator interface The start screen defined in the operator interface file is the first operator interface screen displayed If the runtime subsystems are not running when the Operator Interface is started a prompt appears providing an opportunity to start the runtime subsystems Access Levels Access levels and access codes are used to prevent unauthorized access to the application programs and configuration data There are five access levels 0 4 with a different access code for each The following table describes the privileges of each level Access Level You ca
297. perator interface screen and communicate with the run time engine provided the data types are compatible with the control system software Note the following Knowledgeable users can write their own ActiveX controls or they can be obtained from third party sources It is your responsibility to ascertain the suitability of any third party ActiveX control for an application and to obtain its documentation Poorly behaved controls may cause problems contact the control implementer regarding any problems you are having as a result of using an ActiveX control Third party ActiveX controls will not have any internal knowledge of the programmable control system Examples of the knowledge they will not have include how to command an ESTOP and how to start stop and abort the programmable control system programs ActiveX controls require a registration process that allows them to be seen by Windows NT or Windows 95 Control registration may or may not be provided by the control implementers To accommodate control registration a registration process is implemented within the Operator Interface Screen Editor ActiveX Control Sources 6 34 Two third party ActiveX control packages have been tested and are recommended sources for ActiveX controls VICOMponents Version 4 0 by ComputerBoards Inc ComputerBoards Inc 125 High Street Mansfield MA 02048 www computerboards com Global Majic Software ActiveX controls Global Majic Softwar
298. ple G 54 axis FIXOFF 0 cs fasor Assign values to the array elements in a Structured Text Step that precedes the Motion Control Step containing the G commands Using the TOOLOFF Axis Input Symbols The preparatory commands G 45 to G 48 select tool offsets All four commands require the D command be used in the same block The D command specifies which axis TOOLOFF element to select The axis TOOLOFF axis input symbols contain the actual offset values used by the D commands The relationship between the D commands and the symbols containing their respective offset values is shown in the following example D Command Symbol D 0 axis TOOLOFF 0 Da faxisTOOLOFFE Assign tool offset values to the array elements in a Structured Text Step that precedes the Motion Control Step containing the G and D commands Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Using the J M and J P Axis Input Symbols The axis JP and axis JM axis input symbols are Boolean symbols that cause an axis to jog in the plus and minus directions respectively These symbols have the following requirements e The axis JP and axis JM symbols are not functional until you assign values to the axis JSPD and axis JTYPE axis input symbols to specify the jog speed and type e The axis referenced by the axis JP and axis JM symbols must be either in a group with no other axes or if other axes are in the group they cannot be under the control of another
299. program can be started using this method 1 From Windows NT launch a simple text editor to create a text file Once created you will need to save the file with a BAT extension Enter the following two lines in the text file start c CIMPLICITY PC Control bin runtime exe RUN c CIMPLICITY PC Control MyProject Main sst start c CIMPLICITY PC Control bin oicfg exe Note Make sure that the RUN command above is entered in all CAPITAL letters Only one SFC application program can be started using this method 2 Make sure the path to the bin directory is correct for your machine 3 Make sure that the path to your project folder and the name of the SFC program is correct Use a SST extension for the SFC file instead of SFC because this is the Structure Text version of the SFC file that the Runtime compiler needs instead of the binary SFC file that the Program Editor requires 4 Using the Program Editor make sure that the current project and active configuration are correctly selected for this application Parse the SFC file to make sure that the corresponding SST file exists and is current 5 Use the Operator Interface utility to select the appropriate OPI file to use at power up 6 Follow the instructions in your Windows NT help files to add the Batch file to your NT Startup folder 7 Reboot your system to test 5 4 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Starting Programs with the Run With Restart Com
300. programs Only these files need to be copied to transfer an application 2 34 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O Once a project has been created the next step is usually to create a System Configuration for the project The System Configuration contains a collection of hardware specific information and global variables that are used across all the control programs in a given project Ideally before configuring your system s I O you will install the I O interface board s and the I O But you can configure your system before installing the hardware by clicking the Simulate button at the board level dialog box for the I O interface board s you are using For information on installing and configuring interface boards refer to the following appendices T O System Board Cat No Appendix Genius PCIM IC660ELB921 one port Appendix A IC660ELB922 two ports Series 90 30 PCIF1 1C693PIF301 Appendix B Series 90 30 PCIF2 1C693PIF400 Appendix C GFK 1424B This chapter provides the following information e Overview of System I O Configuration e Configuring Genius I O e Configuring Series 90 30 I O e Configuring Other Field Buses e Dynamic Data Exchange DDE e Import Export Configuration 3 1 Section 1 Help With 3 2 Overview The System Configuration dialog box contains a collection of the hardware specific information and global var
301. quare brackets with the number of the element you wish to access For example to access the fifth element of an array symbol called Myarray you would type Myarray 5 This is assuming you have defined the lower bound of the array as 1 You can also index into an array by placing a symbol name of type INT inside the square brackets Pointer Symbols Pointers should be used by experts only Misuse can result in unpredictable operation and great difficulty in debugging Structured text has two pointer operators the pointer reference amp operator and the pointer dereference operator These operators are used in indirect addressing operations Information for advanced users on the use of pointers is provided in Appendix E Symbol Manager The Symbol Manager is used to view create edit copy and delete variables and constant symbols and function block instances I O points and system symbols can only be viewed The Symbol Manager displays a list of local symbols defined in the active file and global symbols defined in the active configuration You can use drag and drop in the Symbol Manager to add symbols to Structured Text program statements Instruction List program statements or RLL program contacts and coils You can also drag and drop symbol information to other OLE capable software programs such as Microsoft WordPad Word Excel and others Symbols can also be selected from lists in various dialog boxes Opening the Symbol Manage
302. r 4 12 To open the Symbol Manager select Symbol Manager from the Program Editor or Operator Interface Editor Tools menu e The Symbol Manager can also be opened from various dialog boxes in the editors e You cannot have the Symbol Manager open in both the Program Editor and Operator Interface Editor Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B The following figure shows an example of the Symbol Manager The description of T O and memory symbols is displayed in table format In front of each symbol name is a G for global symbols or an L for local symbols An asterisk preceding the symbol name indicates it is a pointer symbol If the symbol name corresponds to an T O point the board information is displayed in the appropriate column Symbol Monager ALLY ALL CONFIGE CFG CiPOM Neto PCM _Networ PCIM_Netyor S PCIM_Nenvor iS POM Netvor S ATIO_AVG iS AT_IO_MAX AT_LOGIC_A RT LOGIC L GFK 1424B sacs g e input input input Input Input Input Memory Memory Memar Memory Memary Memar Hemons Memory Memo Symbol Manager Controls Control Description Local If checked the corresponding symbol type is displayed in the Global symbol list Board Info If checked the board info is displayed interface board rack etc List Types Filters the symbol list by data type and function block type Add Local Create and add a local symbol Add Global Create and add a global symbol Copy Symbol Copy
303. r ie Revie So A EA eon 4 93 LAB Bliss cists tissue illic iicsteten sitin i TT 4 93 REPEAT Statement essere ea aeneae eee eaa aese adres e 4 94 SLOAN NE A E E E Ae eaten T 4 95 WHILE Statement na a N R EEE STON 4 95 Structured Text Operators os ccsissscseesseteststes sacbssteedadstes sheesseesseysbusceeveensevebevencbeeseeds 4 97 About the Statement Typessi tvesasnsiios n e A tien apnea tiem 4 98 Using PIDs in an Application Program eee eee eeeeeeeeeceeeceeecesecesecesecnsecsaesaeeens 4 98 Controlling the Flow of RLL and Structured Text Application Programs 4 100 Monitoring and Testing Application Programs and Symbols eee eee 4 102 Section 5 Instruction List Programming s seseseeseeeeee 4 105 OVETVIEW Fi cuintiicts utiilalaasiaauhnugnintaltaie anes 4 105 Opening an Instruction List Document 00 eee eee cee cseeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenseenseenaes 4 105 Entering Instructions ois sc ssssssesses tse ssh sensit sustsavessqedscasogsoseest co shsnsesesvensscobasnsesseseases 4 105 Edine IMS tUCHOMS essiens Seeds cesipedpsuy de e fesse aa ea ns ar is 4 106 Languag OVerVieW incisiu tinner ga ista iset 4 107 Instruction List Syntax ssa a E E A S E Saat 4 107 OPCLratOrs reese iis es oinei o EE E a AE E A ee EERE AA tad ee 4 108 Functions and Function Blocks seesseeseseeessseeessseesssserrrsesreeresreresrerenserreeresreeees 4 110 Program Examples s ccccivccccadasecesecasvexenstesyanavaraceesndaceonsecosavedevs
304. r state 0 to open the Define Indicator dialog box e Jn the Text edit box type Off Then click the Select Light Color button and select a red colored light icon e Click the OK button to accept the changes and close the dialog box e Repeat the same process for state 1 only have the text read On and select a green light When finished the dialog box should look like this Edit Indicator Ea State Symbol igr v Indicator State Definitions State Indicator 0 Define Indicator Face i Sas 2 _Defne indicator Face 3 Define Indicator Face 4 Ls Define Indicator Face 5 O e Define Indicator Face 6 ss Define Indicator Face 7 i Define Indicator Face OK Cancel Help GFK 1424B Appendix D Application Examples D 21 e Using Copy Paste create a total of six indicators Assign the State Symbol for the five new indicators to light2 light6 e Using the tool bar drop in one more Indicator Assign the State Symbol for the new indicator to the symbol State e For states 0 through 3 assign the following text state 0 Filling Hopper state Mixing Batter state 2 Cooking Cookies state 3 Done Text Display So that you don t get the light indicators confused you should add a text display above each to label them E e Select the Text tool from the Operator interface tool bar The cursor will change to the Text cursor Move the cursor over
305. rary authorization additional time can be purchased Valid for run time only systems To obtain the a free copy of the Temporary Authorization utility call the phone number given in the Authorization dialog box Selecting temporary authorization displays the Temporary Authorization buttons and the amount of temporary authorization time remaining OK turns on temporary authorization and starts the temporary authorization timer providing there is time remaining Cancel returns to run time only Add More Minutes allows you to purchase additional temporary authorization time for this system Call the phone number given in the Authorization dialog box and provide your code from the Code field You will be given a key in return that must be entered in the Key field to add the additional temporary authorization time Turns off temporary authorization and stops the temporary authorization timer Valid for run time only systems Provides full authorization for all features for four days After four days PC CONTROL will return to demo mode Once it has been selected you are warned that this is a one time authorization until the hard drive has been reformatted If you select to continue a signature is written to the hard drive Toolbars and Status Bar 2 16 Tool bars contain push buttons for commonly executed functions Standard Toolbar Button Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B RLL T
306. ration Action Name Specifies the name of the Action Editing an Action 1 Click on the Select Tool R and then double click on the Action The Edit Action Association dialog box appears Enter the information to configure the Action 2 Click on OK to save your changes The system closes the dialog box and then displays an empty rung of RLL ready for editing 3 Enter the RLL code Editing the RLL of an Action 4 Click on the Select Tool i 5 Double click on the right half of the Action as shown The system displays the RLL code for the Action Enter the RLL code 4 70 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Editing a Configuration Parameter of an Action 1 Click on the Select Tool 2 Double click on the left half of the Action as shown The system displays the Edit Action Association dialog box for the Action E PaintColorAction 3 Enter the information for configuring the Action 4 Click OK to save your changes Adding SFC Program Flow Controls You can control program flow with Jumps Loops and Divergences Adding a ump z A Jump to Label combination is available that allows SFC execution to transfer to any location indicated by a label element 1 Click Edit on the menu bar and select Boolean Transition 2 Click the Jump Tool on the SFC menu bar The cursor changes into the Jump Tool cursor 3 Move the cursor to the location in the program where you want to place the new Jump
307. ration press Esc To move controls using the keyboard 1 Select the controls 2 Use the arrow keys to move the control group one pixel in the direction of the arrow key 6 10 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Sizing Controls To size a control using the mouse 1 Select the controls If the control can be sized size handles appear on each corner and side of the control 2 Move the cursor over one of the size handles The cursor changes to a sizing arrow indicating the direction in which the control can be sized 3 Click and drag the selected sizing handle to stretch or shrink the control A black border shows the new bounding area of the control group 4 Once the control is sized release the mouse button To cancel the operation press Esc Copying Cutting and Pasting GFK 1424B Copy cut and paste operations are often used together Copy saves selections to the clipboard Cut deletes the selection and saves it to the clipboard Paste inserts the clipboard contents into the current screen You can cut copy and paste between screens Although the copy cut and paste operations work in a similar manner as in other Windows applications the controls clipboard format is not compatible with other applications Controls can only be copied and pasted within or between screens To copy a control e Select the control then choose Copy from the Edit or context menu or use the keyboard Ctrl C keys
308. rd to make connections and repairs e To configure an I O board click on the empty slots 1 graphic on the left hand side of the dialog box Once a slot is selected the right side of the dialog box will change to look like the one below 1Y Configt olx m System PC Slot Name Sion Board Type None x L Empty Slot 2 Board Description 7 optional BD Emy Sot3 eei d ee Empty Slot 4 QP Empty Slot 5 Goose amp Save Cancel Activate Contia Help _ Reset 0_ PF Empty Slot 6 e The new dialog includes a drop down menu labeled board type The drop down list includes all the PC CONTROL I O drivers installed on the system e Using the drop down list select the Industrial Computer Source PCDIO device driver If this driver does not appear on your list you must exit the PC CONTROL software and install the device driver using the I O driver setup disks e Once you have the board selected click the Define Board button to configure the software to communicate with the board GFK 1424B Appendix D Application Examples D 3 Define Board The Define Board dialog box is unique to each I O board The dialog is used to configure PC CONTROL to be able to communicate with the particular I O board selected e For this example use the default information provided in the dialog box as shown below If you have an I O simulator it should be configured to work at these defaults If you do not have an I O simulator installed
309. re between 0 and 11 Some interrupt levels are standard across most PCs and should not be used Here is a list of common uses COMI and COM3 IRQ4 COM2 and COM4 IRQ3 Floppy IRQ6 LPT1 IRQ7 IRQ1 and 2 are always in use by the system hardware Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 3 Working with Configuration Files Elements of a Configuration A configuration allows you to define the I O structure and assign tag names to I O points and I O ports All configurations have a cfg file name All configuration operations are performed from the Program Editor Creating a New Configuration 1 Start the Program Editor 2 Click File and select New Config The configuration dialog box appears Y Config cfg 6 xj 8 System Configuration Name Config Empty Slot ts i i oT L Empty Slot2 5 z System Description Empty Slot3 optional ZB Empty Slot 4 a SP Empty Slot 5 Sweep Interval 50 milliseconds Editing an Existing Configuration File 1 Start the Program Editor 2 Click File and select Open Config The configuration dialog box appears 3 Edit the fields as desired and click Close and Save Activating a Configuration File Click Project and select Activate Config to activate a new configuration file for the active project The name of the active configuration file is displayed on the lower status bar of the Program Editor The active file is used by the runtime environment to determine the s
310. represent your access code and click OK To Set the Access Level to 0 Click Cancel button on the access keypad Changing Access Levels The access code for any level can be changed only from Operator Interface with a level 4 access code There is one access code for each level To change the access level password Click Access from the menu bar and select Enter Password A keypad appears 2 Click key four times The message Enter Access Level to Change Appears Click the number of the access level you want to change and click OK Click the new four digit number The message Enter new password again 5 Click the new four digit password again and click OK If you verify the new password correctly the password will be changed Note Click CANCEL on the keypad to set the access level to zero When attaching Control Functions to operator controls in the operator interface edit mode an access level can be specified to control the use of the each operator control Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Keyboard Shortcuts for the Operator Interface keo amm ooo S lt CONTROL gt While selecting controls adds the control to the selection group if the or control is not selected or removes the control from the selection group if the lt SHIFT gt control is already selected Moves the selected control s one pixel in the specified direction GFK 1424B Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 9 Menu Descr
311. result of raising a value to the power specified by a second value Determines the maximum of two values Determines the minimum of two values Returns the remainder of dividing the first input by the second input Move MOVE Returns the result of converting the input value to the same data type as the output Multiplication MUL Returns the result of multiplying the input values Negation NEG Returns the result of changing the sign of the input value Square Root SQRT Returns the square root of the input value Subtraction SUB Returns the result of subtracting the second input value from the first input value Miscellaneous Statement Abort All Description Aborts all programs in the runtime subsystem Display Message Displays a message in a Windows message box Program execution continues uninterrupted while the message window is displayed The operator can click on OK to dismiss the message Initialize Array Initializes all of the elements of an array to a specified value Message Window Displays a message in the Program Editor Output Window Change MMI Screen Displays a specified HMI screen Selection Statement Description Maximum MAX Determines the largest value of the inputs and returns that value as the output The function supports up to 16 inputs Minimum Determines the minimum value of the inputs and uses that value as
312. rogram flow continues with the next RS 274D command that follows the END _WHILE command WHILE Command Format WHILE lt Boolean expression gt DO lt RS 274 commands gt END_WHILE Where lt Boolean expression gt is any Structured Text expression that evaluates to a Boolean value lt RS 274 commands gt consists of normal RS 274D commands GFK 1424B Appendix E Motion Control E 19 WHILE Command Example The following is an example of the WHILE command Step9 T5 Step10 Step11 N0010X0 59Y 5 5F100 N0020X0 63Y 5 5 N0030X0 67Y 5 4 N0040X0 71Y 5 4 N0050X0 74Y 5 39 N0060X0 78Y 5 35 N0070X0 81Y 5 3 NOO80X0 84Y 5 25 N0090X0 88Y 5 2 WHILE T13 DO NO100X0 91Y 5 14 NO110X0 95Y 5 09 N0120X0 99Y 5 21 N0130X1 03Y 4 9 NO140X1 07Y 4 88 N0150X1 11Y 4 8 END_WHILE N0160X1 13Y 4 71 N0170X1 15Y 4 6 N0180X1 15Y 4 53 N0190X1 16Y 4 41 N0200X1 16Y 4 31 When step10 is active and T13 is TRUE continuous motion pauses at the WHILE command Blocks N0100 N0150 execute continually until T13 evaluates to FALSE Then block N0160 executes E 20 Using PC Control Software August 1998 Using the IF GOTO Command When program flow reaches the IF GOTO command and the lt Boolean expression gt evaluates to TRUE program flow continues with the RS 274D command corresponding to the value contained in lt Block Number gt If t
313. rop a Numeric Display e Double click on the new Numeric Display to open the Edit Numeric Display dialog box e Inthe Display Symbol edit box enter the symbol Hopper e Change the Decimal Digits to 0 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B 2 e Click the OK button to close the dialog box and accept the changes Edit Numeric Display Ed Display Symbol H opper v m Numeric Display Definition Display Surface Color EF Decimal Digits p Select Font er Help Activating Operator Screens When you have finished your operator screen should look something like this lt cookies opi CookieMaker ioj x File Edit View Layout Execute Screens Tools Access Help ES E ZIN ight1 ight4 wa a i siti ht2 F ht5 oo Light6 Ors Set Buzzer On For H elp press F1 To see the screen in action make sure you have the Cookie_maker SFC executing and then select the Execute Activate Screens menu command GFK 1424B Appendix D Application Examples D 25 Appendix E GFK 1424B Motion Control The Motion Control programming language is an RS 274D compliant set of text based instructions for motion control operations The language lets you design two and three dimensional motions by using parameters such as e coordinate positions e feed rates e movement between positions with controlled acceleration and deceleration Motion Control programming consists of
314. rotection to Step algorithms Available only when an SFC program is open for edit Lock Algorithms GFK 1424B Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 11 View Menu Description Toolbar Displays editor commands as icons Status Bar Displays the editor window status bar Contact Coil Bar When editing an RLL program the Contact Coil bar displays the program elements that can be used in the program Available only when an RLL program is open for edit When editing an SFC program the SFC toolbar displays the program elements that can be used in the program Available only when an SFC program is open for edit Function Block Palette When editing an RLL program the Function Block Palette displays the function blocks that can be used in the program Available only when an RLL program is open for edit Application Icon When editing an SFC program the Application Icon Palette displays Palette i the Icons that can be used in the program Available only when an SFC program is open for edit Accessory Bar Displays the Structured Text or Instruction List accessory bar that automatically inserts program statements Watch Force At runtime this window displays variables and their current values Variables You can specify force new values for them to help in debugging your program Available only when a program is open for edit Displays the I O fault window Output Window f Displays message that occur at runtime appear in this window Program
315. rs daughterboard A 1 A 2 electrical characteristics motherboard specifications PID proportional integral derivative control 4 98 Pointer operators Pointer symbol definition Power flow monitoring Power loss 2 19 Power supply requirements Power down sequence 2 32 Predefined Motion Control Predefined system symbols PRGCB Rewind Function 4 101 Printing program cross references 2 24 programs Profibus I O configuring 3 22 Program creating new 3 4 Program Control Block PRGCB Status Code Program elements editing 4 39 moving 4 39 Program Execution 2 2 2 6 Boson flow control control loops jump and label construct Program Flow Control in motion 1445 as lications JE 19 Program label 4 Index 8 Using PC Control Software August 1998 Program management Program Manager Program operation Activate confi guration 2 32 File names 2 34 First scan Normal operation Power down sequence 2 32 Program operation overview 2 33 Program Status Panel 6 30 Project agemen 2 21 Project Menu Projects B 2 a S3 activating configuration 2 21 copying creating new opening opening new renaming Properties ActiveX controls 6 37 Proportional Integral Derivative PID 4 98 example 4 99 notes on using 4 99 Q Qualifiers Action 4 47 G Motion 4 46 G 9 Quick Start 2 4 R REAL Redoing 4 39 Registering Activ
316. rung output accordingly Middle Returns a specified number of characters from the middle at a specified position of the input string Displays a message in the Output Window Returns a Boolean TRUE if the inputs are not equal otherwise returns FALSE Sets the RLL rung output accordingly Converts a real number to an ASCII character string Replace Returns a string formed by replacing characters in one string at a specified position with a specified number of characters from another string Right Returns a specified number of the rightmost characters of the input string Appendix G Instruction Set Reference G 11 Conversion BCD_TO_INT Converts an input Binary Coded Decimal BCD value to an integer Byte Array to String Converts an input array of bytes to ASCII characters and stores BATOS them to a string output The terminating byte must contain zero Date to String Converts a DATE to a STRING value A pointer variable is used DateToString to point to the string Integer to String Converts an integer to an ASCII character string representation of ITOA the value of the integer and returns the result Real to String RTOA Converts a real number to an ASCII character string representation of the value of the number and returns the result RGB to DWORD Converts a triplet of red green and blue values to a DWORD Used by the ActiveX control feature of the Operator Interface STRING_TO_ARRAY
317. s Instruction List IL Instruction List format is similar to an assembly language Structured Text ST Structured text is best suited for complex algorithms string and file operations and manipulation of data structures best done in a procedural text based language It is convenient for those who have experience with structured BASIC Pascal C or other high level programming languages Graphical Languages Ladder Diagram Ladder diagram is commonly used on programmable controllers to Relay Ladder Logic RLL construct discrete logic programs Ladder diagrams are designed to resemble the electrical diagram for an equivalent electrical relay logic circuit The ladder diagram contains two vertical power rails The left power rail is assumed to be an electrical current source and is energized whenever the program is running The power rail on the right is assumed to be an electrical current sink The two power rails are connected by horizontal lines called rungs like the rungs of a ladder on which the logical instructions are placed Sequential Function Chart SFC SFC is best suited for machine sequencing control and for control applications that have multiple operating modes such as manual mode and automatic mode An SFC represents an application program as a series of sequential steps Steps are connected by links and control is passed between steps via transitions as the program executes Control logic can be placed i
318. s Addr A Description Next Previous 120 type Byte Inputs ae Insert Digital Analog Byte Input Input Input Delete Digital Analog Byte Output Output Output F Analoo Bile sap dil Module words f1 Mem byte offset fo T aa Define Ports Define Board j Cancel Help 16 You must also define a unique Port name for each piece of data being defined After defining the Module configuration press the Define Port button You can give the port any name that you want at this point or use the defaults Because you will use this name to reference the data in your program choosing a name with a logical meaning is helpful The screen for defining the port for the BIU status word is shown below PROFIBUS Analog Byte Port Configuration xX 4nalog Byte Inputs Module name Field Control BIN Next Port Module position _ Word oc Previous Port Port name FCBIU_Statuf Save amp Exit Cancel Help 3 32 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Note For modules with multiple words of data you will need to define a port definition for each piece An example of this is an 8 channel analog module There would be 8 port definitions defined You can move through the various ports by pressing the Next Port button Below are sample module and port configuration screens for the rest of the BIU and module data Module Configuration for BIU Control Word PROFIBUS Mo
319. s The dummy step performs no logic however it takes two I O scans for the dummy step to activate and deactivate just like a normal step e A Transition Coil TRANS has been added to the Action logic elements that will terminate execution of any commands within a step stop any motion in progress deactivate the step and cause an immediate transition to a label with the same identifier as the transition coil e Macro Step boxes may be used to include an entire SFC diagram within a SFC Macro Step When the Macro Step is activated the included SFC diagram will begin execution at the Start step When the included SFC diagram executes the End step the Macro Step will be complete e Actions can be attached to Macro Steps and will be executed as long as the Macro Step is active Creating Sequential Function Charts Creating an SFC Program 4 60 After starting the Program Editor you can create a new SFC program or edit an existing one To create a new SFC program 1 Click on the New File on the Program Editor tool bar The new program menu appears SFC Program 2 Select SFC Program and click on OK Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B A new SFC file appears showing a starting Step and an end Step 2 To edit an existing SFC program 1 Click on File Open tool on Program Editor tool bar The list of existing programs appears lki fare a oe fea Sacri sic B Painter sic E Compmt1 sfc
320. s use the View Single Axis Status menu command The Single Axis Status Panel displays the status for a single axis The Single Axis Status Panel is automatically set up for the number of configured axes To display the status for an axis select the axis by pressing the desired axis button on the panel The title of the selected axis is displayed at the top of the panel The status displayed for the selected axis consists of e absolute position e commanded position e following error e velocity An axis fault indicator shows when a fault has occurred on the selected axis When an axis fault occurs the indicator turns red and the fault button is enabled If no fault has occurred the indicator is green To view detailed information about an axis fault press the fault button When the axis fault is cleared the indicator turns green You can activate multiple copies of the single axis motion status to view complete axis status on more than one axis at the same time GFK 1424B Appendix E Motion Control E 25 E 26 Using the Multi Axis Status Panel To view multi axis motion status use the View Multi Axis Status menu command The Multi Axis Status Panel displays the specified status of all configured axes at the same time The specific status that is displayed is selected from any of the following e absolute position POS e commanded position CMD e following error FE e velocity VEL Select desired status by pressing the
321. s button executes a function when it is clicked Functions include setting or clearing a Boolean symbol displaying a screen selecting running stopping or aborting a program getting operator input and running an executable file Functions can be programmed to execute when the button is pressed and when the button is released Gauge The gauge control displays a scale and a rotating pointer The rotating pointer tracks the current value of a symbol assigned to the gauge Four gauge styles are available Indicator An indicator is a state control whose appearance text color etc changes depending on the value of a BOOL or BYTE data type symbol Numeric The numeric display control is used to display a numeric value of a symbol Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Selected Program Status The Selected Program Status Panel displays the name and Panel current status i e running stopped etc of the selected program The selected program is that program selected by a click button or continuous button SELECT PROGRAM command Slide The slide control provides the capability of continuously changing a symbol value When the slide is moved up or down the symbol assigned to the slide control changes value Text The text element can be used to label controls groups of controls document screen functions or otherwise provide descriptions of the screen operation or functionality
322. s execution program flow resumes at Step_2 in the parent SFC Parent SFC Child SFC Parent SFC a g ca 3 na Oi o Representation of a Macro Step is similar to a Step multiple boxes containing an identifier Program flow into and out of the Macro Step is through a vertical line entering the top and another line exiting from the bottom 4 58 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B You can use another program element called an Action to help coordinate the execution of code within a Macro Step with other program code If a local symbol is defined in a parent SFC the child SFC can see the local symbol However you cannot see this local symbol when viewing the Symbol Manager for the child SFC Extensions to IEC 1131 3 PC Control includes several optional extensions to the IEC 1131 3 standard Ladder Diagrams and Sequential Function Charts Extensions to RLL e Output Coils can be placed anywhere on a rung e They store the partial Boolean result evaluated up to that point e They pass power on to the next element to the right e OR branches that do not contain any logical elements are acceptable e They can be used to shunt around a block of logic without deleting it e They generate compiler warnings that signal possible omission of elements Extensions to SFC e Step boxes can include RS 274D or Structured Text commands These commands within a step box will be executed sequen
323. s into the Program Comment Tool cursor 2 Move the cursor to the location in the program where you want to place the comment and click The Program Comments dialog box appears 3 Enter the comment and click on OK The comment appears in the program at the location you specified Editing Program Comments 1 Double click on the comment you want to edit The Program Comments dialog box appears 2 Edit the comment as desired Viewing a Comment Click View and select Program Comments or click the view comments button on the editor tool bar To deactivate the view comments mode Click View and select Program Comments or press the view comments button again Note The view comments mode is activated and deactivated for all files When the view comments mode has been activated the view menu will display a check mark next to the Program Comments command and the edit tool bar will display the view comments button as depressed Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 81 Section 4 Structured Text Programming Overview The Structured Text programming language is an IEC 1131 3 textual programming language It is convenient for those who have experience with structured BASIC Pascal C or other high level programming languages You use the Structured Text editor to create stand alone Structured Text programs The Structured Text editor features typical text editing functions such as cut copy and paste find and replace It al
324. same name as an Action However the RLL logic for Transitions and for Actions is scoped differently Therefore using the same name for a Transition does not mean that the same RLL logic is executed for the Action and vice versa e A window appears containing an RLL rung with a coil of the same name as the Transition 3 Add the RLL elements to the rung through the RLL editor using the same rules for contacts coils jumps etc 4 Save your work by clicking on the Control Menu box and selecting Close 4 66 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Adding a Boolean Transition 73 1 Click Edit on the menu bar and place a check next to Boolean Transition by clicking 2 Click on the Transition Tool on the SFC toolbar The cursor changes into the Transition cursor 3 Move the cursor to the location in the program where you want to place the new Transition and click The new Transition appears in the program at the location you specified Editing a Boolean Transition 1 To edit the Transition click on the Select Tool w and then double click on the Transition The Edit Transition Logic dialog box appears 2 Enter the Boolean code for the Transition You can type it in directly or click on the operator buttons and select from symbols that have been defined 3 Click on OK to save your work and close the dialog box 4 You can access the Symbol Manager to configure local variables and to see a list of all configured
325. screen MMIScreen Trigonometric and Logarithmic Exponential EXP Computes the natural log exponentiation of a number Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B SFC Instruction Set Summary Step A step represents a condition in which the behavior of the factory process is defined by the Actions associated with the Step RLL Transition When power flow on the RLL rung reaches the output coil turning it on the Transition becomes TRUE allowing program flow to move to the next Step Boolean Transition When the Boolean expression resolves to TRUE the Transition becomes TRUE allowing program flow to move to the next Step Macro Step The Macro Step provides a means of calling one SFC for execution from a Step in another SFC Action An action consists of lines of code that are executed when a Step becomes active Action Qualifiers specify constraints on the execution of the RLL code contained in the Action Jump Label Function Transfer program flow to specified label Loop Allows the SFC execution to go back to a previous location in order to repeat a series of Steps Select Divergence A select divergence lets you choose one path to be active from two or more control paths Simultaneous A simultaneous divergence lets you activate multiple control paths Divergence simultaneously in parallel Program control block Allows an SFC application program to compile and control the PRGCB execution of other SFC and RLL appl
326. se 8 or base 16 Examples of numeric literals 0 456 34 7_000 integer literals 0 0 0 11 real literals 2 1010_1010 170 decimal base 2 literal 8 252 170 decimal base 8 literal 16 AA 170 decimal base 16 literal FALSE 0 TRUE 1 Boolean literal Numeric literals have the following characteristics e A numeric literal can contain single underscore _ characters which do not affect the value of the literal e Real literals contain a decimal point e Decimal based numeric literals can contain a leading or sign e The keywords FALSE and TRUE correspond to Boolean 0 and 1 respectively Character String Literals A string literal is a string of 0 or more characters delimited by single quotation marks The dollar sign character has a special use in a string literal If it is followed by two hexadecimal digits it is interpreted as the hexadecimal representation of the eight bit character code It also is used in two character strings to represent the dollar sign single quote and specified unprintable characters 4 4 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Examples of character string literals the empty string XYZ a three character string ne a space 41 42 43 a five character string A B C P dollar sign P single quote L or P line feed N or n new line P or p form feed R or r carriage return T or t tab Time Durat
327. so has tools and commands to automatically insert statement constructs such as IF and CASE selections statements and FOR REPEAT and WHILE loops You can also incorporate Structured Text commands into an SFC step A patented extension to the SFC language allows the integration of Structured Text into an SFC step When you create the application code for an SFC step you can choose to use Structured Text code When the SFC is executed the Structured Text code that you incorporate within each step is processed as the step becomes active Except for certain functions the stand alone and SFC step Structured Text editors operate the same This section provides information on using the Structured Text Editor It is assumed that you are familiar with general Program Editor operation and have some familiarity with the Structured Text language Note Stand alone Structured Text programs run once and exit Opening a Structured Text Document To open an existing document select Open Editor from the Program Editor File menu and locate the document using the Open dialog box that appears To open a new document Select New Editor from the Program Editor File menu and choose Structured Text Document from the New dialog box that appears Editing Structured Text in an SFC Step 4 82 To edit Structured Text in an existing SFC step double click on the step or select the step and choose Edit Element from the Edit menu or Edit ST or Macro Step from the
328. specific status button on the panel The title of the selected status is displayed at the top of the panel For each axis a fault indicator indicates when a fault has occurred on that axis If no fault has occurred the indicator is green When an axis fault occurs the indicator for that axis turns red and the fault button for that axis is enabled To view detailed information on the axis fault press the fault button When the axis fault is cleared the indicator turns green The Multi Axis Status Panel is automatically set up for the number of configured axes Multiple copies of the multi axis motion status can be activated at the same time Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Embedding Structured Text into Motion Control Code As an enhancement to the IEC 1131 3 specification the control system software lets you embed assignments and expressions of the Structured Text language within Motion Control code For example in the following figure block 1 of Step2 causes the X axis to move to HomePos at a speed of RapidSpeed The symbols HomePos and RapidSpeed are assigned values in Step by Structured Text assignment statements Blocks 3 and 4 of Step2 show examples of Structured Text assignment statements that have been embedded in Motion Control code numHoles 10 firstPos 1 356 distBetweenHoles 0 5 HomePos 0 0 SEC step RapidSpeed 600 TraverseSpeed 200 LowerDrill 40 RaiseDrill 41
329. ss than or equal to zero Timer Off Delay TOF Turns off an output after a preset time delay Timer On Delay TON Turns on an output after a preset time delay Timer Pulse TP The TP function block times the duration of an event After its input pulses from off to on the TP keeps time to the preset interval and sets an output FALSE which makes the TP an off delay timer Edge Detect Statement Description Falling Edge Trigger The F_TRIG function block sets an output to TRUE for one scan F_TRIG when the input to the function block transitions from TRUE to FALSE Rising Edge Trigger The RTRIG function block sets an output to TRUE for one scan R_TRIG when the input to the function block transitions from FALSE to TRUE Extended Timers Statement Extended Timer Off Turns off an output after a preset time delay Same as TOF timer Delay XTOF except for two additional inputs LoadTime and NewTime Extended Timer On Turns on an output after a preset time delay Same as TON except Delay XTON for two additional inputs LoadTime and NewTime Extended Timer Pulse XTP The XTP function block times the duration of an event After its input pulses from off to on the XTP keeps time to the preset interval and sets an output FALSE which makes the XTP an off delay timer Same as TP timer except for two additional inputs LoadTime and NewTime Appendix G Instruction Set
330. ssscssssscssssscessses O SO About the DDE Interface eneteitest ries cnc acct r nee e tenes heated eat ates 3 38 DDE Communication with Microsoft s Excel Software 3 38 Transferring Data to Excel sisirin esee r rie ras is 3 38 Transferring Data to the Control System seessesssesssesssesssersseessrrssressrseerseeeserssee 3 39 Transferring Values to the Control System Upon Request sseesseeeeseeeeereeeseeeeeeee 3 39 Section 6 Import Export Configuration scsssccssssssseees 3 4 L Creating Application ProgramS sesssesssocesocesoosssoesssecssocesooessoeess A L Section 1 Configuring Symbols sesssesssooesooessocessecssocesocesooesosesss 422 About Symbol Seena r aaie 4 2 SY IDO SCOPE aae E E E E E A E e 4 2 Identifiers G55 nenta noan a a a A A EA aI 4 3 E I E E E EEEE 4 4 Numere Lateral sson er pe EEEE E EEE EE TE T E E EET 4 4 Character Stine Literals esimene e a E a AU coe ea theee 4 4 Time Duration Literals siin ne ea a ists o aE S a 4 5 Time of Day and Date Literals oo eee ee cee cesecne cece cseecneeeeeseeeeeeeeeeessensecnaeenseenaes 4 6 Data Typeset inperio aE E TEAKE ATE aia 4 7 Contents ix Contents BOOL Boolean 435 23 c bith el eens tect A lene Sees AA ead 4 7 lED A D A a E E E EEO E E EE AEE E OR 4 7 DATE io atten ite EA EEE E E S EE sitet sicheete a teaet 4 8 DINT Double Integer nnnc e E E E A E a ok 4 8 DWORD Double WORD ireira eaea E r EE EATR 4 8 INE CLE BEL
331. sswords are used to control access to application programs operator interface screens and configuration data There are five access levels with a different access code for each The following table describes the privileges of each level The lowest access level is 0 each successively higher access level has the privileges of the preceding levels Access Level Privileges 0 Activate operator screens and use controls Select and run SFC programs from the Operator Interface 1 Open view run and stop programs 2 Edit SFC structured text and instruction list programs Perform project management functions 3 Edit RLL programs Modify the operator interface Modify system configuration files 4 Change the passwords for access levels 1 to 4 The default access code is 4567 Note If you have the Program Editor open changing the access level within the Operator Interface does not change the access level of the Program Editor GFK 1424B Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 7 2 8 Entering an Access Code Program Editor and Operator Interface require access codes The Program Editor automatically presents the access level keypad upon startup To Enter an Access Code From Thens S Program Editor Click the numbers on the keypad that represent your access code and click OK Operator Interface Click Access from the menu bar and select Password A keypad appears Click the numbers on the keypad that
332. st followed by the operator with the next highest precedence Operators of equal precedence are evaluated left to right Identifier argument list e g LN A ABS X Function Evaluation Exponentiation Negate Complement Multiply Divide Modulo Add Subtract Comparison Equality Inequality Boolean Bitwise AND AND Boolean Bitwise Exclusive XOR OR These symbols have the following functions e assigns an expression to a symbol e required to designate the end of a statement Precedence 2 e used for array indexing where the array index is an integer For example this sets the first element of an array to the value j 10 intarray i j 10 e used to designate a label For example this specifies a label spray_on Labels must be followed by a statement on the same line e designates a comment For example This is a comment Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 97 About the Statement Types The Structured Text statements which provide for the actual program execution consist of the following types e Assignment Sets an object to a specified value e CASE Provides for the conditional execution of a set of statements e Comment Provides for comments to be included within the program e EXIT Terminates iterations before the terminal condition becomes TRUE e FOR Indicates that a statement sequence be executed repeatedly based on the value of a control symbol
333. stem Refer to the control implementer for control usage and distribution rights and agreements Editing ActiveX Controls ActiveX controls can be moved and resized as with the standard controls The effect of resizing a control is dependent on the control and does not necessarily produce the expected result Other editing operations such as delete cut copy and paste work the same as for standard controls Editing Properties To edit properties do one of the following e Select the ActiveX control and choose Edit ActiveX Properties from the Edit or context menu or use the tool bar e Double click on the ActiveX control and choose Edit Property Pages from the Select ActiveX Editing Mode dialog box that appears Property page dialogs come from inside the control itself This means that all controls have a different property page dialog box For controls that do not have a property page dialog box a message indicating this appears instead Note You must refer to the ActiveX control provider for information on the control properties This information is not provided within the Operator Interface Screen Editor itself However if a help file is provided with the control it may be accessed from the control dialog box GFK 1424B Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 37 s 6 38 A typical property pages dialog box is shown in the following figure I COMponents XYPlot Control Properties Editing Meth
334. sume a user structure UserStruct1 is defined and pStruct1 is defined as a pointer to this user structure For user structure symbols the name of the user structure in this case UserStruct1 is a pointer to the user structure data values However the user structure name can never be assigned to a different location it will always point to the user structure pStruct1 UserStruct1 pStruct1 is assigned the location of UserStruct1 pStruct1 intMember1 Varlnt1 The intWember1 member of UserStruct1 is assigned the value of Varlnt1 A pointer that is assigned an address in an array e g pInt amp intArray 5 can be used with the array index operator pInt Index to index into the array This index starts with 0 the array element pointed to by the pointer and continues to the end of the array For example intArray is defined as an array of ten integers ARRAY 1 10 plnt is defined as a pointer to integer type Then plnt amp intArray 5 plnt 0 0 intArray 5 plnt 5 5 intArray 10 For additional examples of the use of array pointers refer to page E 5 A null value can be assigned to a pointer symbol as follows pint NULL plint is assigned the NULL pointer value Pointer symbols can be assigned to and compared equal and not equal to NULL NULL is a system keyword The location of a pointer symbol can be initialized in a MOVE function block The output of the MOVE function block is the poi
335. symbol lights e The Bit Shift Left BSL and Bit Shift Right BSR on rungs 4 and 5 the bit shift function blocks can be found on the Bitwise Function Block Pallet each shift the symbol lights by 1 Each of the Bit Shift dialog boxes should be configured as follows D 18 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Bit Shift Left Ea r Inputs r Outputs Enable EN BOOL Enable Output ENO BOOL Rung Input Rung Output Input IN ANY_BIT Output QUT ANY_BIT Shift Number NJ AN Y_INT 1 v Cancel Symbol Manager Help Exercise 8 Executing the Sample Program e Torun cookie_makre SFC use the Execute Run menu command If the PC CONTROL Runtime Subsystems are not active the user will be prompted to startup the runtime subsystems Once the program begins running the program display will highlight Active steps and transitions will be highlighted in green e Open the Watch Window by clicking the Watch Window Icon on the Program Editor Tool Bar GFK 1424B Appendix D Application Examples D 19 e Click the Add button Highlight the following symbol names by clicking on them with the left mouse button Click the OK button to close the Add dialog box and add the symbols The Watch Window should look like the following light6 BOOL O FALSE switch BOOL I FALSE switch2 BOOL I FALSE e Force symbols as necessary to control program execution Exercise 9 Creating an Operator In
336. t SHR Returns a value calculated by shifting the bits of the input value a specified number of positions to the right Bit values shifted from the least significant bit position are discarded during the shift and most significant bit positions are zero filled Character String Concatenate Returns the result of concatenating two strings appending one string to the end of another string Delete Returns the result of deleting a specified number of characters from a specified position in the middle of the input string Find Returns the starting position of one string within a second string FIND returns 0 if the string is not found Insert Returns a string formed by inserting one string of characters into another string at a specified position Left Returns a specified number of the leftmost characters of the input string Length Returns the length of a character string Middle Returns a specified number of characters from the middle at a specified position of the input string Appendix G Instruction Set Reference G 17 G 18 Replace Returns a string formed by replacing characters in one string at a specified position with a specified number of characters from another string Right Returns a specified number of the rightmost characters of the input string Equal EQ Returns a Boolean TRUE if the inputs are equal otherwise returns FALSE Sets the RLL rung output accordingly
337. t TAN Calculates the tangent of the input which must be in radians G 20 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Appendix H GFK 1424B Glossary of Terms CFG A file with the extension of CFG is a data file that contains information about the system hardware configuration parameters and symbolic information that refers to physical components and the I O signals Action Qualifier Graphical programming element in an SFC associated with each action block that controls execution of the action logic relative to the period during which the associated Step is active Action Named collection of operations associated with one or more Steps in an SFC Active File Program file that is contained in the top Program Editor window with it s title bar highlighted Commands that are executed from the menus or by clicking on buttons on the tool bars are performed on the active file ANY Generic data type that can represent any of the supported data types ANY BIT Generic data type that can represent these data types DWORD WORD BYTE BOOL including an individual bit within these data types ANY_INT Generic data type that can represent the INT UINT or DINT data type H 1 H 2 ANY_NUM Generic data type that can represent these data types ANY_REAL and ANY_INT ANY_REAL Generic type name that can represent the REAL data type Application icon An application icon is a step template with an icon at
338. t be sensed SFC Programs e When editing SFC programs the contents of steps actions and transitions can be freely changed The structure of the SFC the SFC net cannot be changed this will force a program restart including changing the name of an element step action or transition During a seamless online edit the full SFC including any macro SFC is re parsed the program segments representing the steps actions and transitions are seamlessly swapped the symbols maintain their current values and steps actions and transitions which are active remain active I O scanning continues seamlessly e For SFC action qualifiers only the duration can be changed Any other change will force the program to be restarted e For SFC steps which contain Structured Text if the step is complete the Structured Text has finished executing it will remain complete with any active actions still scanning If the step is not complete the Structured Text is still executing the Structured Text will start over from the beginning File Operations GFK 1424B Online Edit and File operation features have some basic incompatibilities The nature of Online Edit ensures that all variables including File Control blocks maintain their current state during the online edit During Online Edit the Structured Text inside a step is restarted If a set of Structured Text file commands are executing during an Online Edit the commands will be restarted but the fi
339. t the bus is not functioning properly the malfunctions below may describe the problem If so follow the procedures listed under the appropriate malfunction An LED does not come ON when a PCIM is plugged in and powered up If Board OK OFF and Comm OK ON Check the parameters entered using the configuration software The BOARD OK LED will not come on Check to see if the PCIM is completely inserted in the host backplane connector and that all connector pins are properly aligned If all appears to be in order assume hardware failure replace PCIM If Board OK ON and Comm OK OFF Check for correct cable type and length see Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual GEK 90486 1 See if correct terminating resistors see Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual GEK 90486 1 are installed at both ends of bus Determine if serial bus wiring has been completed in a daisy chain fashion Make sure cabling is not in proximity to high voltage runs Look for a broken cable GFK 1424B Appendix A The Personal Computer Interface Module for Genius I O A 18 If both LEDs off Check to see if the PCIM is plugged in seated properly and receiving power If both LEDs flashing together Two devices on the same bus have probably been configured with the same device number serial bus address Check using the HHM Repeated bus errors Ensure that cable shielding is properly installed and grounde
340. tached Whenever an application icon is placed in a SFC program a new step is created and the information in the application icon is copied into that step Board See I O Card BOOL Member of the ANY_BIT group of data types BOOL data types are valid in any instruction or function block that accepts an ANY ANY_BIT or BOOL data type A BOOL is one bit in length and can have one of two values TRUE 1 or on or FALSE 0 or off Boolean transition Type of transition in an SFC represented by an expression consisting of symbols and operators that evaluate to a single Boolean result If the Boolean result is TRUE then the SFC transition condition is satisfied Boolean Logical element or expression that evaluates to either TRUE or FALSE BYTE Member of the ANY_BIT group of data types BYTE data types are valid in any instruction or function block that accepts an ANY ANY_BIT or BYTE data type A BYTE is an unsigned integer data type that is composed of one or more of the digits 0 9 and cannot contain a decimal point A BYTE is 8 bits in length and has a range of 0 to 255 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Card See I O Card Character Position Position of a character within a string The first character in a string starts at position 1 Coil RLL graphical programming element that represents a Boolean output symbol Configuration File A Configuration File contains data and parameters
341. tatus information for file operations These variables contain the status information for the PRGCB data type Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Run Time Symbols The following symbols are automatically created by the system software These symbols are accessible from the Symbol Manager or the Watch Window and can be used in user application programs Symbol Name Description RT_ERROR INT Math errors 0 no error 1 divide by zero 2 negative square root RT_ERROR must be cleared by the user RT_FIRST_SCAN BOOL set to TRUE on the first scan of the first program running in the PC Control Runtime engine After all programs are aborted RT_FIRST_SCAN will be set again for the first scan of the first program to run RT_SCAN_OVERRUN BOOL set to TRUE when I O scan logic scan exceed scan rate RT_MAX_SCAN REAL duration in milliseconds of maximum runtime engine scan RT_LAST_SCAN REAL duration in milliseconds of last runtime engine scan RT_AVG_SCAN REAL duration in milliseconds of average runtime engine scan runtime scan logic I O overhead Rolling average calculated over the last 100 scans RT_LOGIC_MAX REAL duration in milliseconds of maximum logic scan RT_LOGIC_LAST REAL duration in milliseconds of last logic scan RT_LOGIC_AVG REAL duration in milliseconds of average logic scan Rolling average calculated over the last 100 scans RT_IO_MAX REAL duration in mil
342. ter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 27 flow continues to agitl even if vlv1 is not on If power flow continues to coil Sys1 then it turns on the circuit completing power flow to the right rail ulvi pmp1 agiti Sys1 a bs i epg R How RLL Logic is Solved When Function Blocks Are Used Function blocks provide a mechanism for solving more complex operations not easily handled by contacts and coils such as e math operations e logic functions e counter and timers etc Function block inputs receive power flow from the rung and transfer power flow to the next element on the rung through their outputs They can also read and write data from their internal inputs and outputs In the following example the division function block DIV is enabled by its rung input EN which receives power flow when contact I75 is enabled It receives divisor and dividend data through two internal inputs IN1 IN2 The function block writes the quotient to an internal output OUT and transfers power flow to the next program element Q44 through its rung output ENO Creating a Relay Ladder Logic Program To open the RLL editor and begin creating a program you need to enter the Program Development environment 1 Start the Program Editor 2 Click on File and select New Editor The New dialog box appears 4 28 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B New ALL Program SFC Program 3 Select RLL Program
343. ter the following State 3 buzzer TRUE e To view all the step commands click the View drop down menu and select All Steps As Commands When finished your program should look like this Hopper gt 2500 Hopper gt 2000 Hopper gt 3000 Step6 T gt TA10s State 2 Hopper 0 Step7 T gt TH15s HOT buzzer switch1 GFK 1424B Appendix D Application Examples D 13 2 Exercise 7 Adding and Editing Action Blocks Editing Steps 3 4 amp 5 Select the action tool from the SFC Tool Bar Move the cursor over the top leftmost step Step3 Click to attached an action to that step The step will now look like this H HULLActionLogic Hopper gt 3000 Double click on the action name to open the Edit Action Association dialog box Select the Action Name edit box Type in the name for the new action For this example program type in the name Flour and click the OK button Since this action does not yet exist a dialog box appears and ask if you want to create it Click the OK button to create the new action A window will open which contains an empty RLL program for the new action Using the drop down list box on the Function Block pallet select the Math pallet Function Block Palette xi EE avo sue mue ov nec mon move ass sort exer Click on the ADD function block button The cursor will change to the Function Block Cursor Place the cursor on the horizont
344. terface and refers to the body of functionality that allows the human operator to interact with the machine or process controller 0 I O stands for inputs and outputs to and from the controller 1 0 Card Plugs into one of the expansion slots of the system unit and connects to the peripheral TO racks and modules Also called card or board 1 0 Scanner TO scanner is a task within the system that is responsible for retrieving all inputs from and transmitting all outputs to the I O interface The I O scanner updates the internal I O data tables that are used by the other subsystems ICON An Icon is a picture that represents another object In SFC may be used to represent step boxes or macro steps Icons can contain predefined functionality and can be used for function libraries or canned routines GFK 1424B Appendix H Glossary of Terms H 5 IEC 1131 3 IEC 1131 3 is an international standard from the International Electrotechnical Commission defining programming languages for Programmable Controllers Instruction List Instruction List is a textual language defined by IEC 1131 3 INT Member of the ANY_NUM group of data types INT data types are valid in any instruction or function block that accepts an ANY ANY_NUM ANY_INT or INT data type The INT is a signed integer data type that is composed of one or more of the digits 0 9 and cannot contain a decimal point In an enhancement to the IEC1131 3 specification the INT is
345. terface Screen D 20 To create a new operator screen select the Edit New Screen drop down menu command The Select New Screen Name dialog box is displayed Type in CookieMaker and press the OK button A blank operator screen is created with the screen name in the title bar s OPI CookieMaker OF x When an Operator Interface file is created a default PC Control screen is generated and set as the Start Screen Once a new screen has been created using the Edit Delete Screen drop down menu the default screen can be deleted from the Operator Interface file and a new Start Screen selected Adding Operator Controls Indicator So that you can see the status of the cookie making machine add some indicators You should create six to reflect the current state of the lights and one to let you know where in your program you are Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B 2 e Select the Indicator tool from the Operator interface tool bar The cursor will change to the Indicator cursor Move the cursor over a desired spot on the Operator Interface screen and click the left mouse button to drop an indicator control e Double click on the new indicator to open the Edit Indicator dialog box e Inthe State Symbol list box type or select from the drop down list the symbol light1 This will cause the indicator to change appearance based on the current value of light1 e Click the Define Indicator Face button fo
346. the Profibus directory Insert Slave Slave type all Master CIF30 DPM CIFIO4 DPM x Available slaves Selected slaves 4B DT PDP CIF30 DPS CIF104 DPS COM DPS a Field Control PROFIBUS BIU PKV30 DPS Add All gt gt VersaMax Profibus NIU lt lt Remove All lt lt Remove Vendor name Hilscher GmbH Station address l Ident number None Description GSD file name 6 Select the appropriate slave device and press the Add button The address for the device on Profibus will be automatically incremented to the next available address You can now edit the address to match the address of the actual slave Slave type all Master CIF30 DPM CIF104 DPM OK Available slaves Selected slaves Cancel Field Control PROFIBUS BIU 4B DT PDP CIF30 BPS CIF104 DPS COM DPS Field Control PROFIBUS BIU PKY30 DPS Add All gt gt VersaMax Profibus NIU lt lt Remove All lt lt Remove ul Vendor name GE Fanuc Automation NA Ine Station address 2 Ident number 00534 ftesonstcn Cr GSD fle name GEF_0534 GSD Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 25 After selecting OK you should see the following network screen Repeat this step for every slave device you have in your system Stotion acwress 1 DP Master CIF3O DPM CF104 DPM Seton sccresa 2 DP Sine Field Cortrol PROF BUS SIU 7 You can now edit the configuration of your slave device s Double click the device that you want
347. the current system date and can be used to determine when an event takes place The following operators can be used with the TODAY symbol EQ LT GT LE GE and NE Use the assignment statement or MOVE command to define a value for TODAY Use the ADD command to add a time duration to TODAY Contains the current system time The NOW system symbol is a TOD data type that contains the current system time and can be used to determine when an event takes place The following operators can be used with the NOW symbol EQ LT GT LE GE and NE Use the assignment statement or MOVE command to define a value for NOW Use the ADD command to add a time duration to NOW Used to set a pointer symbol to a null value or to compare a pointer symbol equal or not equal to a null value These variables contain status information for the TMR data type These variables contain status information for RLL counters CTD CTU and CTUD These symbols are Local to the application program These variables contain status information for RLL timers TOF TON and TP These symbols are Local to the application program Contains the active inactive status of an SFC step These symbols are Local to the application program Contains the elapsed execution time of an SFC step These symbols are Local to the application program These variables contain status information for the axis axis variables group program control and spindle These variables contain s
348. the currently selected symbol Delete Symbol Delete the currently selected symbol Close Close the Symbol Manager Apply Makes symbol edits visible outside the Symbol Manager Help Displays Symbol Manager help Print Locals Prints a list of local symbols Print Globals Prints a list of global symbols Local User Types Creates a local user type Global User Types Creates a global user type Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 13 Creating a Symbol To create a new symbol click either the Add Local or Add Global button or use the context menu within the symbol list The Symbol Details dialog box appears Enter the appropriate information in the Symbol Details dialog box and click OK The new symbol will appear in the symbol list If a program is not open you can create only global symbols If any program is open you can create both local and global symbols A local symbol can be used only by the program that is open active when you define the symbol Note When done editing symbols be sure to click Apply to make the changes visible outside the Symbol Manager Editing a Symbol 1 Select the symbol you want to edit and press Enter or double click on the symbol 2 The Symbol Details dialog box appears 3 Modify information and click OK to accept changes 4 14 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Symbol Details Symbol Details x Field Symbol Name Tempvar L Space Memory
349. the divergence RLL or Boolean 2 Click on the Select Diverge Tool on the SFC menu bar The cursor changes into the Select Divergence Tool cursor 3 Move the cursor to the location in the program where you want to place the Select Divergence and click The Select Divergence appears in the program at the location you specified 4 Edit the two transitions To Add another path 1 Highlight the top of the Select Divergence before adding another Select Divergence 2 Locate the cursor at the top of the Divergence and click Another divergence path appears 4 76 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Highlight top of Click on Select Diverge Click and another divergence Tool Then place cursor divergence path at top of divergence appears To Delete a Path 1 Highlight the path you want to delete 2 Click the Cut tool S Adding a Simultaneous Divergence A Simultaneous Divergence allows the SFC program execution to follow two or more control paths Execution along each path must be completed for program execution to proceed beyond the Simultaneous Divergence 1 Click on the Simultaneous Divergence Tool on the SFC menu bar The cursor changes into the Simultaneous Divergence Tool cursor 2 Move the cursor to the location in the program where you want to place the Simultaneous Divergence and click The Simultaneous Divergence appears in the program at the location you specified GFK 1424B Chapt
350. the jog or home is cancelled For incremental jogs the axis stops when the increment is completed To jog another increment release and press the jog or jog button The Jog Panel is automatically set up for the number of configured axes The Jog Panel also displays e absolute position e commanded position e following error and velocity status for the selected axis An axis fault indicator shows when a fault has occurred on the selected axis When an axis fault occurs the indicator turns red and the fault button is enabled If no fault has occurred the indicator is green To view detailed information on the axis fault press the fault button When the axis fault is cleared the indicator turns green E 24 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Monitoring Axis Plot Use the View Axis Plot menu command to view axis information plotted with respect to time This command activates a status box that plots selected status information for a selected axis over time The selected axis and status information is displayed at the top of the status box To change the selected axis and or status information press the button with the desired axis and or status information Use the Zoom In Zoom Out Shift Up Shift Down Speed Up and Slow Down buttons to position the axis plot to the desired location Multiple copies of axis status plot can be activated at the same time Using the Single Axis Panel To view single action motion statu
351. the specified time stop Stored and Time A Reset qualifier is required to reset the RLL Otherwise without Limited SL he reset the RLL does not run again duration times out A Reset qualifier is not required but one can be sed to stop the RLL execution L begins running and stop after the specified time expires Pulse Width PW If the Step becomes inactive the RLL continues to run until the duration times out A Reset qualifier is not required but one can be sed to stop the RLL execution The RLL that was started by the Stored qualifier is terminated by the Reset qualifier R You can use the Reset qualifier in another Action that is associated with the same Step or in an Action associated with another Step The RLL continues to run GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 47 4 48 between Steps If the Action is associated with another Step the Action must have the same name as the Action that is to be reset Time Duration You can enter the duration directly or click on Specify Duration and enter time intervals in the dialog box Refer to the rules and examples below for details on entering time duration e If you enter the duration directly follow the IEC 1131 3 specification e T TIME t time followed by time in days hours minutes seconds 14 7 days T 14 7d ime 4s 2 minutes 5 seconds _ T 2mSs 1 day 29 minutes 1d29m 4 minutes Time 74m 1 hour 5 seconds 44 1h5s44ms Imilliseconds
352. the statement following the END_IF keyword e If both Boolean expressions are FALSE StatmentList3 is executed Program execution continues with the statement following the END_IF keyword If an optional part is not present program execution continues with the statement following the END_IF keyword 4 90 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Example The following code fragment puts text into the string variable Message depending on the value of I O point input value IF Input01 lt 10 0 THEN Message Low Limit Warning ELSEIF Input02 gt 90 0 THEN Messag Upper Limit Warning ELSE Message Limits OK END_IF INCLUDE The INCLUDE statement incorporates statements from an external file when the STRUCTURED TEXT file is parsed The external file can contain either Structured Text or Instruction List statements Format INCLUDE FullFilePath Where T FullFilePath is a string that specifies the path and file name of the external file Example INCLUDE C ST_Files ST_Filel TXT FOR Statement The FOR loop repeatedly executes iterates a statement list contained within the FOR END_FOR construct It is useful when the number of iterations can be predicted in advance for example to initialize an array The number of iterations is based on the value of a control variable which is incremented or decremented from an initial value to a final value by the F
353. tially The execution of a step is not completed until all the commands within a step are completed The transition conditions following a step are not evaluated until the contents of the step have been executed e Steps can be represented by a box containing the step name identifier a box containing the command list with the step or an Icon which consists of a bit mapped picture and up to two lines of text e An Icon Palette contains a collection of predefined steps that consists of an Icon and a list of commands within the step These predefined steps can be used for library or canned routines e Files may be marked for inclusion into the command list within a step box Multiple files can be included Program commands may be intermixed with the file include statements e Steps can follow steps without a transition in between As soon as the contents of a Step have been executed and no transition follows the step is deactivated and the next step is activated At runtime a dummy transition is inserted per the GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 59 IEC standard between two consecutive steps The dummy transitions is always evaluated true e Transitions can follow transitions without steps in between Once a transition condition is satisfied the transition is disabled and next SFC element step or transition is activated At runtime a dummy step is inserted per the IEC standard between two consecutive transition
354. time 2 5 Starting the software 3 5 Statement types Structured Text 4 98 Statements ST G 10 Status Bar 2 18 Status of Application Programs 5 6 Status symbols average scan first scan last scan max scan memory usage scan overrun 4 21 scan rate Step system s mbols 4 43 Steps 4 63 adding 4 63 Application Icon Stopping RLL program 6 5 running SFC program 5 3 STRING 49 Structured Text accessory bar editing 4 83 editing in an SFC Step entering statements expressions 4 84 Insert Function menu 4 83 Insert Statements menu integrating into an SFC 4 80 language overview 4 84 opening a Structured Text Document 4 82 operators overview 4 82 Pointer definition pointer operators 4 85F 2 Structured Text Motion functions AXSJOGG 16 MOVEAXS G 16 STOPJOG G 16 GFK 1424B Structured Text Motion Functions AXSJOG E 29 MOVEAXS STOPJOGE 30 Structured Text operators 4 97 Structured Text statement Structured Text sae Structuring RLL application programs 4 26 Suspend on Spindle Commands Feature E 18 Suspend on Tool Changes Feature E 19 Switching Operator Interface modes 6 4 Symbol data types User defined data type Symbol descriptions adding 4 40 editing 4 40 Symbol Enumeration pointer definition Symbol operations editing Symbols copying creating 4 14 creating an array
355. tion DGramStatus Status DGramCmdType Command Type 02 Transmit Datagram 03 Transmit with Reply DGramDestAddr Destination Bus Address DGramFunc Function Code DGramSubFunc SubFunction Code DgramHdrByte5 See explanation below DgramHdrByte6 See explanation below DgramHdrByte7 See explanation below DgramHdrByte8 See explanation below DGramData Array of BYTE Outgoing data DGramReplyData Array of BYTE Reply data When issuing a Transmit Datagram command HdrByteS is the Priority and HdrByte6 is the Length When issuing a Transmit Datagram with Reply command HdrByteS is the reply datagram subfunction code HdrByte6 is the Priority HdrByte7 is the Transmit Data Buffer Length and HdrByte8 is the Reply Data Buffer Length set by the uGeni Board GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 15 Section 3 Configuring Series 90 30 I O PC Control software supports the following Series 90 30 I O boards Designation in PC Control Catalog Number Installation Details PCIF1 IC693PIF301 Appendix B PCIF2 1C693PIF400 Appendix C The PC Interface PCIF Using the 3 16 A PCIF PC Interface Board is used to establish a connection between a PC and a Series 90 30 I O System The PCIF Board Definition Dialog is used to define the configuration of the PCIF Board s hardware and Series 90 30 I O PCIF Board Dialog Board Name Enter a name for this card You may leave the default name or enter a different o
356. tion is solved with power off to turn off outputs Then at the subsequent I O scan power flow activates the next step False The step remains active and any RLL logic is solved As long as the step is active any RLL logic is solved however Structured Text logic is solved only once and at the first I O scan If a transition is false and remains false the system does not re execute the Structured Text or motion code in the steps that precede the transition However RLL logic is re executed Program flow remains at the transition until the transition becomes true Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 57 Using Simultaneous Divergences When creating simultaneous divergences e Do not reference the same symbol as outputs in different paths of the divergence e Do not call the same child SFC from Macro Steps in different paths of the divergence To help ensure proper convergence do not use Labels to jump e outside a simultaneous divergence e into a simultaneous divergence e to another path within a Simultaneous Divergence Using Macro Steps Macro Steps call one SFC for execution from a Step in another SFC Program flow transfers to the SFC that was called child SFC When the child SFC has completed execution program flow returns to the parent SFC and resumes after the Macro Step In the following figure call_A is the Macro Step in the parent SFC that calls the child SFC for execution When the child SFC complete
357. tive program When a program is running and you make a change to the program that cannot be seamlessly implemented the online edit box appears with only the Restart Program and Cancel Changes button active You are prompted the first time a non seamless edit is about to be implemented After you agree to this there is no further notification and the Activate Changes and Parse Changes buttons are disabled If a seamless change was made earlier the non seamless change will force the program to be restarted Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 115 Rules General Symbols I O 4 116 If editing changes are made that cannot be seamlessly updated in the running program non seamless online editing operation applies If the following conditions are met editing changes are made to an active program the changes are saved without activating them seamless changes or non seamless changes and the editor is closed when the editor is started again it will go directly to non seamless online edit mode the online edit box will appear with the Activate Changes and Parse Changes buttons disabled This means that seamless online edits are not remembered across edit sessions but the changes themselves are identified by the file dates SST file compared with SFC file or RST file compared with RLLfile You can seamlessly add new global memory variables To do so from the Symbol Manager add new global memory variables and click
358. to control and monitor a machine or process Program Editor The Program Editor allows you to create and run Relay Ladder Logic Ladder Diagram Sequential Function Chart SFC Structured Text and Instruction List programs Program Manager The Program Manager prepares programs for execution and manages the external interface to Program Execution and the I O Scanner Program Execution Program Execution executes the Relay Ladder Logic Sequential Function Chart SFC Structured Text and Instruction List programs Program Execution runs at Windows NT s REAL_TIME process priority T O Scanner The I O Scanner scans the physical I O devices and makes the information available to Program Execution The I O Scanner runs at the REAL_TIME process priority The I O Scanner retrieves all inputs from and transmits all outputs to the physical I O interface 2 2 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B IEC 1131 Overview IEC 1131 3 is an international standard from the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC 1131 3 specifies the syntax and semantics of a unified suite of programming languages for programmable controllers IEC 1131 3 Programming Languages The IEC 1131 3 languages consist of textual and graphical languages These languages can be used together in an integrated programming environment For information about PC Control software enhancements to the IEC 1131 3 standard refer to the online help Textual Language
359. tom length cables Remote racks can be located up to 700 feet 213 meters and expansion racks up to 50 feet 15 meters from the personal computer Cable Type Part Number 1 meter T cable 1C693CBL300 2 meter T cable IC693CBL301 15 meter point to point cable 1C693CBL302 C 4 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B J2 RUN Relay Watchdog Timer Connection When the run signal to the 90 30 backplane is activated the relay controlling this connector is energized The RUN relay can be wired to control external safety equipment in case the computer or software application fails Under normal operation with active I O the PIF400 watchdog timer is continuously reset to keep the relay in its energized non Normal state If the application software fails to update outputs or access the RUN contact the watchdog timer turns all outputs off after one second This means that all output module circuits go to the off state the RUN LED in each rack power supply is turned off and the relay goes to its Normal de energized state Pin Assignments for J2 RUN Relay Connection Pin Signal Name COM NC NO Normally Closed NC relay contact Normally Open NO relay contact RUN Relay Contact Specifications UL CSA Ratings 125 VAC 0 3 A 110 VDC 0 3 A 30 VDC 1 0 A Minimum Operations Mechanical 100 000 000 Electrical 500 000 30 VDC 1 0 A resistive 100 000 30 VDC 2 0 A resistive P1 Programmer Port
360. tors are either isolated or impedance limited to protect the PCIM from voltage spikes or the misapplication of high voltages on the serial bus connections Troubleshooting As with program debugging hardware firmware troubleshooting is accomplished by thinking logically of the function of each part of the system and how these functions interrelate A basic understanding of the various indicator lights will help you quickly isolate the problem to the PCIM a Bus Controller an I O rack an I O Block or the CPU The total system has to be considered when problems occur The CPU Host computer I O Blocks and external devices connected to or controlled by the Genius TO system must all be operating and connected properly All cable connections as well as all screw down or soldered connections should be checked carefully Replacement Module Concept When a problem arises first isolate it to the major assembly then to the defective module within that assembly The defective module is then replaced from a duplicate set of modules maintained on site Your production line or system is back up fast The defective module can be returned through normal channels under warranty or for service without keeping your production line or system down for an extended period of time The replacement concept minimizes downtime to minutes as contrasted potentially to days The potential savings far outweigh the comparatively small cost of duplicate modules If
361. tructure of the TO systems and global symbol naming The active configuration file is also used by the Program Editor to make system level Input Output and Memory symbols available to you while creating programs When a new configuration file is activated active programs may be aborted if information from the previously active configuration does not exist in the new configuration The activation of a configuration file is recorded in the active project Whenever that project is opened the active configuration file for that project will be activated 3 4 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Navigating Within the Configuration Utility About the System Configuration Dialog Box Using the System Configuration dialog box you can provide a system name to the configuration The file name must be a valid DOS type eight character name No spaces are allowed The system name in the example shown below is Washer Configuration files are stored by default in the current project directory Wash ctg lo x h System Conf N ti i Wash lt Q Empy Soti system Configuration Name fasher QPF Empty Slot 2 ee a System Description Empty Slot3 optional L Empty Slot 4 a Sweep Interval 50 milliseconds BS Empty Slots pan BS Empty Slot 6 Close amp Save Activate Config Help Clear All Faults 1 0 Scan Rate You configure the I O scan interval in the System Configuration dialog box The I O Scan spe
362. ue is a non BOOL the return value can be saved into a variable using the func1 OUT outvar1 syntax In this case the return value is only saved into outvar1 if the function is actually called CAL CALC with TRUE accumulator or CALCN with FALSE accumulator If the function return value is a non BOOL the accumulator should be automatically loaded with the inverted value of the BOOL system error symbol RTERROR If the function is called and an error is flagged by the function the accumulator will be loaded with a FALSE value after the function returns If the function is called and no error is flagged by the function the accumulator will be loaded with a TRUE value GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 111 Program Examples The following figure shows equivalent RLL and Instruction List programs Inputt Input3 Output IL1 i1 R fe FS LD Inputi ORN Input2 ANDN Input3 ST Output 1 For examples of the Instruction List operators in use refer to online help for PC Control 4 112 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B General Operations Example LD Format 0 JMPC CtoF LD 555 MUL Fahrenheit 32 555 SUB 32 ST Celsius JMP Done CtoF LD 32 ADD Celsius MUL 1 8 ST Fahrenheit Done LD 1 LD Run_Timer ANDN FALSE ST Enable GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs CONVERT F TO C 1 CONVERT C TO F JUM
363. ultiplier then click on BOOL value goes TRUE and select a Boolean symbol from the list box If Automatic Reset is checked the Boolean symbol is reset FALSE after the method is called Symbol Manager Displays the Symbol Manager Dialog Help Displays help for the Method Setup dialog box Control Help Displays help for the ActiveX control provided by the control implementer Method Help Displays help for the ActiveX control s method that is currently displayed provided by the control implementer GFK 1424B Chapter 6 Creating Operator Interface Applications 6 41 6 42 Editing Events Most ActiveX controls have a list of events that they report to the operator interface container For example mouse clicks or key presses Events may or may not have parameters associated with them For example an on focus event does not have any parameters but a mouse click event might have two integer parameters for x and y coordinates When an event occurs the operator interface will be able to do two separate things e Set a Boolean symbol TRUE this is an option if the event has at least one parameter argument If the event has no parameters this is mandatory The BOOL is not set to FALSE by the operator interface after the event e Assign the value of an event argument to a symbol if a symbol has been assigned to an event argument in the configuration the value of the argument is assigned to the symbol in operatio
364. umber of bits specified by the shift number Rotate Right Shift Left Shift Right Shifts the input right by the number of bits specified by the shift number Logical Exclusive OR Computes the bitwise Exclusive OR of two numbers Shifts the input left by the number of bits specified by the shift number Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Character String Concatenate CAT Concatenates the second input string to the end of the first input string Delete DEL Deletes characters from the middle of the input string Find FIND Searches for one input string within another Insert INS Inserts an input string into another input string Copy Left LEFT Copies the leftmost characters from the input string Store Length LEN Stores the length of the input string Copy Middle MID Copies characters from the middle of the input string Copy Right RGHT Copies the rightmost characters from the input string Replace RPLC Replaces characters in an input string with another input string Byte Array To String BATOS Takes the input byte array and stores the bytes as characters in a string Convert Integer to ITOA Converts the integer input to an ASCII string ASCII Display a Message on MSGB Displays a message box on the operator screen the Operator Screen Display Message in MSGW Displays a message in the Output Window an Output Window Convert Real to RTOA Converts the real input to an ASCII string ASCII String
365. ure signal UPS Interface Voltage If checked select whether it is a negative or positive voltage Low battery signal Check this option if the UPS provides a low battery signal If UPS Interface Voltage checked select whether it is a negative or positive voltage UPS Characteristics If the UPS does not provide a low battery signal you can enter UPS characteristics by referring to the UPS documentation UPS Service You can set these preferences as needed for your system To Shut Down the UPS e Right click the UPS Monitor icon and choose Shutdown Memory UPS Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Backing Up and Restoring Variables The UPS monitor sets the variable RT_POWER_FAIL or RT_LOW_BATTERY when the respective event occurs You can write application logic to save values to a file on the hard disk and then read those values in on start up to restore values Sample Logic for saving variables IF RT_LOW_BATTERY THEN savedata int1l ImportantValue repeat for all information to be saved OPENFILE FCBVar FILE Backup dat WRITEFILE FCBVar IN savedata CLOSEFILE FCBVar END_IF GFK 1424B Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 31 Section 3 Program Operation Overview Activate Configuration Activating a configuration causes the following actions e Initializes global memory e If outputs are configured disabled enables interface sets outputs to disabled state force won t work and starts s
366. ust be a date Generic type ANY ANY_DATE Size 4 bytes Range Default value D 0001 01 01 DINT Double Integer The DINT is a signed integer data type that is composed of one or more of the digits 0 9 and cannot contain a decimal point Generic type ANY ANY_NUM ANY_INT Size 4 bytes Range 2147483648 to 2147483647 Default value 0 DWORD Double WORD A DWORD is a bit string of length 32 Generic type ANY ANY_BIT Size 4 bytes Range Not applicable Format MSB LSB 6 Default value 0 INT Integer The INT is a signed integer data type that is composed of one or more of the digits 0 9 and cannot contain a decimal point Generic type ANY ANY_NUM ANY_INT Size In an enhancement to the IEC 1131 3 specification the INT is 4 bytes Range 2147483648 to 2147483647 Default value 0 4 8 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B REAL A REAL number data type is a 64 bit value composed of one or more of the digits O 9 is signed and contains a decimal point Generic type ANY ANY_NUM ANY_REAL Size 8 bytes Range 3 402823 E38 to 1 401298 E 45 negative 1 401298 E 45 to 3 402823 E38 positive Default value 0 0 STRING ASCII character string of variable length Generic type ANY Size 64 bytes Default value empty string Format String of ASCII characters in single quotation marks Example This is a valid string TIME This data type is used to represent a time duration in th
367. valid in any instruction or function block that accepts an ANY ANY_BIT or DWORD data type A DWORD is an unsigned integer data type that is composed of one or more of the digits 0 9 and cannot contain a decimal point A DWORD is 32 bits in length and has a range of 0 4 294 967 295 Dynamic Data Exchange DDE is the passage of data between applications accomplished without user involvement or monitoring In the Windows environment DDE is achieved through a set of message types recommended procedures protocols for processing these message types and some newly defined data types By following the protocols applications that were written independently of each other can pass data between themselves without involvement on the part of the user FCB File Control Block An internal data item that is used to control the File I O Operations in Structured Text Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B First Scan Logic is used to execute specific commands only one time during the first logic scan of a program An example may be initializing timers and counter to a specific value First Scan Function Predefined SFC algorithm that carries out a single operation such as Square Root Rotate Left Rewind File etc Function Block Predefined RLL algorithm that carries out a single operation extending the program s capabilities beyond the simple logic implicit to contacts and coils HMI HMI stands for Human Machine In
368. variables that you can use in the Boolean expression Working with Macro Steps A Macro Step provides a means of calling another SFC from the currently executing SFC Adding a Macro Step cay 1 Click on the Macro Step Tool on the SFC menu bar The cursor changes into the Macro Step Tool cursor 2 Move the cursor to the location in the program where you want to place the new Macro Step and click The new Macro Step appears in the program at the location you specified GFK 1424B Chapter 4 Creating Application Programs 4 67 Configuring a Macro Step 1 Click on the Select Tool and then double click on the Macro Step The Edit Macro Step dialog box appears Edit Macro Step x m SFC macro step r Display Path name Macro step name Step19 Link File Edit Linked File C Icon cmo eeo 2 Enter the appropriate information for configuring the Macro Step 3 Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box Working with Actions An Action consists of one or more sections of RLL code that are associated with a Step or a Macro Step The system executes an Action when its associated Step becomes active 4 68 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Adding an Action 1 Click on the Action Tool on the SFC menu bar The cursor changes into the Action Tool cursor 2 Move the cursor to the location in the program either on top of a Step or on top of a Macro Step
369. x 10 END_FOR_NOWAIT e The following code fragment assigns the values of an I O point to array elements over ten I O scans The last entry is put in the array element with the smallest index Since it is desired to perform an I O scan after each loop the END_FOR keyword is used FOR index 10 TO 1 BY 1 DO ArrayInput index Input01 END_FOR Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Function Call The Structured Text function call executes a predefined algorithms that performs a mathematical string bit string or other operation The function call consists of the name of the function or function block followed by any required input or output parameters enclosed in parentheses Function Format FunctionName Parameterl Parameter2 Un named parameters or FunctionName P1 Parameterl Parameterl Named parameters Function Block Format FunctionBlockName Pl Parameterl P2 Parameterl Example 1 This code fragment shows the TAN function call Result TAN AnyReal Example 2 This code fragment shows a function with named parameters StringB LEFT IN StringA L VarI LABEL The label statement is used within SFC steps only If an action label has an associated label statement in the SFC step then the action does not run until the label is encountered Format ActionLabel Statement Where ActionLabel The name of an action label Stateme
370. x E Motion Control E 29 E 30 STOP OG The STOPJOG function stops a jog command on a specified axis Format STOPJOG lt axis gt Where lt axis gt is the axis name X Y Z etc Example STOPJOG Z Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Operator Interface Motion Controls J og Panel GFK 1424B The Jog Panel provides the functions needed to home and jog configured axes The jog axis panel contains buttons to select the jog axis jog type home continuous or incremental jog speed and jog increment The selected axis is displayed at the top of the Jog Panel The Jog Panel also displays absolute position commanded position following error and velocity status for the selected axis An axis fault indicator is used to indicate that a fault has occurred on the selected axis If no fault has occurred the indicator is green When an axis fault occurs the indicator turns red and the fault button is enabled To view detailed information on the axis fault press the fault button When the axis fault is cleared the indicator turns green The selected axis is jogged or homed in the desired direction by pressing and holding the Jog or Jog button If the Jog or Jog button is released the jog or home is aborted For incremental jogs the axis stops when the increment is completed To jog another increment release and press the Jog or Jog button raui X Axis Jog Speed X_ Actual Pos 0000 0000 count
371. xt Code is Evaluated When program flow encounters a block containing Structured Text program execution and all motion activity pauses briefly Program flow then continues with the next block that follows the Structured Text Expressions are evaluated at the time of execution when the block is executed and can represent the result of real time inputs such as sensor data They are evaluated as integers or real numbers as appropriate for the Motion Control word Because the control system software has a read ahead capability Structured Text assignment statements are read and executed before program flow encounters the block containing them You can control the execution of a Structured Text assignment by placing a G04 command in the block that precedes the block containing the assignment The read ahead feature does not extend beyond a G04 command For example in the following figure the assignment statement in the fifth block of Step2 is not executed until program flow encounters the statement Without the G04 command in the fourth block symbol I may be set to zero before the second or third block is executed Start numHoles 10 firstPos 1 356 distBetweenHoles 0 5 HomePos 0 0 RapidSpeed 600 TraverseSpeed 200 LowerDrill 40 RaiseDrill 41 SFC Step NO01X HomePos F RapidSpeed N002 G4F1 NO003 postn firstPos N004 G4F 1 I 0
372. y 3 36 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Below is an example of using the 16 point input module located in slot 1 in an ADD function block GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 37 Section 5 Dynamic Data Exchange About the DDE Interface PC Control software allows a DDE interface option to third party software to communicate with the control system software through a DDE interface When the DDE interface is enabled PC Control accepts external program commands and read write requests from to the control system I O and global memory variables DDE Communication with Microsoft s Excel Software You can use the DDE features in Microsoft Excel software to transfer data to and from global symbols Using Excel you can transfer data from the control system for summary and analysis You can also transfer data from Excel to PC Control for controlling control system program execution or to provide features such as a low level recipe management system Transferring Data to Excel To transfer the value of a global symbol to a cell in a Excel Spreadsheet enter a formula like the following into the cell that is to receive the value ProgMgr _main _main VariableName or ProgMgr _main _main ArrayName 4 The string _main _main is the DDE topic and will allow you to fetch global variables Make sure that you type one and only one space between the two _main as shown in the formula above Replace the VariableN
373. y changes to the Shared RAM Address should be made in the PCU 1 0 Port Address This field specifies the starting location of the four bytes used to configure and control the port The second two bytes are the bytes which are specified by the DIP switches on the Dual port board e g a value of 0x222 would be mapped to 0x220 The I O Port Address must match the value specified by the DIP switches for the Single Port Board and be 2 less than the value specified by the DIP switches in the Dual Port Board PCIM Bus Address This field specifies the serial bus address for this port GFK 1424B Chapter 3 Configuring I O 3 9 3 10 Test Port Configuration Button The Test Port Configuration Button is used to validate the values specified in the Interrupt Number Shared RAM Address and I O Port Address fields by trying to start the PCIM board The board must be present for this operation to have any meaning Auto Configure Network Devices The Auto Configure Network Device button causes the PCIM Driver to scan the Genius I O bus for all of the devices which are on line The devices are automatically entered into the configuration Setup Global Data Button This button allows you to setup global data for the port Opens the Global Data Setup dialog box Define PCIM I O Button The Define PCIM I O Button opens the Genius Bus Address Definitions dialog box which is used to specify the devices on the Genius I O bus OK Button The
374. ymbol attached to a contact is TRUE the contact will highlight regardless of its position on a rung In other words a contact being highlighted does not necessarily mean the other contacts in front of it are also TRUE Active SFC Programs When a SFC program is running any active steps and or transitions will be highlighted If an active step is displayed with process commands an active command indicator will be displayed to the left of the command that is currently executing GFK 1424B Chapter 5 Running Application Programs 5 5 Viewing the Status of Application Programs 5 6 To view program status 1 Click View 2 Select Program Status Program Status window is displayed with a list of active programs and their status To view the program Double click on a program To issue a program command Select the desired program from the list box and push the button with the desired program command View Run Abort Stop or Step Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Chapter 6 GFK 1424B Creating Operator Interface Applications PC Control contains integrated Operator Interface software PC Control GUI that can be configured to control and monitor automation applications Because of the tight integration with the Program Editor all the global Symbols in the active configuration are immediately available in the Operator Interface software This chapter provides the following information e Overview of O
375. you did not purchase a duplicate set of modules with your initial system we recommend that you contact your authorized GE Fanuc distributor and do so Then with the help of this manual and the staff of your local authorized GE Fanuc distributor you will be able to troubleshoot and repair just about any problem that may arise PCIM Troubleshooting LEDs A malfunction causing the improper operation of a PCIM can generally be isolated by checking the condition of the status indicator LEDs on the PCIM The normal condition of the status indicator LEDs is the ON state If a LED is not ON check the troubleshooting sequence in this section for the proper course of action A 16 Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B Indicator Status Definition BOARD OK ON Power is available to the PCIM adequate power must be available for it to function properly and the on board self diagnostics test was passed OFF The watchdog timer has timed out indicating a board failure or improper address assignment or RST input line is low COMM OK ON Power is available the controller s communications hardware is functional and it can send data receives the token every serial bus scan OFF or FLASHING means an error has been detected in the communications hardware or access to the Genius serial bus Fault Isolation and Repair If the status indicator LEDs are in the correct state bu
376. ype Impedance will be 75 100 120 or 150 ohms If a PCIM connector is at either end of its bus install the appropriate terminating resistor across the Serial and Serial 2 terminals The Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual lists appropriate terminating resistors for each recommended bus cable type Removing the PCIM from the Bus The PCIM s bus connectors are removable they can be removed while the system is operating without compromising data integrity on the bus To remove a bus connector hold it carefully by its top and bottom sides and pull it away from the PCIM If an operating cable is presently attached to the bus be very careful not to touch the bus wires to each other or to anything else Do not put the connector down on a conductive surface Individual bus wires should never be removed from the connector terminals while the bus is in operation the resulting unreliable data on the bus could cause hazardous control conditions GFK 1424B Appendix A The Personal Computer Interface Module for Genius I O A 13 Specifications Catalog Numbers Single channel PCIM Dual channel PCIM LEDs 2 for each daughter board Electrical Power Requirements Bus Loading Bus Drive Capability Mechanical PCIM board type Hand held Monitor connection Serial bus connection Host backplane interface Memory Requirements Mother board Each daughter board Environmental Requirements Operating Temperature Humidity Altitu
377. zed computer and select Register Transfer to write a unique signature file for the computer This option is only active when the software has been started in demo mode Using PC Control Software August 1998 GFK 1424B GFK 1424B Transfer Out Temporary Authorization Reset Original Authorization Emergency Authorization Chapter 2 Getting Started Transfer Out is the second step in the process of transferring a software license from one computer to another After completing the Register Transfer process on the unauthorized computer place the floppy disk in the authorized computer and select the Transfer Out option The software license will be removed from the computer and placed on the floppy disk This software license can only be transferred to the computer that wrote the original signature file to the floppy This option is only active on an authorized computer Description Transfer In is the last step in the process of transferring a software license from one computer to another Place the floppy disk in the computer that has had the software license transferred Select Transfer In to move the software license to the computer A software license can only be transferred to the computer that wrote the original signature file to the floppy Temporary authorization permits you to temporarily provide full development authorization on a run time only system Each run time only system comes with 30 minutes of free tempo

Using PC Control Software, GFK-1424B

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents